Infoprint™ 4100

InfoPrint 4100 Models with the
InfoPrint POWER Controller Operator Console
Planning and Configuration Guide
G550-0990-00
InfoPrint 4100 Models with the
InfoPrint POWER Controller Operator Console
Planning and Configuration Guide
G550-0990-00
Note:
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in ii and “Notices” on page 255.
First edition (November 2007)
|
This edition applies to InfoPrint® 4100 printers with controller code at version 15.4 or higher.
|
|
This edition replaces IBM InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint POWER Controller Operator Console: Planning
and Configuration Guide , G550-0990-00.
Internet
Visit our home page: http://www.infoprint.com
You can send comments by e-mail to [email protected] or by mail to:
InfoPrint Solutions Company, LLC
6300 Diagonal Hwy 002J
Boulder, CO 80301-9270
U.S.A.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007. All rights reserved.
Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Preface . . . . . . . . . .
About this Publication . . . . .
Terms. . . . . . . . . . .
InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2,
Related Publications . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
HS3,
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
MD1/2,
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
HD4/5, and HD5/6 Advanced
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
Function Printers Library
. . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InfoPrint 4100 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplex Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration for a Simplex Printing System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex System Printing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 . . . . . . . . .
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 . . . . . . . . .
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 . . . . . . . . .
Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6
‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 . . .
Left-Angle Configuration for Dual Simplex Printing . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Page-Printing Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combining Text with Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Orienting Text and Images on a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Function Image and Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple-up Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Stored Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TrueType/OpenType Fonts and Unicode print data . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Toner Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) CCD . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Changeable Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Customer Changeable Developers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developer Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1
. 1
. 2
. 2
. 7
. 7
. 7
. 8
. 9
. 9
. 10
. 12
. 13
. 14
. 15
. 16
. 17
. 18
. 18
. 19
. 22
. 22
. 23
. 24
. 24
. 24
. 25
. 30
. 31
. 31
Chapter 2. Specifications . . . . . . . . .
Printing Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Quality Enhancement . . . . . . . . .
AFP Color Emulation Feature (FC 4850 or 4851) .
Simulating Color with Gray Printing . . . . . .
Printer Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . .
480/600 Switchable Resolution . . . . . .
IPDS Resolution (600 dpi Only) . . . . . .
Font Smoothing Mode (480 and 600 dpi Only) .
AFP Resource Resolution . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xiii
xiii
xiv
xiv
xiv
33
33
33
34
34
34
35
36
36
37
38
38
iii
Forms Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Splicing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplex Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPDS Print on Demand (POD) . . . . . . . . . . .
IPDS Production Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host System Adapter Choices . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gigabit Ethernet Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System/390 Fiber Connection (FICON) Channel Adapter .
Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) Channel Adapter
Preprocessing and Postprocessing Device Interfaces . . .
Universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface (UP3I)
Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability . . . . . . . .
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resident Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
43
43
44
46
47
48
Chapter 3. Organizing the Planning Team
Planning Coordinator . . . . . . . . .
Physical Planner . . . . . . . . . . .
System and Application Programmers . . .
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implementation Plan . . . . . . . . .
Fifteen Weeks Before Delivery. . . . .
Ten Weeks Before Delivery . . . . . .
Eight Weeks Before Delivery . . . . .
Six Weeks Before Delivery . . . . . .
Four Weeks Before Delivery . . . . .
Arrival of the Printer . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
49
49
50
50
50
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment . . .
Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gigabit Ethernet SX (fiber) TCP/IP Local Area Network .
Gigabit Ethernet TX (copper) TCP/IP Local Area Network .
FICON Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESCON Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Host Environment . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter cable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a cable feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Function Presentation Licensed Programs . . .
InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation Software . . .
Optical Character Recognition and Bar Code Applications
Installing and Verifying . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53
53
54
54
55
56
57
58
58
63
63
64
65
65
68
68
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . .
Environmental Impact . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat/Power (Models MS1 and MD1/2) . . . .
Heat/Power (Models HS2 and HD3/4) . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
69
69
70
70
70
iv
Planning and Configuration Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
|
Heat/Power (Models HS3 and HD5/6) . . . . . . . . .
Acoustics (Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4) . . . .
Acoustics (Models HS3 and HD5/6) . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Precautions to Prevent Fire . . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional electrical requirements for 50Hz 400 V installations
Interface point requirements for low frequency phenomena .
Print Engine Power Cable and Receptacle . . . . . . .
Vacuum Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipping Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Attachment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
70
70
71
72
72
72
77
77
77
79
79
80
80
88
89
89
89
90
91
Chapter 6. Selecting and Testing
Continuous Forms . . . . . .
Stacking Forms . . . . . .
Special-Purpose Materials . . .
Preprinted Forms . . . . .
Storing Print Materials . . . . .
Testing Forms and Applications .
Valid Form Lengths in Inches . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
95
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Language of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Access Levels and Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing and Defining New Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Definition Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Remote Access for SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Remote Access for Online Access (Web Pages) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Remote Access for E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Remote Access for PRSCD (Printer Reported Service and Configuration Data) .
Troubleshooting LAN Connectivity and LAN Communication Problems . . . . . . . . .
Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices . . . . . . . . . . .
Options for Simplex and Duplex Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Forms
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 97
. 97
. 98
. 98
. 100
. 100
. 100
. 130
. 130
. 131
. 131
. 132
. 132
. 132
. 132
. 133
. 134
. 136
. 136
Chapter 8. Establishing Form Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots
Creating and saving Snapshots . . . . . .
Editing multiple Snapshots. . . . . . . .
Saving Print Quality Settings to a Snapshot .
Understanding Print Quality . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
141
142
143
143
144
v
Copying Snapshots between InfoPrint POWER Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Copying Snapshots from the AFCCU to the InfoPrint POWER Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplies Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD1/2 Supplies Work Sheet .
InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4 Supplies Work Sheet .
InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6 Supplies Work Sheet .
Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Supply Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer-replaceable Supply Items . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
149
149
150
151
152
154
155
155
155
155
155
Appendix B. Work Sheets . .
Installation Planning Work Sheet
Physical Planning Work Sheet .
Duplex Definition Work Sheet .
Simplex Definition Work Sheet .
Snapshots Work Sheet . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
157
158
160
161
189
214
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix C. Standard Power Plug Listings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP . . . .
InfoPrint AFP color and grayscale solutions . . . . . . . . .
Color printing concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color spaces and ICC profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gamut and rendering intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color mixing and calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Halftones and tone transfer curves. . . . . . . . . . . .
File size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grayscale printing concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICC profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rendering intents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AFP color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color management resources . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resource library management . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips and best practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InfoPrint AFP color and grayscale products . . . . . . . . .
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AFP color solution scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing high-quality grayscale output on an InfoPrint 4100 printer
Replacing pre-printed forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eliminating physical inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
221
221
222
222
224
224
224
225
226
227
227
228
229
229
229
237
239
240
241
242
244
245
246
246
248
251
253
Notices . . . . . . . .
Trademarks . . . . . . .
Product recycling and disposal
Communication statements .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
255
257
257
258
vi
Planning and Configuration Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Contents
vii
viii
Planning and Configuration Guide
Figures
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 a . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left-angle duplex configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 . . . . .
‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . .
Combined images and text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portrait orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tumble duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-up printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front of check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back of check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MICR line field positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printable page area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FICON channel adapter options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial channel adapter options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cable lengths for engine and printer control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breaker panel and transformer wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power distribution system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hubbell plug and receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Russellstoll plug and receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of footprint for inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 . . . . . .
Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of footprint for inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 . . . . . .
Left-angle configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 and HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of footprint for left-angle configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
‘H’ configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 (both printers facing the
same direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of footprint for 'H' configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions, service clearance, power cable, and cable locations for InfoPrint 4100 Models
Print Quality panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contrast setting on the Print Quality panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boldness setting on the Print Quality panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preheat Temperature setting on the Print Quality panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser Temperature setting on the Print Quality panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Rate setting on the Print Quality panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Belt setting on the Print Quality panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The InfoPrint products that support AFP color management. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solution diagram for adding AFP Resource Installer and a resource library, and updating one
InfoPrint 4100 printer line to use microcode release 15.4 and the AFP Color Emulation Feature.
Solution diagram for adding InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer and an InfoPrint 5000 printer
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
20
21
21
22
26
26
28
39
56
57
72
75
76
78
79
81
82
82
83
83
84
85
. 86
. 87
88
. 144
. 144
. 145
. 145
. 145
. 146
. 146
. 242
. 247
250
ix
x
Planning and Configuration Guide
Tables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
Optional and required Buffer/Flipper Units for duplex systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Printer resolution options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Software support for the respective adapters and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Host processing systems and adapter choices for InfoPrint 4100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
UP3I device configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Cable and connector types supported by network adapter features . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Feature Codes for jumper cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cable converter kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Example Feature Codes for Common Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cable connectors and receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
MIB variables supported by the InfoPrint 4100 POWER controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ASN.1 documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Bar-code type and modifier combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Operating Environment Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1,
HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3
and HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Basic electrical requirements for the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Basic electrical requirements for the printer control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Basic electrical requirements for the Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1,
HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3
and HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the Buffer/Flipper Units . . . . 90
Printer frame physical dimensions when crated1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Examples of some valid form lengths in inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Settings for Printer Definition → Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Resource Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Settings for Printer Definition → PDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → Edit... . . . . . . . . . 114
Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters . . . . . . . . . 117
Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols . . . . . . . . 123
Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Restricted Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Settings for Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
SNMP Community Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Preprocessing/postprocessing interface options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Default Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Settings for Forms → Form Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Migration of Snapshot settings for the Tractorless and Marks parameters. . . . . . . . . . 140
Snapshot values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
InfoPrint 4100 installation planning work sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
xi
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 physical planning work sheet
Duplex configuration work sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplex configuration work sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snapshots work sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard power plugs for control unit, printer utility module, and Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit
xii
Planning and Configuration Guide
160
161
189
215
217
Preface
This publication introduces and summarizes the functions of the InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3,
MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 with the InfoPrint POWER™ Controller Operator Console and its configurations.
This publication also contains information to help you prepare for installing and using the printer.
The first part of this publication is written for executives who are thinking about buying InfoPrint 4100
Models with the POWER Controller Operator Console. The second part is for the planning team that is
responsible for installing the printer and preparing it for regular operation. The last part of this publication
concerns printer definition (sometimes referred to as printer configuration). It is used for determining how
the InfoPrint 4100 Models with the POWER Controller Operator Console are to be configured during
installation and for changing printer definition items as necessary after the printing system is installed and
operating.
The models supported by this publication are:
v InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1
v InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2
v InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3
v InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1 and MD2
v InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3 and HD4
v InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5 and HD6
About this Publication
This publication contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1, “Introduction,” on page 1 gives an overview of the printer characteristics and basic
concepts.
Chapter 2, “Specifications,” on page 33 describes the printer functions and features in detail.
Chapter 3, “Organizing the Planning Team,” on page 49 describes the installation planning team and
specifies the tasks for which each team member is responsible.
Chapter 4, “Preparing the Processing Environment,” on page 53 describes requirements associated
with channel attachment, pattern storage, and Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs.
Chapter 5, “Preparing the Physical Environment,” on page 69 specifies the printer environmental,
electrical, and space requirements.
Chapter 6, “Selecting and Testing Forms,” on page 93 describes the basic requirements for forms used
in the printers and describes methods for evaluating them.
Chapter 7, “Setting Printer Definition Values,” on page 97 describes the definition options that are
defined at installation time and changed later as needs require.
Chapter 9, “Creating and Copying Snapshots,” on page 141 describes Snapshots and lists the
configuration items that can be saved in a Snapshot, focusing specifically on form settings.
Appendix A, “Obtaining Supplies,” on page 149 lists supplies used in the printers and describes how to
order them.
Appendix B, “Work Sheets,” on page 157 provides work sheets on which you can record your
installation and definition choices.
Appendix C, “Standard Power Plug Listings,” on page 217 provides specifications for standard power
plugs by country for the InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD2, HD4, and HD6 printer control
unit, the MD1, HD3 and HD5 printer utility module, and the Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
xiii
Terms
In InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HD2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 Advanced Function Printers
publications, the terms forms and paper have specific meanings. Forms refers to the media on which the
printer can print. Forms can be blank paper, preprinted paper, adhesive labels, cards, or any other
printable material. Paper refers to a specific fiber-based material used to make forms.
Duplex printing systems operating in duplex mode, such as the InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and
HD5/6, have two printers commonly referred to in this publication as Printer 1 and Printer 2. Printer 1 is
the first printer to print on the forms as they enter. Printer 1 does not have a touchscreen. Printer 2 prints
on the other side of the forms, which have been turned over by the Buffer/Flipper Unit. Printer 2 has a
touchscreen, as well as a keyboard and mouse.
For definitions of other terms, see the “Glossary” on page 263. These comprehensive reference tools
contain not only terms used in this publication, but also terms, abbreviations, and acronyms from other
publications in the InfoPrint 4100 Advanced Function Printers Library.
InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD4/5, and HD5/6
Advanced Function Printers Library
The following additional InfoPrint Advanced Function Printers publications are available:
| v IPDS Handbook for Printers that Use the Advanced Function Common Control Unit and the InfoPrint
|
POWER Controller, G544-3895, which contains technical information about the host-to-printer data
|
stream, and exception reporting.
| v InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint POWER Controller Operator Console: Operator’s Guide,
|
S550-0987, which describes the procedures required to operate the InfoPrint 4100 Models with the
|
POWER Controller Operator Console.
| v InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint POWER Controller Operator Console: Quick Reference Guide,
|
S550-0988, which describes the tasks an operator may need to run when the online help is not
|
available.
Related Publications
An extensive listing of available publications is included in Advanced Function Presentation: Printer
Information
The following publications are referred to in this document:
v About Type: InfoPrint Solutions Company's Technical Reference for 240-pel Digitized Type
v Bar Code Fonts User’s Guide
v Bar Code Object Content Architecture Reference
v Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide
v Cabling System Technical Interface
v Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers
v General Information Manual: Installation Manual–Physical Planning
v Guide to Advanced Function Presentation
v InfoPrint Solutions Company Product Description
v Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference
v Fiber Optic Link Planning
Contact your marketing representative for information concerning the InfoPrint 4100 Advanced Function
Printers, their manuals, or associated licensed programs.
xiv
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 1. Introduction
Chapter Overview
This chapter introduces you to the InfoPrint 4100 with the InfoPrint POWER Controller Operator
Console. For readers not familiar with nonimpact, all-points-addressable printers, this chapter also
defines some basic page-printing concepts.
Printer Characteristics
The InfoPrint 4100 family of printers are nonimpact, all-points-addressable printers. These printers use a
laser, electrophotographic print technology, and Advanced Function Presentation™ (AFP) licensed
programs to create high-quality text and graphics printer output.
Nonimpact printing, combined with all-points addressability, allows graphics and many different type sizes
and styles to appear on a single page. Text, images, and electronic overlays can be placed at any defined
point on the page areas on which the printer can print. The printers can be used for text, image, graphics,
optical character recognition (OCR), and bar-code printing. See “System Characteristics” on page 2 for the
print resolution (pel) of each model.
Using a duplex printing system, the output of the printers can have print on both sides of a form. The
system consists of two printer engines in series, each printing on one side of the form with the forms
inverted between them. You can use one or both of the printer engines in the system for simplex printing
applications.
The printers use continuous-forms in a variety of sizes, styles, and weights, including preprinted forms
(see “System Characteristics” on page 2 for more information). The printers use an automatic assist for
loading most forms. After printing, the forms may be stacked in the printer stacker or processed by an
optional postprocessing device.
The printers use continuous-forms in a variety of sizes, styles, and weights, including preprinted forms
(see “System Characteristics” on page 2 for more information). The printers use an automatic assist for
loading most forms. After printing, the forms may be processed by an optional postprocessing device.
Up to three preprocessing and postprocessing device interfaces can be installed on Printer 1. Printer 2 can
have two interfaces installed. This provides additional input and output capabilities beyond the standard
forms input source and output stacker on the printer.
InfoPrint 4100 models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 can have up to four pre/postprocessing
device interfaces per engine. Up to four preprocessing and postprocessing device interfaces can be
installed on Printer 1. Printer 2 can have four interfaces installed.
v Two pre/postprocessing device interfaces are standard, one in each system printer. Three additional
pre/postprocessing device interfaces can be installed as optional features on Printer 1 or Printer 2.
v See “Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices” on page 136 for more
information.
Performance enhancements, such as the Advanced Function Image and Graphics (AFIG) feature, are
integral to the controller software design. Additionally, the controller software extends the scaling
performance enhancement for compressed images to all scaling factors, enabling the printing of
compressed images at significantly higher levels of performance.
The printer can be used in z/OS, OS/400, AIX®, Windows® XP Professional and Server 2003 Standard
Edition, and Windows 2000 Professional or Server, and can be channel-attached or Ethernet-attached to
many different processors. For additional information, see “Host System Adapter Choices” on page 42.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
1
System Characteristics
InfoPrint 4100 Models
Refer to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers for specific
restrictions and qualifications for each printer model.
Model MS1 (High Quality Simplex)
Modes
Simplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Print Speed
35 inches per second:
247 ipm / 359 ipm ISO A4
254 ipm / 381 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
Minimum mm (in.): 210.8 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Length
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54.0 ± 0.013)
Using Optional internal stacker mm (in.): 356 ± 0.3 (14.0 ± 0.013)
Model HS2 (High Quality Simplex)
Modes
Simplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Print Speed
High Speed (56 inches per second):
406 ipm / 574 ipm ISO A4
395 ipm / 610 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Low Speed (46 inches per second):
333 ipm / 471 ipm ISO A4
324 ipm / 501 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
Minimum mm (in.): 210.8 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Length
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54.0 ± 0.013)
Using Optional internal stacker mm (in.): 356 ± 0.3 (14.0 ± 0.013)
Modes
Simplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Model HS3 (High Quality Simplex)
2
Planning and Configuration Guide
Print Speed
High Speed (66 inches per second):
479 ipm / 677 ipm ISO A4
467 ipm / 720 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Low Speed (56 inches per second):
406 ipm / 574 ipm ISO A4
395 ipm / 610 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 210 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495 (19.5)
Forms Width
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 203 (8.0)
Maximum mm (in.): 495 (19.5)
Forms Length
(Tractored and Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 76 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 711 ± 0.3 (28.0 ± 0.013)
Models MD1 / MD2 (High Quality Duplex)
Modes
Duplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Print Speed (ipm)
35 inches per second:
494 ipm / 718 ipm ISO A4
508 ipm / 762 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 210.8 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Width
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 203.2 (8.0)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Length
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Forms Length
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013)
Models HD3 / HD4 (High Quality Duplex)
Modes
Duplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Chapter 1. Introduction
3
Print Speed (ipm)
High Speed (56 inches per second):
812 ipm / 1148 ipm ISO A4
790 ipm / 1220 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Low Speed (46 inches per second):
690 ipm / 942 ipm ISO A4
648 ipm / 1002 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 210.8 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Width
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 203.2 (8.0)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Length
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Forms Length
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013)
Models HD5 / HD6 (High Quality Duplex)
Modes
Duplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Print Speed (ipm)
High Speed (66 inches per second):
958 ipm / 1354 ipm ISO A4
930 ipm / 1440 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Low Speed (56 inches per second):
812 ipm / 1148 ipm ISO A4
790 ipm / 1220 ipm Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
High Speed: 60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb)
Low Speed: 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 210 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495 (19.5)
Forms Width
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 203 (8.0)
Maximum mm (in.): 495 (19.5)
Forms Length
(Tractored and Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 76 ±0.3 (3.0 ±0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Maximum mm (in.): 1372 ±0.3 (54 ±0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
4
Planning and Configuration Guide
Models MD1 / MD2 (High Quality Dual Simplex)
Modes
Dual Simplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Print Speed (ipm)
35 inches per second:
247 ipm / 359 ipm per engine ISO A4
254 ipm / 381 ipm per engine Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 210.8 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Width
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 203.2 (8.0)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Length
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Using Optional internal stacker mm (in.): 356 ± 0.3 (14.0 ± 0.013)
Forms Length
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013)
Models HD3 / HD4 (High Quality Dual Simplex)
Modes
Dual Simplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Print Speed (ipm)
High Speed (56 inches per second):
406 ipm / 574 ipm per engine ISO A4
395 ipm / 610 ipm per engine Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Low Speed (46 inches per second):
333 ipm / 471 ipm per engine ISO A4
324 ipm / 501 ipm per engine Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored and Tractorless)
60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 210.8 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Width
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 203.2 (8.0)
Maximum mm (in.): 495.3 (19.5)
Forms Length
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013) (with Signature Page Feature and
suitable postprocessing equipment)
Using Optional internal stacker mm (in.): 356 ± 0.3 (14.0 ± 0.013)
Chapter 1. Introduction
5
Forms Length
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 76.2 ± 0.3 (3.0 ± 0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 1371.6 ± 0.3 (54 ± 0.013)
Models HD5 / HD6 (High Quality Dual Simplex)
Modes
Dual Simplex
Resolution (pel)
480/600
Print Speed (ipm)
High Speed (66 inches per second):
479 ipm / 677 ipm per engine ISO A4
467 ipm / 720 ipm per engine Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Low Speed (56 inches per second):
406 ipm / 574 ipm per engine ISO A4
395 ipm / 610 ipm per engine Letter (8.5 x 11 in.)
Note: Print speed is expressed as impressions per minute (ipm). The first
number indicates impressions per minute when printing 1-up landscape. The
second number indicates impressions per minute when printing 2-up portrait.
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractored)
High Speed: 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Low Speed: 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Basis Paper Weights
(Tractorless)
High Speed: 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Low Speed: 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb)
Forms Width
(Tractored)
Minimum mm (in.): 210 (8.3)
Maximum mm (in.): 495 (19.5)
Forms Width
(Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 203 (8.0)
Maximum mm (in.): 495 (19.5)
Forms Length
(Tractored and Tractorless)
Minimum mm (in.): 76 ±0.3 (3.0 ±0.013)
Maximum mm (in.): 1372 ±0.3 (54.0 ±0.013)
6
Planning and Configuration Guide
Simplex Printers
Simplex printing refers to printing on one side of a form. Duplex printing refers to printing on both sides of
a form.
Components
Simplex printing systems include the following:
v Printer engine
v Control Unit. This unit includes:
– Operator Alert assembly
– Power Control panel
– A printer controller processor
– Touch panel
– System interconnection electronics and cables
– Preprocessing/postprocessing device interfaces
Printing Methods
The continuous forms can be threaded various ways:
v From the forms input area of the printer to the output stacker of the printer
v From the forms input area of the printer to a postprocessing device
v From a preprocessing device through the printer to a postprocessing device.
Up to four preprocessing/postprocessing devices may be connected to the printer. For more information on
preprocessing/postprocessing devices see “Preprocessing and Postprocessing Device Interfaces” on page
43.
The printer attaches to a host system through the control unit, which controls the printer.
See allowable configuration in “Configuration for a Simplex Printing System” on page 8.
Chapter 1. Introduction
7
Configuration for a Simplex Printing System
1
2
g5aud087
3
4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
8
Optional preprocessing device
Control unit
InfoPrint 4100 print engine
Postprocessing device
Planning and Configuration Guide
Duplex Systems
Duplex System Printing Methods
Simplex printing refers to printing on one side of a form. Duplex printing refers to printing on both sides of
a form.
You can operate these printers as follows:
v Duplex: Uses both printers (Printer 1 prints on one side of the form and Printer 2 prints on the other
side of the form)
v Dual Simplex: Uses both printers separately in simplex mode; each printer is independent of the other
and can print different jobs at the same time
Duplex Printing
Duplex printing is achieved by arranging both printers in series, separated by a Buffer/Flipper Unit, in a
configuration that takes the continuous forms exiting from the first printer through a Buffer/Flipper Unit that
turns the forms over (inverts them) before threading them through the second printer. The first printer in
the paper path prints one side of a form; the second printer in the paper path prints the other side of the
form. See “Physical Dimensions” on page 89 for approximate dimensions of the printers, control units, and
Buffer/Flipper Units. See “Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 10 for optional and required Buffer/Flipper Units for
each configuration.
The following are suggested printer system configurations for duplex printing:
v Inline configuration (see “Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2” on page 12 “Inline
Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4” on page 13 and “Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100
Models HD5/6” on page 14)
v Left angle configuration (90° angle) (see “Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2,
HD3/4, and HD5/6” on page 15)
v ‘H’ configuration (see “‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6” on page
16)
Alternative configurations should be discussed with your marketing representative.
The forms path can be:
v From the forms input area of Printer 1 through to the output stacker of Printer 2
v From the forms input area of Printer 1 through to the forms exit area.
v From the forms input area of Printer 1 through to a postprocessing device at the output of Printer 2
v From a preprocessing device ahead of Printer 1 through to a postprocessing device at the output of
Printer 2
When running duplex printing applications, both printers in the configuration are operating at the same
impressions per minute (ipm) speed. The total speed or ipm of the subsystem is then twice the ipm of an
individual printer, counting both the front and back sides of the forms.
Both printers in the configuration attach to a host system through the control unit, which controls both
printers simultaneously and is physically attached to Printer 2 in the configuration.
Chapter 1. Introduction
9
Dual Simplex Printing
An example of a left-angle dual simplex configuration is shown in “Left-Angle Configuration for Dual
Simplex Printing” on page 17 supports printing as follows:
v Dual Simplex: Both printers in the configuration can run independent simplex applications.
The forms path in each printer can be:
– From the forms input area of the printer to a postprocessing device at the output of the printer
– From the forms input area of the printer to the forms exit area of the printer or to a postprocessing
device at the output of the printer
– From a preprocessing device ahead of the printer to a postprocessing device at the output of the
printer.
Each printer can have its own set of preprocessing and postprocessing devices.
Both printers in the configuration attach to a host system through the control unit attached to Printer 2.
Each printer is controlled independently.
When the printing system is configured as dual simplex and one of the printers is inoperable, the
remaining printer can run independently so long as power and connection to the control unit are
maintained.
Components
The major components of the InfoPrint 4100 Advanced Function Duplex Printing System are a pair of
printers, hereafter referred to as a Duplex Printing System.
A Duplex Printing System can be used for simplex and duplex printing applications.
In this publication the first printer is called Printer 1, and the second printer is called Printer 2.
Printer 1
This printer includes:
v Printer engine
v Control Unit. This unit includes:
– Operator Alert assembly
– Power Control panel
– System interconnection electronics
– Preprocessing/postprocessing device interfaces
Printer 2
This printer includes:
v Printer engine
v Control Unit – This unit includes:
– Operator Alert assembly
– Power Control panel
– A printer controller
– Touchscreen
– System interconnection electronics and cables
– Preprocessing/postprocessing device interfaces
Complete duplex printing system
Duplex models include a Buffer/Flipper Unit. Each printer engine includes an integrated urge unit.
Buffer/Flipper Unit:
10
Planning and Configuration Guide
The Buffer/Flipper Unit guides the paper path from the first printer to the second printer in a dual-printer
configuration. The unit allows the forms to take the following paths from the first printer to the second
printer:
v Straight through path (inline) with 180° inversion (see Figure 1 on page 12, Figure 2 on page 13, and
Figure 3 on page 14)
v Left 90° path with 180° inversion (see Figure 4 on page 15)
v ’H’ configuration (see Figure 5 on page 16)
The unit turns the forms over (flips) so the other side of the forms can be printed by the second printer.
Because of the high speed with which forms travel through Printer 1, a “tall” Buffer/Flipper Unit is used to
aid in cooling the paper before it enters Printer 2 in either the inline or left/right path configuration. The
inline configuration uses an Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit.
Table 1 shows the buffer/flipper units that are provided for supported configurations in a duplex system.
Table 1. Optional and required Buffer/Flipper Units for duplex systems
Duplex Configuration
Machine Type and Model
Buffer/Flipper Unit
Inline configuration
InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2
Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or
4407)
Inline configuration
InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4
Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit (Feature Code
9408 or 4408)
Inline configuration
InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6
Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or
4407) and
Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit (Feature Code
9408 or 4408)
Left angle configuration InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and
HD5/6
Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or
4407)
H configuration
Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or
4407)
InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and
HD5/6
Note: Buffer/Flipper Units are ordered with the MD1, HD3, and HD5 Model printers.
Note – 'H' Configurations: A web drive source (or urge unit) may be required between printer Models
MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 depending on the distance between printers.
Preprocessing/Postprocessing Interfaces
Preprocessing/post processing device interfaces allow additional input and output capabilities beyond the
standard forms input source and output stacker in the system printers.
Preprocessing/post processing device interfaces allow output capabilities and additional input capabilities
beyond the standard forms input source in the system printers.
Two preprocessing/postprocessing device interfaces (one in each printer) are provided. Additional
interfaces can be purchased.
Chapter 1. Introduction
11
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2
1
2
3
4
5
g5aud232
6
7
Figure 1. Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1
Control Unit attached to Printer 1
Printer 1 print engine
Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit
Control Unit attached to Printer 2
Printer 2 print engine
Postprocessing device attached to Printer 2
See “Space Requirements” on page 80 for floor layouts that specify printer dimensions, service clearance,
power cable, and cable locations.
12
Planning and Configuration Guide
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4
1
2
3
4
5
g5aud194
6
7
Figure 2. Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 a
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1
Control Unit attached to Printer 1
Printer 1 print engine
Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit
Control Unit attached to Printer 2
Printer 2 print engine
Postprocessing device attached to Printer 2
See “Space Requirements” on page 80 for floor layouts that specify printer dimensions, service clearance,
power cable, and cable locations.
Important
v Item (4), the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit, must be specified for use in the duplex inline
configuration. See “Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 10.
Chapter 1. Introduction
13
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6
1
2
3
4
5
6
g5aud093
7
8
Figure 3. Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1
Control Unit attached to Printer 1
Printer 1 print engine
Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit
Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit
Control Unit attached to Printer 2
Printer 2 print engine
Postprocessing device attached to Printer 2
See “Space Requirements” on page 80 for floor layouts that specify printer dimensions, service clearance,
power cable, and cable locations.
Important
v Items (4), the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit and (5), the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit, must be specified
for use in the duplex inline configuration. See “Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 10.
14
Planning and Configuration Guide
Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and
HD5/6
4
5
6
3
1
7
g5aud088
2
Figure 4. Left-angle duplex configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1
Control Unit attached to Printer 1
Printer 1 print engine
Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit
Control Unit attached to Printer 2
Printer 2 print engine
Postprocessing device attached to Printer 2
See “Space Requirements” on page 80 for floor layouts that specify printer dimensions, service clearance,
power cable, and cable locations.
Important
v Item (4), the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit, must be specified for use in the left-angle duplex
configuration. See “Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 10.
Chapter 1. Introduction
15
‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6
Side 1
Side 2
7
6
5
1
9
8
g5aud090
2
3
4
Figure 5. ‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1
Control Unit attached to Printer 1
Printer 1 print engine
Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit
Turnbar with 90° turn (air bearing may be required for high-speed models)
Printer 2 print engine
Control Unit attached to Printer 2
Postprocessing device attached to Printer 2
Optional walkover
See “Space Requirements” on page 80 for floor layouts that specify printer dimensions, service clearance,
power cable, and cable locations.
Important
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Item (4), the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit, must be specified for use in the 'H' duplex configuration. See
“Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 10.
v Item (5), the customer-provided air bearing turnbar and compressed air, is not available from the
InfoPrint Solutions Company. It must be ordered, delivered, and ready to use before installation
time. 100 psi (pounds per square inch) or 7.03 kgf/cm2 (kilogram force per square centimeter)
compressed air must be supplied.
v Item (9), the optional walkover, is not available from the InfoPrint Solutions Company. It must be
ordered through a pre/post vendor.
v An additional in-line urge unit may be required between the air bearing turnbars at position 9 in the
illustration, depending on web length and layout between engines.
16
Planning and Configuration Guide
Left-Angle Configuration for Dual Simplex Printing
5
4
6
7
3
8
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
1
g5aud095
2
Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1
Control Unit attached to Printer 1
Printer 1 print engine
Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 2
Postprocessing device for Printer 1
Control Unit attached to Printer 2
Printer 2 print engine
Postprocessing device attached to Printer 2
See “Space Requirements” on page 80 for floor layouts that specify printer dimensions, service clearance,
power cable, and cable locations.
Chapter 1. Introduction
17
Basic Page-Printing Concepts
The printer expands your printing ability to include new functions, such as in-house publishing, image
printing, and electronic forms creation. These special uses are made possible by the Advanced Function
Presentation (AFP) licensed programs1. The AFP™ programs let you put text, image, graphics, and bar
codes at any defined point on a page. This ability is called all-points addressability.
Some printers print a single line as a unit. This process is known as line printing. The printer and AFP
create and print an entire page as a unit. This approach, known as page printing, increases your flexibility
in designing pages.
Combining Text with Images
Many companies use system printers to generate memos, reports, invoices, and listings. This output often
consists of text combined with simple charts or diagrams that include limited graphics.
In systems with Advanced Function Presentation programs installed, InfoPrint advanced function printers
can print illustrations in your documents. For example, the program can combine business graphs and
drawings with text for use in manuals and reports.
Figure 6 shows how images can include line drawings, graphics, designs, special symbols, and company
logos. You can print them alone or with text, and you can print more than one image on a single page.
Pump Maintenance
Water Temperature
Regulator
A23I0028
Tightening Specifications
Figure 6. Combined images and text
1. A licensed program is any separately-priced program that has an InfoPrint Solutions Company copyright and is offered to
customers under the terms and conditions of the Agreement for InfoPrint Solutions Company® Licensed Programs.
18
Planning and Configuration Guide
Orienting Text and Images on a Page
With an advanced function printer, you can print text and images in any of four orientations on a page, as
shown in Figure 7.
This text is oriented
90 on the page.
This text is oriented
270 on the page.
This text is oriented
0 on the page.
Paper moves through the printer
in this direction.
A23I0029
This text is oriented
180 on the page.
Figure 7. Available orientations
Chapter 1. Introduction
19
Portrait Orientation
Text and images printed parallel to the shorter side of the forms are in a portrait orientation.
July 21, 1986
Cox, Sutton and Company
1007 E. Newgate Street
Chicago, Illinois
Cox, Sutton and Company
1007 E. Newgate Street
Chicago, Illinois
SUBJECT: Lorna Hamblin Miller's Column
SUBJECT: Lorna Hamblin Miller's Column
Dear Mr. Cox;
Dear Mr. Cox;
BUSINESS EDUCATION SHIFTS FROM SCHOOLS TO COMPANIES
BUSINESS EDUCATION SHIFTS FROM SCHOOLS TO COMPANIES
The universal problem of low competency in basic English skills is of
concern to everyone in business. Word processing supervisors and managers are
probably the people most acutely affected by the general disabilities that many
entry-level employees exhibit. Never-the-less, upper management and employers
in general, must adjust their thinking toward solutions (involving both
budgetary and personnel policies) that will upgrade the quantity and quality
of office output.
The universal problem of low competency in basic English skills is of
concern to everyone in business. Word processing supervisors and managers are
probably the people most acutely affected by the general disabilities that many
entry-level employees exhibit. Never-the-less, upper management and employers
in general, must adjust their thinking toward solutions (involving both
budgetary and personnel policies) that will upgrade the quantity and quality
of office output.
Without defending the schools, perhaps it would help to look at the broad
picture. In one generation, a complete revolution has occurred as to the
definition of education, the demographies of the school population, and the
range of entry-level employment. It is not easy to shift responsibility after
dramatic social restructuring. For new problems, we need new solutions.
Without defending the schools, perhaps it would help to look at the broad
picture. In one generation, a complete revolution has occurred as to the
definition of education, the demographies of the school population, and the
range of entry-level employment. It is not easy to shift responsibility after
dramatic social restructuring. For new problems, we need new solutions.
Sincerely,
Sincerely,
James R. Smith
James R. Smith
A23I0026
July 21, 1986
Figure 8. Portrait orientations
Landscape Orientation
Text and images printed parallel to the longer side of the forms are in a landscape orientation.
ROCK SOLID CORPORATION
BALANCE SHEET
ROCK SOLID CORPORATION
BALANCE SHEET
ASSETS
A23I0027
ASSETS
Figure 9. Landscape orientations
20
Planning and Configuration Guide
Normal and Tumble Duplex
By using a combination of printing directions and orientations, you can put a document together in four
different ways. Figure 10 shows documents printed with normal duplex. Notice that the pages are printed
in the portrait orientation for Document A and in the landscape orientation for Document B.
Top
Top
Bottom
Beginning of page 101
End of page 100
Bottom
Normal Duplex Sheet
Document A
Top
End of page 100
Document B
Bottom
Normal Duplex Sheet
A26C0068
Bottom
Top
Beginning of page 101
Figure 10. Normal duplex
Figure 11 shows documents printed with tumble duplex. Notice that the pages are printed in the portrait
orientation for Document C and in the landscape orientation for Document D.
Top
Bottom
End of page 100
Beginning of page 101
Top
Bottom
Document C
Top
Bottom
End of page 100
Tumble Duplex Sheet
Beginning of page 101
Document D
Tumble Duplex Sheet
A26C0069
Top
Bottom
Figure 11. Tumble duplex
Chapter 1. Introduction
21
Advanced Function Image and Graphics
The Advanced Function Image and Graphics facility within the printer controller allows the printer to
directly process IOCA (Image Object Content Architecture) images, and GOCA (Graphics Object Content
Architecture) data, as described in the Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference.
Improved processing occurs with the use of compressed images or vector graphics data in the GOCA
format by reducing demand on adapter data transfer and host storage.
When the printer decompresses images or rasterizes vectors instead of the host system, host system
processing cycles are reduced. These data stream functions also allow the printer to perform scaling
operations or resolution correction of scanned images.
Multiple-up Printing
Basic N-up Page Positioning
With N-Up Page Positioning, you can print up to four pages in partitions on one side of a form, which
enables you to print much more data on a form, saving printer-usage costs, paper, and storage space.
See Table 3 on page 41 for a listing of Print Services Facility (PSF) software that supports N-Up printing.
Figure 12 is an example of 2-up printing.
Water Temperature
Regulator
July 21, 1986
Cox, Sutton and Company
1007 E. Newgate Street
Chicago, Illinois
SUBJECT: Lorna Hamblin Miller's Column
Dear Mr. Cox;
BUSINESS EDUCATION SHIFTS FROM SCHOOLS TO COMPANIES
Tightening Specifications
The universal problem of low competency in basic English skills is of
concern to everyone in business. Word processing supervisors and managers are
probably the people most acutely affected by the general disabilities that many
entry-level employees exhibit. Never-the-less, upper management and employers
in general, must adjust their thinking toward solutions (involving both
budgetary and personnel policies) that will upgrade the quantity and quality
of office output.
Without defending the schools, perhaps it would help to look at the broad
picture. In one generation, a complete revolution has occurred as to the
definition of education, the demographies of the school population, and the
range of entry-level employment. It is not easy to shift responsibility after
dramatic social restructuring. For new problems, we need new solutions.
Sincerely,
NWTI0004
James R. Smith
Figure 12. 2-up printing
22
Planning and Configuration Guide
Enhanced N-up Page Positioning
With Enhanced N-Up Page Positioning, you can place up to four pages at any location on a form—both
sides of the form for duplex systems— in any orientation, and of any size. Refer to the appropriate PSF
publication for your system for more information. See Table 3 on page 41 for a listing of PSF software that
supports Enhanced N-Up printing.
Cut Sheet Emulation
Cut Sheet Emulation (CSE) is an option that automatically invokes an Enhanced N-Up arrangement to
emulate 2 side-by-side sheets of cut paper. Duplex jobs print page 2 on the back of page 1 and page 4 on
the back of page 3. CSE provides for different page arrangements to accommodate different
postprocessing requirements. Pages can be placed sequentially from left to right or right to left and right
side up or upside down.
A default value for CSE is set in the printer definition. Different CSE values can be set when form values
are established. The default setting is used for all forms that do not have a different value defined.
CSE requires support in Print Services Facility™ (PSF). The console option for CSE has no effect unless
the printer has a PSF that supports CSE. See Table 3 on page 41 for a listing of PSF software that
supports CSE printing. For more information on PSF, refer to the appropriate PSF publication.
When the CSE option is enabled, all jobs sent to the printer print 2-up, side by side except when:
v N-Up Page Positioning is specified in the form definition. In this case, the N-Up specification is used
and CSE is ignored.
v The PSF print driver enables page-size verification and disables CSE for pages that do not fit 2-Up.
Options for Multiple-up Printing
With Page Positioning and Cut Sheet Emulation (CSE) to choose from, you now have several options for
formatting multiple-up application pages on a single printer sheet:
v Multiple-Up defined in the page definition resource
v N-Up defined in the form definition resource
v Cut Sheet Emulation selected at the touchscreen.
Applications printing simple line data that use the same formatting for each page can easily be handled
with traditional multiple-up. They can be handled as well by N-Up Page Positioning and Cut Sheet
Emulation if they do not require more than 4 pages for N-Up or more than 2 for CSE on printers that
support N-Up and CSE.
CSE can be used whenever the desired output is 2 pages of equal size side by side on the same sheet.
CSE is especially useful for moving applications from 8.5 x 11 in. forms to 2-up printing on 11 x 17 in.
forms. No change is required to the AFP form definition resource to enable CSE 2-Up printing. The same
form definition can be used for printing 1-up on 8.5 x 11 in. forms or 2-up on 11 x 17 in. forms.
N-Up Page Positioning is needed for applications that required pages of different sizes or page positioning
other than 2-up side by side. Instructions must be placed in the form definition for N-Up printing.
Using Stored Information
Several types of stored information are used when printing data on Advanced Function Printers. For
example, your company logo often appears in your printed output. You can code this logo one time, and
then store it in a library where it is available to any authorized person.
Advanced Function Printers use information from resource libraries. A resource is a collection of stored
data that can be used in a printing job. Some resource libraries contain control information that converts
data from line printing to page printing. Examples of this type of library include:
Chapter 1. Introduction
23
v Form definition libraries, that contain the specifications to describe how pages of data are placed on the
physical media
v Page definition libraries, that contain the specifications to describe how line data is placed into pages.
Other resource libraries contain information that the program uses to compose pages. Examples of this
type of library include:
v Font libraries, which contain characters to be printed.
v Page segment libraries, which contain images and graphics.
v Overlay libraries, which contain collections of unchanging data that can contain images, text, or
combinations of both.
Instead of using preprinted forms, you can use electronic overlays to put boxes, lines, shading, text, and
logos on a page. Using electronic overlays can result in significant savings in forms cost and storage
space, as well as operator time required to load and unload preprinted forms. Also, you can change
electronic overlays more quickly and without paying the scrap charges you have when you change
preprinted forms.
Although InfoPrint Solutions Company provides some of these resources for common uses, Advanced
Function Presentation licensed programs enable your company to customize its own resources. See
“InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation Software” on page 65 for more information about these
programs.
TrueType/OpenType Fonts and Unicode print data
The TrueType font technology, developed by Apple and Microsoft™, is the most prevalent font technology
in the industry today. It is an open font standard that is widely published. The OpenType font format is an
extension of the TrueType format that allows better support for international character sets, and broader
multi-platform support. OpenType includes information needed to fully support Unicode data for multilingual
print and presentation using a single font. It also provides the flexibility of allowing either TrueType outlines
or the other standard font technology, Adobe Type 1, to be packaged as an OpenType font.
These new offerings provide significant benefits:
v You will have more choices in selecting typefaces, especially for non-Latin languages
v They provide a truly multilingual environment through support of Unicode, enabling the globalization of
applications
v You can print from Windows™ applications with the same fonts that appear on the screen
These offerings are supported on all InfoPrint 4100 models.
Enhanced Toner Loading
Enhanced toner loading is standard on all printers.
This facility allows the operator to add toner to the printer while it is operating. The operator is prompted
by an operator console message that the toner supply is low.
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) CCD
The Customer Changeable Developer (CCD) on the InfoPrint 4100 enables you to print MICR applications
on the InfoPrint 4100 Family of high-speed, continuous forms printers. The MICR CCD Feature (FC 9471)
is supported on InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2, HS3, HD3/4, and HD5/6. This feature provides the following
benefits:
v Easily switch from printing production black toner applications to printing MICR checks simply by
switching the developer.
24
Planning and Configuration Guide
v Exceptional MICR read rates are obtained by using the print quality enhancements and 600 DPI output
of the InfoPrint 4100 along with the newly developed outline MICR font.
v Print the same MICR applications on the InfoPrint 4100 Families.
Note: A developer cart DOES NOT ship standard with the initial order MICR CCD Feature (FC 9471). A
developer cart is included with the Additional MICR CCD Feature (FC 4481)
See “Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR)” for more information about using the MICR CCD.
Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR)
Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) is a specified character set that is defined in American National
Standard Institute (ANSI) booklet X9.27. For over thirty years, MICR has been the common document
language used by the commercial banking industry for interbank exchange of money data.
The most common use of MICR is for printing negotiable documents. The characters are uniquely shaped
according to ANSI standards and can be read by various readers and sorters throughout the world to
direct the documents to their proper financial institutions.
Before the availability of MICR printers, companies that printed negotiable documents used forms that
were pre-printed with MICR characters by a commercial check-printing company. Commercial companies
print the MICR characters with magnetic ink.
To enable a printing system to print MICR, the MICR Feature must be installed and the printer operator
must install the MICR configured CCD into the correct engine. Refer to InfoPrint 4100 Models with the
InfoPrint POWER Controller Operator Console: Operator’s Guide for instructions on changing the customer
changeable developer (CCD).
Notes:
1. In duplex mode on InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 and HD5/6, MICR toner can be used in Printer 1 only.
2. In dual simplex mode, MICR toner can be used in both printers.
3. The supported paper weight is 75 to 90 gsm (20 to 24 lb). Paper checks are to be 24 lb across the
web and in the web direction or 20 lb in the web direction only. (This is the banking industry standard
for check stock.)
4. Tractorless paper is not supported with MICR.
5. MICR forms must be processed into a post processing device to allow sufficient cooling for the toner
and paper.
Using the InfoPrint 4100 to print MICR documents
InfoPrint Solutions Company has long been associated with the negotiable document industry in the form
of designing encoders and readers/sorters, and has an understanding of the importance of MICR print
quality.
The InfoPrint 4100 printers use a specially designed magnetic toner that can print MICR characters with a
quality that meets ANSI standards and can withstand the many passes through readers and sorters.
With the Advanced Function Printing (AFP) software interface that is available with all InfoPrint system
printers, the InfoPrint 4100 can be used to print an entire negotiable document; bypassing commercial
check-printing companies and the necessity for pre-printed forms.
The most common use of MICR is for check printing. Specifications of standards requirements for check
printing are in the ANSI booklets X9.27 and X9.13.
Chapter 1. Introduction
25
IBM
670869053
State Bank
Tucson, AZ
PERSONAL HEALTH ACCOUNT
Date May 7, 2001
Giant Saguaro
Insurance Company
Claim Services Provider
This Check is VOID after 90 DAYS
Amount ***45 60
Control No. 17434-66
Pay
JOHN P HASTINGS
132 CALLE DEL CIELO
TUCSON AZ 85718
Patient
MARY HASTINGS
NOT NEGOTIABLE
AV1U0020
To the
Order of
FORTY-FIVE DOLLARS AND 60 CENTS
Figure 13. Front of check
Figure 14. Back of check
Notes:
1. There must not be any printing in the area that is the clear band area of the front of the check.
2. It is recommended that MICR character printing be done with the MICR character line printed in the
scan direction only.
3. The internal stacker cannot be used when printing with MICR toner and a postprocessing device must
be used instead. This allows for better cooling. When printing with MICR toner, the printer runs hotter
than with non-MICR toners.
4. A special MICR toner is used in the printer, which contains iron particles. The print does not look as
black as with non-MICR toners. This should not be considered a problem, because it is a characteristic
of MICR toner.
26
Planning and Configuration Guide
Setting up the printer for printing with MICR toner
The following procedure describes how to set required values when printing with MICR toner. These
values must be set on the printer where the MICR toner is installed.
Note: Access the printer settings from the Main touchscreen panel of the Enhanced Operator panel.
1. Select Printer Definition → Print Quality to display the Print Quality panel.
2. Select the following values:
v Contrast = 4
Note: You may need to adjust this to obtain proper signal strength.
v Boldness
– For 240 and 300 DPI fonts = 50
– For outline fonts (480 and 600 DPI) = 50
– For CMC7 outline font = 60
v Preheat Platen Temperature = 85
v Fuser Temperature = 50
(Hot Roll)
v Oil Rate = 50
v Oil Belt speed = 50
v Backup Idler Roll usage = Enable
3. Select Printer Definition → Printer → Advanced → Font Smoothing to display the Printer - Advanced
panel.
Set the following values:
v Single-byte Font Smoothing = No
v Double-byte Font Smoothing = No
MICR fonts
In addition to the normal fonts supplied with the printer, three standard fonts are available to print MICR
characters: E13B, E13B*, and CMC7.
The E13B font is used in the United States and the CMC7 font is used in certain countries in Europe. The
Hollow E13B* font is identical in size to the E13B font, but will not be read correctly by MICR reader-sorter
equipment. This font can be used for application development while the security of the E13B font is
maintained.
Test documents that contain Hollow E13B* font will exhibit the same registration characteristics as the
E13B font, but the documents will not be negotiable.
AFP MICR fonts for InfoPrint 4100 printers are available for downloading at
www.infoprintsolutionscompany.com
MICR format requirements
The MICR line has an established format that can cause rejects if the format conventions are not followed.
The MICR line is composed of four fields. The fields are, from right to left:
v Amount field, positions 1–12
v On-Us field, positions 14–31
v Transit field, positions 33–43
v External process control field, position 44 (optional)
v Auxiliary On-Us field, positions 45–65 (optional)
Chapter 1. Introduction
27
The following figure shows the MICR line field positions for a 152 mm (6 in.) check.
YOUR COMPANY
DIVISION
STREET ADDRESS
CITY, STATE ZIP
5106
91-2/1221
20
PAY TO THE
ORDER OF
$
DOLLARS
YOUR BANK
MEMO
44 43
33
14
31
TRANSIT NUMBER
FIELD
ON-US
FIELD
12
1
AMOUNT
FIELD
AV1U0022
CLEAR
BAND
Figure 15. MICR line field positions
Amount field, Positions 1–12: The amount field is fixed by convention as follows:
v Position 1 contains the amount symbol.
v Positions 2 and 3 contain the cents amount.
v Positions 4 to 11 contain the dollar amount. An added zero fills each position to the left the dollar
amount, up to and including position 11.
v Position 12 contains the amount symbol.
On-us field, positions 14–31: The arrangement of characters and symbols in the on-us field is
determined by the bank the checks are drawn on. These characters must be reproduced exactly as the
bank has specified. Consultation with the bank is highly recommended.
Transit field, positions 33–43: The transit field identifies the institution upon which the check is drawn.
The field is fixed by convention as follows:
v Position 33 contains the transit symbol.
v Position 34 contains the check digit.
v Positions 35 to 38 contain the ABA bank number (numerator).
Note: In Canada a dash symbol is required in position 37.
v Positions 39 to 42 contain the routing number (denominator).
v Position 43 contains the transit symbol.
External process control field, position 44 (optional): This field is used only for items that are not
required to be returned to the issuing institution. The character to use is controlled by the ANSI committee
on banking standards.
Auxiliary on-us field, positions 45–65 (optional): The arrangement of characters and symbols in the
auxiliary on-us field is determined by the bank the checks are drawn on. The field usually contains the
check serial number bracketed by on-us symbols. This field can be used only for checks longer than 152
mm (6 in.). The content of this field can begin in position 49.
28
Planning and Configuration Guide
MICR quality control
If used correctly, the InfoPrint 4100 will produce quality MICR documents. To produce quality MICR
documents consistently, you must monitor both the application program and the printer output to be sure
both are within banking specifications. You must assume responsibility for the quality of the documents
released into the banking system. The banking system must assume the responsibility of having adequate,
properly maintained reader systems.
A special MICR toner is used in the printer, which contains iron particles. The print does not look as black
as with non-MICR toners. This should not be considered a problem, because it is a characteristic of MICR
toner.
The strength of signal that is generated in the MICR readers by MICR characters is a function of the
magnetic strength and size of the iron particles, the amount of iron particles in the toner, the amount of
toner placed on the paper (pile height), and the relative shape of the printed characters. Most readers read
the relative length of the vertical edges/transitions of the characters. Increasing the amount of iron on the
page will produce stronger signals at the magnetic character reader. Too little MICR toner on the page will
produce a low signal and increase the reject rate. Too much MICR toner will produce pile height that is too
high and can contaminate the check reading equipment.
The operator can adjust the MICR signal strength by adjusting the contrast setting. Changing the contrast
settings will vary the amount of toner on the paper. When the signal strength is too low, a higher contrast
setting can be selected. When the signal is too high a lower contrast setting can be selected.
A MICR verifier/analyzer device (which should be made available by the customer for operator and SSR
use) is required to achieve the best signal strength. Correct character position can be assured using an
overlay or Glarden Gauge. InfoPrint Solutions Company requires that these devices meet ANSI Standard
X9.27-1995 or higher, for Magnetic Ink Character Printing (MICR). An operator must vary the contrast
setting until good MICR signals are obtained. Experience has shown that a check average of 110 - 140%
of the standard, for all characters on the page, is usually the best signal strength to obtain. However, the
standard lower and upper limits for each character are 50% and 200% respectively. Since there is a
variety of check stock papers and since paper characteristics can effect signal strength, the contrast
setting may need to be readjusted for each check stock paper the customer uses. InfoPrint printers can
store these parameters for a large number of forms in snapshots.
Quality control tools: To correctly evaluate the quality of MICR printing on the InfoPrint 4100, you will
need the following tools:
v MICR printing and layout gauge
A MICR registration and layout gauge (Glarden gauge) is supplied with various MICR test devices. The
gauge tests the placement of the MICR characters on the page. It can also be used to verify registration
and to check the clear band area. Check the clear band area on the back side of the check also,
because the magnetic materials read through the paper.
v Clear band overlay
The clear band overlay is a mask that blocks from view everything except the clear band and is used to
check for extraneous toner that may appear on the printed sheet. The MICR layout gauge can be used
for this function if the MICR line appears on the bottom of the sheet.
If you design your forms with the MICR line other than on the bottom of the sheet, you should make a
mask for each application. For example, if you plan to print documents with three checks on a sheet,
make a mask from clear plastic that blocks all areas other than the three MICR line.
v MICR signal strength tester
A signal strength tester may be used to determine the magnetic signal strength of the MICR characters
because it is not possible to determine the magnetic signal strength by visual examination.
You will need to obtain a signal strength MICR check reader to assure acceptability of your MICR
printing.
Chapter 1. Introduction
29
MICR quality and format verification
The MICR quality check verifies registration, clear band, voids, and signal strength. The format check
verifies that the correct MICR information is being printed on its specified position on the document. To
verify the quality and format requires a periodic sampling of the printed sheets.
Sampling frequency: The frequency of checking MICR print quality is based on how many prints the
user is willing to reprint should a problem be detected. Greatest attention should be paid at the beginning
of a MICR job. The schedule below can serve as a guide for MICR printing applications. With experience,
the user of the InfoPrint 4100 will discover the best verification frequency.
Time
Action
Start of job
MICR quality check and format check
Every 2 hours
MICR quality check
Change of forms
MICR quality check
Vertical registration: The InfoPrint 4100 places characters in the same place from page to page within
the specifications of MICR printing. The MICR layout gauge measures registration and character
placement. The MICR document is inserted into the gauge, and the right-hand edge is aligned with the
right side of the gauge. The printer prints approximately three pages per each revolution of the imaging
drum. Therefore three consecutive pages should be examined to verify that the characters are aligned
vertically and centered within the boxes.
Vertical registration can be adjusted on the touchscreen.
Horizontal registration: In the US, ensure correct horizontal registration by examining character box 33.
This box should contain the transit symbol. Ideal placement is for the right edge of the transit symbol to
line up with the right side of character box 33. The right side of the transit symbol can be no more than
half of a character box left or right of the right side of the box.
Horizontal registration can be adjusted on the touchscreen.
Clear band area: The clear band area is the bottom 15.875 mm (0.625 in.) of a MICR document. This
area can contain only MICR characters. The application program must not contain any instruction to print
in this area. Because the InfoPrint 4100 printers use magnetic toner, borders and signatures that stray into
the clear band area can cause rejects. To avoid such rejects, it is recommended that the clear ban area be
19 mm (0.75 in.).
The printer prints three 8.5″ x 11″ pages per each revolution of the imaging drum. Therefore, a defect in
the drum will appear at every three images. Three consecutive pages should be checked for extraneous
toner using a mask or the layout gauge to examine the clear band on each page. Extraneous toner larger
than 0.076 x 0.076 mm (0.003 x 0.003 in.) should not be in the clear band area. If extraneous toner can
be seen at a normal reading distance, the documents should not be put into circulation.
Voids: Voids are the opposite of extraneous toner. Voids or malformed characters cause distortion in the
magnetic signals read by a reader/sorter to determine what a character is. Characters must not contain a
void larger than 0.203 x 0.203 mm (0.008 x 0.008 in.). Check three consecutive pages for voids. A void is
acceptable if it is barely discernible at normal reading distance; however, numerous voids indicate that
these documents should not be put into circulation.
Customer Changeable Developer
This new solution allows customer operators to easily remove and install developer units so that the toner
can easily be switched from black to MICR or from MICR to black.
30
Planning and Configuration Guide
Additional Customer Changeable Developers
This feature provides an additional developer unit that can be installed by an operator to replace the
developer unit initially shipped with an InfoPrint 4100 printer. Each additional CCD is unique to one printer.
For example, to have additional CCDs for three printers requires that this feature be ordered for each of
the three printers.
The Additional CCD feature consists of an operator-installable developer and one developer cart to carry
the CCD provided by this feature. When this feature is ordered, it may be necessary to order a Developer
Cart. This extra Developer Cart is needed once per print room to remove and store the CCD initially
installed in the printer.
Developer Cart
In addition to the Developer Cart shipped with the additional CCD feature, one additional Developer Cart is
required per print room for the removal of the CCD that was initially installed in the printer.
The developer carts are used so that the developer unit does not have to be lifted or carried by the
operator. The cart attaches to the printer so that the developer unit can slide onto the cart when it is being
switched. Likewise, the new developer unit can be easily slid off the cart and installed in the printer.
Developer carts can be used with any developer. Once a CCD has been installed in a printer, the cart that
was shipped with the CCD can be used to remove a CCD from another printer. Developer units are unique
to a given printer.
Chapter 1. Introduction
31
32
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 2. Specifications
Chapter Overview
This chapter describes the characteristics, functions, and features of the printers. It also contains
hardware and software requirements for incorporating the printer into your operating and application
environments.
The printers provide high-performance, high-quality printing in large-scale data-processing environments.
They receive data through the InfoPrint Intelligent Printer Data Stream™ (IPDS).
Printing Speed
Printing speed and options are defined in “System Characteristics” on page 2.
The following conditions affect the actual performance in your installation:
v Configuration of the printer
v Number of characters per page
v Number of imbedded control commands
v Number of fonts, bar codes, and images per page
v Performance of the controlling computer
v Channel or LAN bandwidth
v Channel activity
v Use of image operations (scaling, rotation)
v Amount of image and graphics area
v Layering of images and other objects
v Page arrangement and use of wide media
See “Performance Considerations” on page 63 for additional information.
Print Material
The size limitations and options for the InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2, HS3, HD3/4, and HD5/6 printer forms
are listed in “System Characteristics” on page 2.
The printer can print on many special-purpose materials, such as preprinted forms. The inks, papers,
adhesives, and other components that make up these special materials must withstand the printer’s fusing
temperature and mechanical action; therefore, be sure to thoroughly test any preprinted forms you plan to
use for your printing applications.
The Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers contains information to
help you select print materials. Work closely with your marketing representative while you are selecting
what kinds of forms and special-purpose materials to use. Your marketing representative can give you
technical help, share information from other successful printer users, and help you design your own
special materials. Refer to Chapter 6, “Selecting and Testing Forms,” on page 93 for more information.
Basis weight is the weight in pounds of four reams (500 sheets) of paper cut to a given standard size. In
most environments, 75 g/m2 (20-pound) forms usually perform best for the printers. The basis weights for
the various models of printers is listed in “System Characteristics” on page 2.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
33
The stacker on these printers can stack forms from 7 to 14 inches (178 to 356 mm) long. You also can
stack forms of less than 7 inches if you fold them correctly.
With fanfold forms in duplex printing mode, you can use a postprocessing device behind Printer 2. A
postprocessing device prevents stacking problems caused by the occasional loss of the fold direction
memory after the paper travels through both printers and the Buffer/Flipper Unit.
For instructions for printing on various size forms, see “Continuous Forms” on page 93.
Print Quality
The forms you use and the composition of your logical pages significantly affect the quality of your printer
output. To ensure printing legibility in your application, test small fonts and special characters, such as
logos, bar codes, and OCR fonts, in your application. See Chapter 6, “Selecting and Testing Forms,” on
page 93 and the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers for important
information about this type of testing.
Some print quality issues can be addressed by adjusting the values set in the Forms Settings panel
(Forms → Forms Settings) and the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality). See
Chapter 8, “Establishing Form Settings,” on page 137 and “Understanding Print Quality” on page 144 for
more information.
| When using InfoPrint Manager, you must ensure that you are using the correct halftones for the type of
| toner being used in your printer. Options in InfoPrint Manager allow you to select halftones based on the
| toner type. See the documentation for InfoPrint Manager for more information.
Print Quality Enhancement
The Print Quality Enhancement facility within the printer consists of three items: edge smoothing, fine
fidelity protection, and boldness control.
v Edge Smoothing: This is smoothing along the edges of diagonal lines. This function provides more
defined and crisp character and graphics images. If selected, additional smoothing algorithms are
applied when 240 and 300 PEL raster font data is printed.
v Fine Fidelity Protection: Protects fine details in the print and prevents blurring between details by
completely filling solid areas or by not filling in single-pel white areas. For example, if there are several
black lines next to each other and there is only one white pel between the lines, fine fidelity protection
ensures that the white pel is not filled with toner and the white space between the lines is preserved.
Another example is that when a character is printed, toner is applied from edge to edge of the character
to completely fill in the character and thus avoid white spaces between the edges.
v Boldness Control: Controls print boldness, independent of the contrast setting. This allows you to
change the print boldness to compensate for other changing conditions within the printer without
affecting the solid area darkness.
AFP Color Emulation Feature (FC 4850 or 4851)
The AFP Color Emulation feature prints color objects in grayscale on an InfoPrint 4100 duplex or dual
simplex system with the InfoPrint POWER Controller. This feature allows you to design and migrate your
color AFP applications to full-color AFP printers. External transforms are no longer needed because the
InfoPrint POWER Controller does the transformations.
Note: This feature is supported on InfoPrint 4100 Models MD2, HD4, or HD6 printers with the InfoPrint
POWER controller. It also requires the IPDS Performance Upgrade (Feature Code 4664).
Applications can now be designed using the following color objects and printed as-is on the InfoPrint 4100:
v TIFF images
34
Planning and Configuration Guide
v
v
v
v
GIF images
JPEG/JFIF images
IPDS IOCA (FS11) support and check printing
IPDS IOCA (FS45)
Simulating Color with Gray Printing
This standard feature, sometimes referred to as gray-scale printing, simulates color using gray tones,
allowing color Advanced Function Printing™ (AFP) jobs to be printed on InfoPrint 4100 printing systems.
This minimizes the need for duplicate print applications, one for color printers and one for monochrome
printers.
Simulating color with gray
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
The Gray-Scale feature accepts the following AFP color objects and converts them to shades of gray:
v PTOCA text
v GOCA graphics
v Color object areas and logical pages
v Bi-level IOCA images (FS10)
v Color BCOCA bar codes
Note: Continuous tone color IOCA images (FS45) are not supported by this feature.
Other kinds of color objects may need to be transformed before printing. InfoPrint Solutions Company
includes color transforms in the following program products:
v In z/OS environments, InfoPrint® Transforms to AFP V2.1 for z/OS can be used to convert PostScript,
PDF, and PCL 6 to bi-level IOCA. These transforms are invoked automatically. TIFF, JPEG, and GIF
color objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulation feature is installed.
v In System i environments, the InfoPrint product for System i5 can be used to convert PostScript, PDF,
PCL 6, TIFF, GIF, and JPEG to bi-level IOCA. These transforms are invoked automatically. TIFF, JPEG,
and GIF color objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulation feature is
installed.
v In an AIX environment, InfoPrint Manager for AIX includes transforms to convert PostScript, PDF, PCL
6, TIFF, GIF, and JPEG to bi-level IOCA. The optional SAP Print feature of InfoPrint Manager for AIX
includes a transform to convert SAP print data to AFP. These transforms are invoked automatically.
TIFF, JPEG, and GIF color objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulation
feature is installed.
v In Windows environments, InfoPrint Manager for Windows includes transforms to convert PostScript,
PDF, PCL 6, TIFF, GIF, and JPEG to bi-level IOCA. These transforms are invoked automatically. TIFF,
JPEG, and GIF color objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulation feature is
installed.
Note: While these PostScript transforms may be used to convert Embedded PostScript (EPS) objects,
these objects are not intended to be printed standalone. They may lack the PostScript showpage
command necessary for physical printing or the PostScript positioning commands necessary for
correct orientation and printing on a physical page.
Chapter 2. Specifications
35
Printer Resolution
Outline fonts, which have been used in the past, are still used today. These fonts have no resolution, but
are built in the printer to the printhead resolution. Because they provide resolution independence, outline
fonts should be used whenever possible. However, applications designed using custom raster fonts, or
raster fonts for which no outlines are available, require these raster fonts for printing.
Images will have the best quality if printed at a printhead resolution equal to, or an even multiple of, the
image’s native resolution. For example, when printing legacy 240-dpi images on a printer with a 240/300
switchable printhead, use a printhead resolution of 240. When printing on a printer with a 480/600
switchable printhead, use a printhead resolution of 480.
InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 printers offer additional resolution
options:
Table 2. Printer resolution options
Resolution
480
Options
IPDS™ Resolution (dpi)
240
Font Smoothing
v Enhanced Single Byte (Yes|No)
v Enhanced Double Byte (Yes|No)
600
IPDS Resolution (dpi)
v 240
v 300
v 600
v Automatic
Font Smoothing
v Enhanced Single Byte (Yes|No)
v Enhanced Double Byte (Yes|No)
With these additional resolution options, you need to plan operator procedures for selecting the correct
options for your job mix.
480/600 Switchable Resolution
Selecting printhead resolution
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
With a switchable printhead, you will need operator instructions on when and how to switch between the
two different resolutions. If all your jobs are developed at a single dpi, for example 240 dpi, you may want
to keep the printer at 480 dpi resolution all the time.
However, if you have some jobs for 240 dpi and some for 600 dpi, you will need to have some way of
separating the jobs by resolution and of notifying the operator when to change the resolution on the
printer. This change is done from the touch panel by selecting the Printer Definition tab and proceeding
36
Planning and Configuration Guide
through the definition steps. The printer normally takes less than a minute to complete this operation.
Switching printer resolution involves switching the raster font libraries.
In 480 dpi resolution, the printer reports to PSF that it is a 240 dpi printer. It accepts 240 dpi raster fonts
and automatically scales them to 480 dpi. From an operational and application standpoint, it is no different
than a 240 dpi switchable printer.
|
|
|
|
Note that there are no 480 dpi raster fonts supplied by the InfoPrint Solutions Company, nor does the
InfoPrint Solutions Company recommend that you create or use 480 dpi raster fonts. You should use only
240 dpi raster fonts or outline fonts with 480 dpi printhead resolution. 300 dpi raster fonts are best
supported when printing in 600 dpi resolution.
With 480/600 switchable printheads, the InfoPrint Solutions Company recommends that jobs that use 240
dpi raster fonts be printed with the 480 dpi printhead, rather than with the 600 dpi printhead. Because
scaling 240 to 480 dpi is a simple matter of doubling the dots, both appearance and performance of 240
dpi jobs may be better at 480 dpi resolution than at 600 dpi.
When the printer is in 600 dpi mode, you have a new capability: the option to specify IPDS Resolution
mode.
IPDS Resolution (600 dpi Only)
Selecting IPDS resolution
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
With a 480/600 switchable printhead switched to 600 dpi resolution, the operator is able to select an
intelligent printer data stream (IPDS) resolution. The choices are:
v 240 dpi
v 300 dpi
v 600 dpi
v Automatic
The operator selects an option from this screen. The printer reports the option selected to PSF.
240 dpi and 300 dpi IPDS Resolution Mode
When the printer is set to 240 dpi® IPDS resolution mode, it reports to PSF that it is a 240 dpi printer. PSF
can then send 240 dpi raster fonts to the printer without receiving an error. The printer automatically scales
the 240 dpi raster fonts (and all other resources) to 600 dpi for printing. When the printer is set to 300 dpi
IPDS resolution mode, it reports to PSF that it is a 300 dpi printer. PSF can then send 300 dpi fonts to the
printer without receiving an error. Operational considerations for switching between 240 and 300 dpi IPDS
resolution modes are the same as those for switching between 480 and 600 dpi as discussed in “480/600
Switchable Resolution” on page 36.
However, unlike a 240/300 dpi switchable printer, the print resolution is actually 600 dpi. Applications using
outline fonts can take full advantage of the 600 dpi resolution in either mode. The printer renders the
outlines at full 600 dpi resolution.
Note that when the printer has both a 480 dpi printhead and a 600 dpi printhead, it is generally preferable
to print 240 dpi jobs using the 480 dpi. See “480/600 Switchable Resolution” on page 36.
600 dpi IPDS Resolution Mode
When the printer is set to 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode, it reports to PSF that it is a 600 dpi printer. PSF
does not send 240 or 300 dpi raster fonts to the printer. It sends outline fonts only. Although technically the
Chapter 2. Specifications
37
printer could accept 600 dpi raster fonts, the InfoPrint Solutions Company does not supply 600 dpi raster
font and does not encourage you to use 600 dpi raster fonts. At 600 dpi, outline fonts are the
recommended font technology.
Note that setting the printer to 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode does not provide any benefit over either 240
or 300 dpi IPDS resolution mode. In all cases, the resolution at which the data is printed is 600 dpi. Also in
all cases, outline fonts are accepted and rendered at 600 dpi. The only difference between a 600 dpi
printer set to 240 dpi IPDS resolution mode or to 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode is that when the printer is
in 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode, it cannot receive and print 240 dpi raster fonts.
Automatic IPDS Resolution Mode
The final IPDS resolution mode is set to Automatic. When a 600 dpi printer is in Automatic IPDS
resolution mode, the printer reports to PSF that it is capable of accepting any font resolution. This allows
PSF to send 240 dpi raster fonts, 300 dpi raster fonts, or outline fonts to the printer without requiring the
operator to change any printer configuration options on the touchscreen. Jobs needing 240 dpi fonts can
be intermixed with those needing 300 dpi fonts.
Using automatic mode can simplify operating procedures for enterprises with jobs requiring resource
resolutions. However, with a 480/600 switchable printhead, you need to weigh this advantage against
possible improvements in throughput and print clarity of 480 dpi for jobs formatted using 240 dpi
resources. See “480/600 Switchable Resolution” on page 36.
Font Smoothing Mode (480 and 600 dpi Only)
Selecting font smoothing
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
Operators are able to select whether font smoothing is desired. The window presents two options:
v Single-byte Font Smoothing (Yes | No)
v Double-byte Font Smoothing (Yes | No)
The option appears when the operator selects 480 dpi IPDS printhead resolution or IPDS resolution for
600 dpi printhead resolution. Specifying Yes causes the printer to initiate additional smoothing algorithms
for 240 dpi and 300 dpi raster fonts when they are printed with the 480 or 600 dpi printhead. For most
cases, selecting Yes results in better print quality. However, because print aesthetics are subjective, this
enhancement can be turned off for either single-byte or double-byte fonts or both by specifying No.
Specifying Yes to this option should have little or no impact on printer performance.
AFP Resource Resolution
Raster fonts are the only print objects or resources that are strictly resolution dependent.2 Other AFP
resources are resolution independent. Form definitions and page definitions do not depend on printer
resolution. Overlays and page segments that contain images and text formatting designed at a specific
resolution are automatically adjusted by the printer to the correct resolution. However, this adjustment
sometimes causes formatting differences. Images and text for which exact positioning is important print
best at the resolution for which they were designed. For this reason, you may want to maintain separate
resolution libraries of critical resources such as page segments and overlays that contain very precise
formatting or logos or signatures for which the highest quality print is required. The Multiple Resolution
support in PSF for z/OS provides the capability to automatically select from the correct resolution library.
2. Currently there is also a resolution dependence in certain GOCA objects that include image definition within GOCA.
38
Planning and Configuration Guide
Forms Handling
You can load forms manually or with the automatic forms loading feature.
Automatic forms loading applies only to an individual printer. Autoload does not completely thread the
whole system but is used to load Printer 1 and Printer 2. The forms must be manually threaded through
the buffer/flipper unit.
Splicing Station
The splicing station on the printer allows you to splice a new supply of forms to the trailing edge of the
previous supply of forms without having to re-load the forms through the printer.
Print Area
The printer can print to the horizontal page perforations and within 12.7 mm (½ inch) of either vertical
(tractor-hole) edge of the form. See Figure 16.
Print quality may be degraded when printing near folding perforations, an internal perforation, or any cut in
the form. To ensure correct operation and print quality, maintain the following distances:
v From non-folding and internal perforations: 1.27 mm (0.05 in.)
v From folding perforations: for text, OCR, and bar codes: 8.5 mm (0.33 in.); for images and solid-area fill:
12.7 mm (0.5 in.)
v From binder holes and cuts: 2.54 mm (0.1 in.).
Refer to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers and Chapter 6,
“Selecting and Testing Forms,” on page 93 for more information.
Do not use forms that
have printing between
the tractor holes
Vertical (tractor-hole)
Edge
12.7 mm
(0.5 in.)
12.7 mm
(0.5 in.)
R4CI0056
Horizontal Page
Perforations
Figure 16. Printable page area
Chapter 2. Specifications
39
Touchscreen
The touchscreen is the primary way the operator inputs information to the printer and receives status and
error messages from the printer in any of several different languages. Both the printer operator and the
service representative use this touch panel.
The touchscreen is used to set up and operate the printer. Some of the things you can do from the touch
panel are:
v Change printer definitions
v Change host system channel adapter definitions
v Change preprocessing/postprocessing device definitions
v Define form settings and create Snapshots
Power Control
Duplex Models
A power control panel on the control unit on Printer 1 or on Printer 2 is used to select either remote or
local power control for each printer in the configuration and the control unit independently.
Possible settings for Printer 1:
v When the Printer Power switch is set to Local, the printer is controlled by the printer Power On and
Power Off If in Local switches on the same panel.
v When the Printer Power switch is set to Remote and the Control Unit Power switch is set to Local,
the printer is controlled by the control unit Power On and Power Off If in Local switches on the Printer
2 panel.
v When the Printer Power switch is set to Remote and the Control Unit Power switch is set to Remote,
the printer is controlled by the control unit Power On and Power Off If in Local switch on the same
panel.
Possible settings for Printer 2:
v When the Printer Power switch is set to Local, the printer is controlled by the printer Power On and
Power Off If in Local switches on the same panel.
v When the Printer Power switch set to Remote and the Control Unit Power switch is set to Local, the
printer is controlled by the control unit Power On and Power Off If in Local switches on the same
panel.
v The Control Unit Power switch on Printer 2 should not be set to Remote.
Each power control panel also contains a system Unit Emergency Power Off switch that drops power to
all elements controlled by that panel.
Simplex Models
The power control panel on the control unit allows you to select either remote or local power control for the
printer and the control unit independently.
When either the printer or control unit Local/Remote switch is set to Local, you can control power for that
element from the power control panel. When a Local/Remote switch is set to Remote for the printer, you
can control power for the printer using the Control Unit Power switch. The Control Unit Power switch
should not be set to Remote.
The power control panel also contains an Unit Emergency Power Off switch that drops power to all
elements controlled by that panel.
40
Planning and Configuration Guide
Software Requirements
IPDS Print on Demand (POD)
4100 printers in Duplex mode support switching between IPDS Print on Demand (POD) and IPDS
Production Print automatically. Print on Demand is automatically enabled by the printer in Duplex mode, or
Dual Simplex mode when using InfoPrint Manager. (Simplex models support only IPDS Production Print.)
Print on Demand works with an InfoPrint Manager for AIX server to cache one copy of a job in the printer
and then print it multiple times. The job does not begin printing until the entire job is stored in the printer’s
memory. Print on Demand can also be used to store a job in the printer that may otherwise not print at
rated speed. When the printer definition in the InfoPrint Manager server is set to ″Optimize for multiple
copies″, it activates the job caching for any printer capable of Print on Demand.
See your marketing representative for more information about the hardware and software required for Print
on Demand.
IPDS Production Print
IPDS mode—sometimes referred to as traditional or full IPDS mode—supports duplex printers in both
Duplex and Dual Simplex mode. IPDS mode requires one of the host licensed Print Services (PSF)
products shown in Table 3.
Each software environment has specific operating system and AFP program requirements. For a list of the
programs that are required for a particular environment, refer to the corresponding Print Services Facility
(PSF) publications listed in Advanced Function Presentation: Printer Information, G544-3290. Also see
“Advanced Function Presentation Licensed Programs” on page 64 for a listing of AFP software.
If the printer is connected to a Print-on-Demand (POD) server, the printer does not attempt to save pages
on the printer. This may cause the printer to run slower when it is printing multiple copies of a document
than it would in Print on Demand or when it is printing a document that would have been previously saved
in Print on Demand.
Contact your marketing representative for details about ordering these configurations and features.
Table 3. Software support for the respective adapters and functions
ESCON
Channel
Select
Medium
Modification
(SMM)
Basic/
Enhanced
N-Up
Cut Sheet
Emulation
True Type
Fonts
AFP Color
Emulation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
InfoPrint
Manager
for AIX
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
InfoPrint
Manager
for
Windows
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10/100/
1000
Ethernet
TCP/IP
FICON
Channel
PSF for
z/OS®
Yes
PSF for
i5/OS
AFP
Licensed
Program
™
®
Chapter 2. Specifications
41
Application Environment
The printer supports the InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs. These
programs let application developers take advantage of many special kinds of printing, including bar code
and optical character recognition (OCR) output.
The printer supports FOCA (Font Object Content Architecture), which allows printing with outline fonts.
Outline fonts give you more choices of fonts with substantially less storage requirements.
The printer prints optical character recognition (OCR) characters and bar code applications and most
standard OCR fonts and bar code BCOCA (Bar Code Object Content Architecture) formats.
The printer processes advanced function printing functions. These functions use the Intelligent Printer Data
Stream (IPDS) to drive the printer. Refer to the InfoPrint Solutions Company Product Description, or the
Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference or more information. Also see “Advanced Function Presentation
Licensed Programs” on page 64 for a listing of AFP software. Refer to Table 4 for a listing of printer model
choices as they relate to channel/adapter choices.
Host System Adapter Choices
InfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 come standard with the Ethernet Copper
10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet.
InfoPrint 4100 printers can attach to the processing systems shown in Table 4 with the indicated adapter
choices.
InfoPrint 4100 printers can have a maximum of two adapters. These adapters may be intermixed in any
combination of two.
Table 4. Host processing systems and adapter choices for InfoPrint 4100
Host System
Ethernet
System z
MS1 HS2 HS3
MD1/2 HD3/4 HD5/6
System i5
HS2 HS3
HD3/4 HD5/6
System p
MS1 HS2 HS3
MD1/2 HD3/4 HD5/6
System x
MS1 HS2 HS3
MD1/2 HD3/4 HD5/6
FICON Channel
MS1 HS2 HS3
MD1/2 HD3/4 HD5/6
ESCON Channel
MS1 HS2 HS3
MS1/2 HD3/4 HD5/6
See Chapter 4, “Preparing the Processing Environment,” on page 53 for more information about system
and channel adapter requirements.
Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
You can attach the printer with Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000BaseT) to available host systems running:
v InfoPrint Manager® for AIX
v InfoPrint Manager for Windows
v PSF for z/OS
v PSF for i5/OS
You can install one Gigabit Ethernet adapter and one of the following:
v A FICON channel adapter
v An ESCON channel adapter
42
Planning and Configuration Guide
System/390® Fiber Connection (FICON) Channel Adapter
You can attach to a FICON channel as follows:
v Directly to a host system FICON channel
v To the remote end of an IBM 2032/2042 FICON Director
v To the remote end of an IBM 2029 Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexor (DWDM)
You can install one FICON channel adapter and one of the following:
v An Ethernet TCP/IP adapter
v An ESCON channel adapter
v A second FICON channel adapter
Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) Channel Adapter
You can attach to an ESCON channel as follows:
v Directly to a host system ESCON channel
v To the remote end of an IBM 9032/9033 ESCON Director
v To the remote end of an IBM 9036 ESCON Remote Channel Extender
You can install one ESCON channel adapter and one of the following:
v An Ethernet TCP/IP adapter
v A FICON channel adapter
v A second ESCON channel adapter
Adding a second ESCON adapter allows dynamic channel switching mode with tightly coupled channels
and/or processing units, or with Assign/Unassign (which can be used with one or two ESCON Adapters).
Preprocessing and Postprocessing Device Interfaces
Preprocessing and Postprocessing Device Interfaces allow you to attach special equipment to help
automate the handling of forms input or forms output (or both) to the printer. Preprocessing equipment is
on the forms input side (for example, a roll feed) and postprocessing equipment is on the forms output
side (for example, a folder, burster, trimmer, or take-up roll).
Each of the printers has four interface ports. These ports may be equipped with Preprocessing/
Postprocessing (Pre/Post) or Advanced Function Postprocessing (AF Post) interfaces.
v Preprocessing/Postprocessing (Pre/Post) – Attaches most types of preprocessing and postprocessing
equipment, such as roll-feed equipment and folders, bursters, trimmers, or take-up rolls.
Pre/Post is standard.
v Advanced Function Postprocessing (AF Post) (Optional) – Attaches only postprocessing equipment
that requires architected software and communications control. Only one AF Post interface can be
installed on each printer.
IPDS supports the Select Medium Modifications (SMM) command which is used to invoke processing
options through the Advanced Function Postprocessing interface. SMM support is not available on all
PSF platforms. See “AFP Software Summary” on page 65 and Table 3 on page 41 for PSF support
details.
In duplex models, Port 1 in each printer has a Preprocessing/Postprocessing interface, which is standard.
You may select optional Pre/Postprocessing or Advanced function postprocessing interfaces to equip Ports
2, 3, and 4.
Note: The Forms Identification feature (FC 4464) uses a port in Printer 1 and could use an additional port
in Printer 2 if you are printing in dual simplex mode.
Chapter 2. Specifications
43
Things to Remember About Pre/Postprocessing Equipment:
1. When using preprocessing equipment, be sure that adapter cables do not interfere with forms under
the printer. See “Space Requirements” on page 80 for cable placement.
2. When using 457-mm (18-inch) wide paper, the distance between the back edge of the paper and the
back of the machine is about 0.6 cm (0.25 in.). This means that some of the powered-assist rollers
(urge units) used with other InfoPrint printers may not work. Be sure to discuss this with your pre- or
postprocessor vendors.
3. Be sure that any preprocessing or postprocessing devices you order operate at the same resolution
(dpi) as the printer.
4. With Duplex Configurations – To avoid static drag between the paper and the floor, the InfoPrint
Solutions Company recommends that you install a conductive floor plate in front of each urge unit
between the printer leveling pads. The floor plate is connected to the printer frame with a grounding
strap. Normally, preprocessor vendors supply these plates. The plate should be approximately 61 cm x
152 cm x 0.71 mm (2 ft x 5 ft x 0.028 in.).
Refer to “Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices” on page 136 for more
information concerning the Pre/Postprocessing interfaces.
Universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface (UP3I)
The universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface (UP3I) is an industry standard intelligent LAN
interface that connects production printers, inline pre- and postprocessing devices, workflow managers,
and remote operating stations. UP3I uses the industry standard IEEE 1394a "Firewire" connectivity
architecture to provide high speed two way communications between the printer control unit and pre- and
postprocessing devices.
Universal Printer Pre- and Postprocessing Interface UP3I
With the UP3I feature enabled, you can check the status of your UP3I devices and enable or disable them
from the printer console:
v Select Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → UP3I Devices to display the Pre/Postprocessing UP3I Devices panel. This displays a list of the UP3I devices that are currently communicating on the
UP3I network. For each device you select, you can check the status and edit the device settings. The
device settings panel lets you change the device name, specify the distance between the printer and
the UP3I device, and select the default pre- and postprocessing operations.
v Select Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing→ Pre/Postprocessing to display the
Pre/Postprocessing - Pre/Postprocessing panel. Use this panel to edit the UP3I sequence and enable or
disable the sequence.
For additional information, refer to the Planning and Configuration Guide.
UP3I provides the following improvements:
v UP3I broadcasts information about values changed on the printer console to other UP3I devices. The
operator needs to change the value only once. For example, the Forms Length today is set at the
printer and the operator must manually enter the same setting at each postprocessing device. Now the
operator only needs to make the change at the printer console and the change will take affect in each
postprocessing device.
v UP3I reduces or eliminates setup errors by reducing the operator actions needed today to efficiently use
a high-speed continuous forms printer with pre- and postprocessing devices.
v The printer can save postprocessing templates that contain settings for a given job. These settings can
be automatically sent to devices, rather than being manually setup by the operator.
v Today’s pre- and postprocessing devices rely on printed marks and barcodes for control codes to
operate the devices. UP3I eliminates these marks by sending appropriate information over the LAN. This
eliminates trimming to remove unacceptable marks on statements and books. It also eliminates difficult
barcode implementation by the customer.
44
Planning and Configuration Guide
v UP3I tracks pages through the whole system. With an extended jam recovery point, the printer can also
request pages that have been jammed at the postprocessing device.
v The customer can code finishing options and instructions in the formdef, requiring less operator
intervention and providing more options.
v Applications can specify the types of pre- and postprocessing required. Application information can be
electronically transmitted from the application program to the pre- or postprocessing device. Finishing
information, such as saddle-stitch or edge-stitch, can be specified. This increases compatibility between
continuous forms printers and cut-sheet printers where application information can specify the
postprocessing options.
v UP3I improves operational efficiency by directing blank pages to a waste device rather than a
postprocessing device.
System requirements
The following items are required to fully implement UP³I:
The following printer models support UP³I:
v InfoPrint 4100 Model PS1 with Feature Code 4730
v InfoPrint 4100 Model PD2 with Feature Code 4730
v InfoPrint 4100 Model HS1 and HS2 with Feature Code 4730
v InfoPrint 4100 Model HD2 with Feature Code 4730
v InfoPrint 4100 Model HD4 with Feature Code 4730
v InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD2 with Feature Code 4740
v InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD6 with Feature Code 4730 or 4740, depending on the processor
installed
The InfoPrint Solutions Company ships the following items:
v Two UP3I interface card and an I/O drawer
v AFCCU microcode Version 12.0 or higher or InfoPrint POWER Controller microcode Version 14.2 or
higher
You need to order the following items from other vendors:
v IEEE 1394a switch boxes that meet the specifications of the 6-pin IEEE 1394a Firewire switcher
v Power supply for switch box
v IEEE 1394a Repeater cables that meet the specifications of the Firewire (i.Link) Extension Cable 6Pin-F / 6Pin-M 15 FT (built-in repeater) from A2Z Cables, Inc.
v IEEE 1394a cables that meet the specifications of the Firewire (i.Link) Cable - 6Pin-M /6Pin-M 15FT
from A2Z Cables, Inc. - The specified cable length per segment (at 400 Mbit/s) is limited to a length of
10 meters. If there is a longer distance between the UP3I device and the hub, an IEEE 1394a Repeater
device has to be inserted.
Make sure you use pre- and postprocessing devices that are UP3I capable.
Table 5. UP3I device configurations
Printer 2
Printer 1
Post
15'Cable
15'Repeater
15'Repeater
15'Cable
IC3MC296
Pre
IEEE1394
Chapter 2. Specifications
45
Table 5. UP3I device configurations (continued)
Post
Printer 2
Printer 1
Post
Pre
15' Cable
Post
15' Cable
Switch
Box
15' Cable
15' Cable
Switch
Box
Pre
15' Cable
IC3MC297
15' Cable
PPFA UP3I support
UP3I functionality must be written into your FORMDEF.
A UP3I finishing interface is being added to Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA). The function is supported
at the print file and document level by coding the keyword ″UP3I″ and its related parameters on the Form
Definition, and at the medium level, using ″UP3I″ and its parameters on the COPYGROUP command. For
specific information, refer to the InfoPrint Page Printer Formatting Aid: User’s Guide by accessing
http://www infoprintsolutionscompany.com and entering InfoPrint Page Printer Formatting Aid in the
search field.
Conduit support for UP³i
InfoPrint Manager and Print Services Facility (PSF) for OS/390 and z/OS provide conduit support for UP3I,
meaning that you can submit jobs that have UP3I functionality written into the formdef through these
applications.
For more information about the InfoPrint Manager go to http://www infoprintsolutionscompany.com and
search on InfoPrint Manager for Windows or InfoPrint Manager for AIX.
For more information about the PSF for OS/390 and z/OS products go to http://www
infoprintsolutionscompany.com and search on Print Services Facility for OS/390
Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability
The printer is designed to ensure maximum reliability, availability, and serviceability. The following
elements reflect this:
v Message Display
The touchscreen windows and the display on the printer operator panel display messages in the
language of your choice:
– U.S. English
– Spanish
– French
– German
– Japanese
– Italian
– Brazilian Portuguese
46
Planning and Configuration Guide
–
–
–
–
Chinese Simplified
Chinese Traditional
Korean
Hungarian
– Russian
These messages give status information, request operator intervention, and guide operators through
procedures that have more than one step. Help functions are available for most operations.
Note: Not all languages are supported on the printer operator panel.
v Error Log
Sensors and microcode detect faults in the printer. Information about faults is displayed to the operator
and logged on the control unit hard disk for use in correcting problems.
v Traces
The printer controller can perform several kinds of traces. It can record detailed information about the
printer and control unit activities and communications with the host system. The operator starts and
stops traces.
v Print Samples
You can print these print samples whenever necessary to sample print quality, solve problems, adjust
the printer, or test the printer functions.
Data Security
The printer has the following data security features:
v The controlling computer cannot retrieve any data after sending it to the printer.
v After printing the last page, the printer cannot print any data that remains in the page buffer.
v The printer removes images that remain on the photoconductor.
v The control unit accepts commands from the controlling computer system to erase all residual print data
and fonts from its storage.
v Characters stored in the page buffer are difficult to interpret because the printer translates them from
8-bit EBCDIC (extended binary-coded decimal interchange code) characters to another form.
If many of the printing applications for your company are confidential, consider placing the printer in a
controlled-access area. Then, by using special print classes, you can control when sensitive data is
printed.
Chapter 2. Specifications
47
Resident Fonts
The printer supports the following contents of the InfoPrint Strategic Font Set:
v
v
v
v
v
IBM Core Interchange Resident Scalable Font Set
4028 Compatibility Resident Font Set
IBM Coordinated Resident Font Set
DBCS Resident Raster Font Set
DBCS Resident Scalable Outline Font Set
For more information on fonts, see Chapter 3 of the IPDS Handbook for Printers That Use the Advanced
Function Common Control Unit, G544-3895.
48
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 3. Organizing the Planning Team
Chapter Overview
This chapter describes tasks for each planning team member and identifies additional resources to
which team members can refer. Because printer operators participate in the daily operation of the
printers, their duties are also in this chapter.
The first step in preparing to install the printer is to select a planning coordinator. This person is
responsible for organizing and managing a project team to plan, order, and install the printer and, if
necessary, the Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) programs.
A typical planning team includes the following members:
v Planning coordinator
v Physical planner
v System programmer
v Application programmer
You may also want to include representatives from end-user areas as part of the planning team. Their
input can be valuable in determining requirements for advanced printing functions and special-purpose
materials.
Planning Coordinator
Throughout the planning phase, the planning coordinator meets with the planning team and your
installation planning representative to ensure that all pre-installation tasks are proceeding smoothly.
“Implementation Plan” on page 51 is a checklist of these planning tasks.
The planning coordinator should read all the chapters in this publication to help the other team members
prepare for the printer. The planning coordinator should also be familiar with the other manuals in the
InfoPrint 4100 Models Advanced Function Printers Library (see “InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3,
MD1/2, HD4/5, and HD5/6 Advanced Function Printers Library” on page xiv).
In addition to the tasks described in this publication, the planning coordinator should consider related
issues, such as:
v Training – Who needs to be trained on the printer or AFP? Who conducts the training sessions? When
will training be scheduled?
v Testing – Who performs the printer or AFP tests? What applications should we test? What forms should
we test? How can we conduct testing without affecting production schedules?
v Implementation – How will the printer be phased into production? What applications will use the printer
first?
v Documentation – Which local procedures do we need to change? Who is responsible for changing
local written procedures? Who needs copies of InfoPrint hardware and software manuals?
v Supplies – How large should the initial printer supply order be? What is the local procedure for
ensuring that supplies are kept in stock?
v Adapter Cables – Which adapter cables will be needed? Are they included on the printer order or will
customer supply cables?
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
49
Physical Planner
The physical planner is typically an industrial engineer or a supervisor. Physical planners determine the
location for the printer and prepare a layout plan. They are responsible for ensuring that the
environmental, electrical, and space requirements for the printer are met, and that the location is
convenient for printer operators and service representatives.
The InfoPrint Solutions Company offers special assistance with physical planning. Contact your marketing
representative for information.
Chapter 5, “Preparing the Physical Environment,” on page 69 is directed primarily toward physical
planners. It includes a physical planning work sheet and a site-preparation checklist.
System and Application Programmers
System and application programmers typically plan for and order the required Advanced Function Printing
licensed programs.
System programmers are responsible for:
v Ensuring that host channel cables, Ethernet, FICON, ESCON, and any channel extenders, converters,
or switching boxes required in the host adapter configuration are available for installation.
v Ensuring that if SNMP is to be used, a TCP/IP (Ethernet) LAN feature code has been ordered as one of
the adapters.
v Installing and testing the licensed programs.
v Incorporating the printer into the system configuration.
Information about system requirements for the printers is in Guide to Advanced Function Presentation,
G544-3876, and Advanced Function Presentation: Printer Information, G544-3290.
Application programmers create and modify application programs that interact with the licensed programs.
Application programmers participate in testing forms and applications. Chapter 6, “Selecting and Testing
Forms,” on page 93 and the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers
contains information related to testing.
If you are a system or application programmer, read Chapter 4, “Preparing the Processing Environment,”
on page 53 for information about planning for installing licensed programs, and Appendix B, “Work
Sheets,” on page 157 for information about selecting printer options.
Operator
Printer operators perform the following day-to-day tasks for the printer:
v Responding to the operational needs of the printer, such as loading forms and clearing forms jams.
v Replenishing the printer supplies, such as toner, developer mix, fuser oil, oiler belt, toner collector bottle,
and fine filter.
v Performing routine cleaning.
v Checking print quality.
v Running traces.
v Splicing forms (if required).
The Operator’s Guide, supplied in softcopy format with each printing system, contains general operating
procedures, and is the primary reference book for printer operators. Printer operators should also read
“Supplies” on page 149 for information about printer supplies.
50
Planning and Configuration Guide
The Quick Reference Guide, supplied with each printing system, contains the tasks an operator may need
to run when the online help is not available.
Implementation Plan
This checklist contains many of the major tasks that must be performed before and during the printer’s
installation. Use this checklist as a basis for developing your own detailed implementation project plan.
Fifteen Weeks Before Delivery
The planning coordinator:
__ 1. Identifies the members of the planning team.
__ 2. Orders the printer.
Note: Ensure that the InfoPrint Multiple Printer Controller (MPC) and InfoPrint Manager software
are also ordered.
__ 3. Orders the InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs.
__ 4. Orders any additional hardware that is required, such as the turnbar/flipper device.
__ 5. Verifies the order for the appropriate channel cables, TCP/IP, FICON, or ESCON, and for any
required channel extender, converter, or switching hardware boxes in the channel interface.
Determines if customer will supply any of the adapter cables or devices.
__ 6. Prepares a plan for selecting and testing forms for use with the printer.
The physical planner:
__ 1. Determines the location for the printer and arranges for any changes to the site. Ensures that the
site will have conductive flooring.
__ 2. Identifies the delivery route for the printer.
__ 3. Prepares a space layout plan.
__ 4. Determines who will install the electrical wiring and outlets.
__ 5. Determines the type of electrical adapter and ground-fault circuit protection to be used.
The system programmer:
__ 1. Determines the Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs needed.
__ 2. Creates a conversion plan for line-printer data and electronic overlays.
The application programmer:
__ 1. Identifies the applications that must be changed for migration to the printer.
__ 2. Prepares a detailed plan for converting and testing applications that will be used with the printer.
Ten Weeks Before Delivery
The planning coordinator:
v Meets with your installation planning representative to review the planning process.
The physical planner:
v Schedules the installation of electrical wiring and outlets.
The system programmer:
__ 1. Determines the administrative procedures for using Advanced Function Presentation licensed
programs.
__ 2. Begins installing and testing the Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs in the
computer system.
Chapter 3. Organizing the Planning Team
51
Eight Weeks Before Delivery
The planning coordinator:
v Orders initial supplies for the printer.
The physical planner:
v Ensures that the electrical wiring and outlets are being installed on schedule.
Six Weeks Before Delivery
The physical planner:
__ 1. Reviews site-preparation progress with your installation planning representative.
__ 2. Reminds the service representative to order the CE Toolkit and Maintenance Information. See “CE
Toolkit” on page 79 for ordering information.
Four Weeks Before Delivery
The physical planner:
__ 1. Completes installing and testing of electrical wiring and outlets.
__ 2. Completes all site preparation.
__ 3. Verifies that a forklift will be available to unload the printers.
Note: Uncrate the printers at the installation site.
Arrival of the Printer
The planning coordinator:
v Contacts the service representative and arranges to have the printer installed.
The system programmer:
v Completes tests of the Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs, including the installation
verification procedures supplied by the InfoPrint Solutions Company.
The physical planner:
__ 1. Unpacks the printer and inspects it for external damage.
__ 2. Moves the printer to the prepared site.
52
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
Chapter Overview
This chapter contains specific information to help system programmers plan for integrating the
printers into the existing processing environment. The basic hardware, software, and application
requirements for the printer are described in “Host System Adapter Choices” on page 42 and
“Application Environment” on page 42.
Network Adapters
InfoPrint 4100 Model MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 printers support a variety of adapters in
addition to the standard Gigabit Ethernet Copper TCP/IP support:
v 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet TX TCP/IP (copper)
v Gigabit Ethernet SX TCP/IP (fiber)
v FICON channel
v ESCON channel
See “Host System Adapter Choices” on page 42 for specifics on printers and host systems that support
each of these adapters.
The InfoPrint 4100 printer controller includes a built-in Gigabit Ethernet adapter. Customers can add
another gigabit adapter feature (fiber or copper). Multiple adapters may be useful for the following
configurations:
v An isolated network or cross-over cable is used for connection between the printer and the print server
(for example, MVS). Another Ethernet network connection is desired in order to access the printer for
management or monitoring purposes, such as SNMP or Productivity Tracking Feature.
v The customer wants a fiber Ethernet connection to a fiber network infrastructure in addition to a copper
connection.
v Multiple Ethernet connections are desired for backup and redundancy reasons.
v Multiple Ethernet connections are desired for connection to multiple networks.
Customers can also add FICON and ESCON adapters. These adapters are often installed in the printer
controller at the factory before the printer is shipped to the customer site.
As you plan the type and transfer mode for your channel-adapter configuration, refer to the system
reference manual for your host system.
Verify with your planning coordinator that the desired adapter cables and any converter or extender
hardware boxes are ordered when the printer is ordered.
Notes:
1. Adapters must be physically installed and logically installed. “Physically installed” means installing the
adapter in the printer. “Logically installed” means using the operator console to identify the adapter to
the printer. After an adapter is logically installed, a protocol (for example, IPDS) is installed and
enabled and then the printer controller can accept jobs over the enabled protocol.
2. Channel adapters that are physically installed will be automatically logically installed.
3. Two adapters can be logically installed at the same time; however, they cannot both be Ethernet
adapters.
4. For duplex systems operating in dual simplex mode, only one adapter is needed to connect the two
simplex engines to the system. Although the system consists of two printer engines, it is driven by a
single control unit. The two simplex engines require two contiguous addresses on an ESCON or
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
53
FICON adapter (beginning with an even-numbered address). When the printing system is operating in
duplex mode, the printers can use one of these addresses or a separate address on the same
channel.
5. When the printing system is printing in Dual Simplex mode, each printer engine can use a different
adapter to the same or different systems. For example, Printer 1 can be printing jobs from a z/OS
system attached through an ESCON channel, while Printer 2 is printing jobs from an AIX system
attached through an Ethernet adapter.
6. A single Ethernet adapter is normally sufficient to provide access to the printer through a customer's
network. This includes all printer configurations, including Dual Simplex. However, multiple Ethernet
adapters may be installed to meet varying customer requirements, such as those identified above.
When multiple Ethernet adapters are installed, each adapter has a separate IP address. Adapters may
be connected to the same, or different networks.
7. You can enable both ESCON or FICON links at the same time at the printer and then print jobs from
different hosts without interference. This is done by the automatically enforced vary on/off
(ASSIGN/UNASSIGN) protection. See “Multiple Host Environment” on page 57 for details and
prerequisites.
Gigabit Ethernet SX (fiber) TCP/IP Local Area Network
The Gigabit Ethernet SX feature is a TCP/IP adapter that offers high-speed data transfers using
multi-mode optical fiber.
This feature is also known as 1000BASE-SX Ethernet.
The Gigabit Ethernet SX feature can be used to connect to a print server running PSF or InfoPrint
Manager software. The connection to the server can be direct (point-to-point) or through standard Gigabit
Ethernet SX LAN connections.
The adapter complies with the IEEE 802.3z standard which is part of the IEEE 802.3 (2000) standard.
The Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter is a 1000BASE-SX PCI adapter that utilizes short-wave light and a
duplex LC connector to connect to multi-mode optical fiber. When used with 62.5/125um multi-mode fiber
the maximum cable segment distance is 275 meters (with 200 MHz-km cable). When used with 50/125
multi-mode fiber the maximum cable segment distance is 500 meters (with 400-500 MHz-km cable).
The Feature Code is 6472 or 6572. This feature provides a duplex LC fiber receptacle. See “Adapter cable
features” on page 58 for information about selecting a cable.
Gigabit Ethernet TX (copper) TCP/IP Local Area Network
The Gigabit Ethernet TX feature is a 10/100/1000BaseT adapter that uses an RJ-45 connector to connect
to a Category 5 or 6 Ethernet cable. When used with standard Category 5 or Category 6 Ethernet cabling,
the maximum cabling distance is 100 meters. This adapter is standard and can also be purchased as a
feature code.
This feature is also known as 10/100/1000 BASE-T Ethernet or 1000BASE-T.
The Gigabit Ethernet TX feature can be used to connect to a print server running PSF or InfoPrint
Manager software. The connection to the server can be direct (point-to-point) or through standard Gigabit
Ethernet TX (copper) LAN connections.
The adapter complies with the IEEE 802.3ab standard which is part of the 802.3 (2000) standard.
This adapter supports 10 Mb, 100Mb, and 1000Mb links to an Ethernet network.
54
Planning and Configuration Guide
The IEEE 802.3 (2000) standard specifies that Category 5 Ethernet facility wiring may be used with
1000BASE-T if it meets certain new transmission parameter requirements.
The building cabling must conform to EIA-569 standard.
The Feature Code is 6482 or 6582. The connector type is RJ-45. See “Adapter cable features” on page 58
for information about selecting a cable.
FICON Channel Adapter
You can attach to a FICON channel as follows:
v Directly to a host system FICON channel
v To the remote end of an IBM 2032/2042 FICON Director
v To the remote end of Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexor (DWDM)
FICON adapters may run at 1 Gbps (1 000 000 000 bits per second) or 2 Gbps, depending on the
equipment used.
For 1 Gbps adapter, the following guidelines apply:
v Longwave (LW) maximum link distance is 10 kilometers for 9/125 um single-mode (SM) fiber.
v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 500 meters for 50/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.
v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 175 meters for 62.5/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.
v Mode conditioning patch (MCP) cables may be used on each end of a multi-mode fiber to create a
Longwave link with a maximum distance of 550 meters.
For 2 Gbps adapter, the following guidelines apply:
v Longwave (LW) maximum link distance is 10 kilometers for 9/125 um single-mode (SM) fiber.
v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 300 meters for 50/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.
v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 120 meters for 62.5/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.
v Mode conditioning patch (MCP) cables are not supported.
Set the host system missing-interrupt handler (MIH) timer for 15 minutes.
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
55
PRINTING
SYSTEM
HOST
SYSTEM
FICON
(SM)
LW
SW
FICON
(MM 50.0)
SW
SW
FICON
(MM 62.5)
SW
FICON
(MM 62.5 or 50.0)
LW MCP
SW
FICON
(MM 50.0)
SW
FICON
(MM 62.5)
distance
a
FICON
(SM) 10km
LW
SW
FICON
(MM 50)
SW
SW
FICON
(MM 62.5)
FICON
(SM) 10km
2032/
2042
SW LW MCP
2032/
2042 SW
SW SW
FICON
(MM 62.5 or 50)
LW
MCP LW
(MM 50)
SW
FICON
(MM 62.5)
distance
c
DWDM
LW
NOTE: a+b+c
2032/
2042
LW LW
FICON
(SM) 10km
LW
MCP LW
LW
(SM)
100km-a -b c
distance
b
DWDM
LW
LW
SW
FICON
(SM) 10km
LW MCP
LW
FICON MCP
LW
(MM)
SW
FICON
(MM 50)
SW
SW
FICON
(MM 62.5)
SW
SW
HC7I0022
10km LW
100km
Figure 17. FICON channel adapter options
Note:
v SM = Single Mode Fiber
v MM = Multi Mode Fiber
v LW = Long Wave Laser
v SW = Short Wave Laser
v um = micrometer or micron
v MCP = Mode Conditioning Patch Cable (1 Gbps only)
ESCON Channel Adapter
Note: Use Feature Code 6431 or 6531.
When connected directly to an ESCON channel, the printer can be a maximum distance of 3 kilometers
(1.875 miles) from the channel. Either an IBM 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director provides connectivity to
additional host systems and also extends the maximum channel length as follows:
v Up to 6 kilometers (3.750 miles) with one 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director
v Up to 9 kilometers (5.625 miles) with two 9032 or 9033 ESCON Directors
56
Planning and Configuration Guide
The Extended Distance Feature (XDF) on the 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director also extends the maximum
channel length as follows:
v Up to 23 kilometers (14.375 miles) with one Director
v Up to 43 kilometers (26.875 miles) with two Directors
The IBM 9036 ESCON Remote Channel Extender (Models 1 or 2) extends the interface across common
carrier fiber optic connections. You can use one, two, or three 9036 extenders for a maximum distance of
43 kilometers.
Figure 18 shows the details of the above connection options.
ESCON
(MM)
6 km
9 km
23 km
HOST
SYSTEM
43 km
X
D
F
X
D
F
ESCON
(MM)
ESCON 9032/
(MM) 9033
9032/
9033
ESCON
(MM)
ESCON
(MM)
9032/ ESCON
(MM)
9033
X
9032/
D
9033
F
ESCON
(SM)
ESCON X 9032/ X
D
D
9033
(SM)
F
F
ESCON
(MM)
X
9032/ ESCON
D
9033
(MM)
F
ESCON
(SM)
26 km ESCON 9036
(MM) MOD 1
CC
(SM)
9036
MOD 1
ESCON
(MM)
X
43 km D ESCON 9036
(SM) MOD 2
F
CC
(SM)
9036
MOD 1
ESCON
(MM)
43 km ESCON 9036
(MM) MOD 1
CC
(SM)
9036
MOD 2
X
23 km D ESCON 9036
(SM) MOD 1
F
CC
(SM)
PRINTING
SYSTEM
9036 ESCON
MOD 1 (MM)
ESCON
(MM)
NWTI0013
3 km
Figure 18. Serial channel adapter options
Note:
v CC = Common Carrier Fiber Optic Connection (SM)
v SM = Single Mode (Laser Driver - 20 km maximum distance)
v MM = Multi Mode (LED Driver - 3 km maximum distance)
Multiple Host Environment
With ESCON or FICON, a single adapter can be shared between multiple LPARS or system images.
However, the printer cannot be shared between multiple PSF hosts at the same time. Operational
procedures must be put in place to take the printer offline to the existing PSF host before bringing it online
to another PSF. Otherwise, unpredictable print results can occur.
The Multi-Host Environment configuration setting for the ESCON or FICON adapters insures that an
operator cannot inadvertently vary the printer online to multiple PSF hosts simultaneously. This allows
sharing of ESCON adapters without concern that operator error could cause print problems. The
Multi-Host Environment setting for the adapter requires support for printer ASSIGN and UNASSIGN in both
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
57
the host operating system and PSF. Do not enable the Multi-Host Environment setting unless all hosts
connected to the printer support printer ASSIGN and UNASSIGN. Otherwise, PSF cannot access the
printer.
Support for the ASSIGN and UNASSIGN functions is built into the host and printer for communication with
TCP/IP Ethernet.
To allow access by a different PSF host, the operator must drain the printer and vary it off to one host
before varying it on to the second host. A second host trying to vary on the printer is denied access with a
notice that the printer is assigned elsewhere. The printer cannot be successfully varied on to the second
host until the operator drains and varies it off to the first host. For more information on ASSIGN and
UNASSIGN support, see PSF for z/OS customization information.
Adapter cable features
Each installation requires custom planning for adapter cabling. Often the facility infrastructure dictates the
type of cable that will be used, the connectors that are available, and the length of cable that is required.
Also, the network adapter feature being ordered will support a particular cable type and connector.
Jumper cables and converter kits are available as cable features. The jumper cables have a standard
connector on each end. The converter kits are short cables with a connector on one end and a receptacle
on the other end. A standard connector will plug into a receptacle of the same type (for example LC to LC
(R)).
One or more of the chargeable cable features may be ordered with the printer. There is a non-chargeable
feature code that may be selected when no cable will be ordered with the adapter (customer supplied
cable). In some cases the cable features shown will not meet the requirements of the installation and
cables will have to be provided using an alternate method.
If the customer is supplying the cable, make sure the customer has the adapter feature information that
specifies cable type and connector type (from Table 6.)
Selecting a cable feature
To select a cable feature:
1. Determine what connectors and cable types are supported on the adapter feature that is being ordered
(see Table 6).
2. Determine what facility cabling (cable types and connector types) the customer will use. Table 10 on
page 62 shows a graphical representation of the cable connectors.
3. Select a cable feature code to match the adapter feature to the facility cabling (see Table 7 on page
59).
4. If necessary, use Table 8 on page 60 to select a converter kit to convert a cable connector type to the
adapter feature receptacle type.
5. Use the examples provided in Table 9 on page 60 to select the correct cable feature codes.
Table 6 shows the connector types and cable types supported for the adapter features. These are the
adapter features that can be installed in the printer control unit.
Table 6. Cable and connector types supported by network adapter features
Feature
Code
Standard
58
Feature Description (PCI adapter)
Cable Type Supported
10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet (onboard in control Cat6 or Cat5e UTP (twisted pair)
unit)
Planning and Configuration Guide
Cable
Receptacle
RJ-45 (R)
Table 6. Cable and connector types supported by network adapter features (continued)
Feature
Code
Feature Description (PCI adapter)
Cable Type Supported
Cable
Receptacle
6482 or
6582
Gigabit Ethernet TX Adapter Feature
(10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet)
Cat6 or Cat5e UTP (twisted pair)
RJ-45 (R)
6472 or
6572
Gigabit Ethernet SX Adapter Feature
62.5 or 50 um MM fiber
LC (R)
6431 or
6531
ESCON Adapter Feature
62.5 or 50 um MM fiber
MT-RJ (R)
6475 or
6577
FICON LW Adapter Feature
9 um SM fiber
LC (R)
6476 or
6576
FICON SW Adapter Feature
62.5 or 50 um MM fiber
LC (R)
(R) = receptacle (socket) type connector
MM = Multi-Mode fiber
SM = Single-Mode fiber
um = micrometer or micron
Table 7 shows Feature Codes for jumper cable. These optional cables are 31 meters (100 feet) in length.
Table 7. Feature Codes for jumper cables
Feature
Code
Description
9777
No cable - Customer will supply (non-chargeable)
7501
Jumper Cable - fiber
9 um SM fiber
7502
Jumper Cable - fiber
7503
Cable Type
Connector 1
and 2
Length
Common Usage
LC
31 meters
(100 feet)
FICON LW
50 um MM fiber
LC
31 meters
(100 feet)
Gb Ethernet SX
FICON SW
Jumper Cable - fiber
62.5 um MM
fiber
LC
31 meters
(100 feet)
Gb Ethernet SX
FICON SW
7504
Jumper Cable - fiber
(order 7402 converter also)
62.5 um MM
fiber
SC
31 meters
(100 feet)
Gb Ethernet SX
FICON SW
7505
Jumper Cable - fiber
(ESCON: order 7401 converter)
(others: order 7404 converter)
62.5 um MM
fiber
ESCON
31 meters
(100 feet)
ESCON
Gb Ethernet SX
FICON SW
7506
Jumper Cable - fiber
62.5 um MM
fiber
MT-RJ
31 meters
(100 feet)
ESCON
7507
Jumper Cable - copper twisted pair Cat6 or Cat5e
UTP
RJ-45
31 meters
(100 feet)
Gb Ethernet TX
Ethernet
MM = Multi-Mode fiber
SM = Single-Mode fiber
um = micrometer or micron
Table 8 on page 60 shows cable converter kits for common connector types. Sometimes the available
cable connectors do not match the connectors provided on the adapter feature. The cable converter kits
may be ordered with the adapter feature to convert the supplied connector to another common connector
type. These converter kits are commonly plugged onto the end of a longer cable to adapt the connector
type of the cable to the connector type of the adapter feature. These optional converter kits are all 2
meters (6 feet) in length.
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
59
Table 8. Cable converter kits
Receptacle
Connector 1 (R) Type
Type (plugs plugs into
into adapter) cable)
Length
Common Usage
Feature
Code
Description
Cable Type
7401
Converter kit (fiber)
62.5 um MM
fiber
MT-RJ
ESCON (R)
(old ESCON)
2 meters (6 feet)
ESCON
7402
Converter kit (fiber)
62.5 um MM
fiber
LC
SC (R)
2 meters (6 feet)
Gb Ethernet SX
FICON SW
7403
Converter kit(fiber)
50 um MM
fiber
LC
SC (R)
2 meters (6 feet)
Gb Ethernet SX
FICON SW
7404
Converter kit(fiber)
62.5 um MM
fiber
LC
ESCON (R)
2 meters (6 feet)
Gb Ethernet SX
FICON SW
7405
Converter kit(fiber)
9 um SM
fiber
LC
SC (R)
2 meters (6 feet)
FICON LW
R = receptacle (socket connector)
MM = Multi-Mode fiber
SM = Single-Mode fiber
um = micrometer or micron
For example, if you have ESCON (FC 9970/4131) installed and are replacing it with ESCON (FC 6431),
the table shows that the original ESCON (FC 9970/4131) uses an ESCON (R) cable receptacle. Table 6
on page 58 shows that the new ESCON Adapter Feature (FC 6431) uses an MT-RJ (R) cable receptacle.
Therefore, select cable converter cable kit 7401 (MT-RJ to ESCON (R) (from Table 8) to use with the
existing cabling and the new ESCON Adapter Feature.
Table 9 shows examples of the feature codes for common cable types. Use this table to order the correct
cable feature codes when your facility has one type of cable connector and the printer has a different type
of cable connector. Table 10 on page 62 shows a graphical representation of the cable connectors.
For example, to order a 62.5 um MM cable that requires an LC connector at one end and an LC connector
at the other end and is 31 meters (100 feet) long, order Feature Code 7503. This cable could be used
between an adapter that has an LC (R) receptacle and facility cabling with an LC (R) receptacle.
To order a 62.5 um MM cable that requires an LC connector at one end and an SC connector at the other
end and is a total of 33 meters (106 feet) long, order Feature Codes 7402 and 7504. This cable could be
used between an adapter that has an LC (R) receptacle and facility cabling with an SC (R) receptacle.
To order a 62.5 um MM cable that requires an LC connector at one end and an ESCON connector at the
other end and is a total of 33 meters (106 feet) long, order Feature Codes 7404 and 7505. This cable
could be used between an adapter that has an LC (R) receptacle and facility cabling with an ESCON (R)
receptacle.
Table 9. Example Feature Codes for Common Cables
Adapter Type
Cable
Receptacle
at Printer
Cable Type
Cable Length
Cable Feature
Codes Needed
Gb Ethernet TX
RJ-45
Ethernet Cat5e or
Cat6 twisted pair
31 meters (100 feet)
7505
RJ-45
10/100 Ethernet
RJ-45
Ethernet Cat5e or
Cat6 twisted pair
31 meters (100 feet)
7505
RJ-45
60
Planning and Configuration Guide
Cable
Receptacle at
Facility
Table 9. Example Feature Codes for Common Cables (continued)
Adapter Type
Cable
Receptacle
at Printer
Cable Length
Cable Feature
Codes Needed
Cable
Receptacle at
Facility
Cable Type
ESCON
MT-RJ
62.5 um fiber
31 meters (100 feet)
7506
MT-RJ
ESCON
MT-RJ
62.5 um fiber
2 meters (6 feet)
31 meters (100 feet)
7401
7505
ESCON
ESCON
MT-RJ
62.5 um fiber
2 meters (6 feet)
7401
ESCON (R)
Gb Ethernet SX
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
31 meters (100 feet)
7503
LC
Gb Ethernet SX
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
31 meters (100 feet)
7402
7504
SC
Gb Ethernet SX
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
31 meters (100 feet)
7404
7505
ESCON
Gb Ethernet SX
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
7402
SC (R)
Gb Ethernet SX
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
7404
ESCON (R)
Gb Ethernet SX
LC
50 um MM fiber cable 31 meters (100 feet)
7502
LC
Gb Ethernet SX
LC
50 um MM fiber cable 2 meters (6 feet)
7403
SC (R)
FICON SW
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
31 meters (100 feet)
7503
LC
FICON SW
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
31 meters (100 feet)
7402
7504
SC
FICON SW
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
31 meters (100 feet)
7404
7505
ESCON
FICON SW
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
7402
SC (R)
FICON SW
LC
62.5 um MM fiber
cable
2 meters (6 feet)
7404
ESCON (R)
FICON SW
LC
50 um MM fiber cable 31 meters (100 feet)
7502
LC
FICON SW
LC
50 um MM fiber cable 2 meters (6 feet)
7403
SC (R)
FICON LW
LC
9 um SM fiber cable
31 meters (100 feet)
7501
LC
FICON LW
LC
9 um SM fiber cable
2 meters (6 feet)
7405
SC (R)
No cables needed.
This Feature Code
indicates customer
will supply cable.
9777
R = receptacle (socket) type connector
MM = Multi-Mode fiber
SM = Single-Mode fiber
um = micrometer or micron
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
61
Table 10. Cable connectors and receptacles
SC (R)
SC
RJ-45
ESCON (R)
MT-RJ
62
Planning and Configuration Guide
av2u0035
av2u0036
av2u0040
ESCON
av2u0039
av2u0037
av2u0034
av2u0038
LC
Performance Considerations
This section contains questions for system programmers to answer when planning for the channel-adapter
configuration and for Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs.
v How much and what kind of data will be printed?
A printed page can consist of different types of text, images, overlays, and fonts. The combination of
information on the page determines the time needed to prepare the data for printing. Jobs with little text
and no image or graphics are processed faster than jobs with complex pages that may include scaling
and image decompression.
v Will multiple pages of data be printed per sheet?
If an application uses N-Up Page Positioning or Cut Sheet Emulation (CSE), you will be increasing the
number of pages printed per minute. For example, for a printer with a maximum throughput of 465
simplex 8.5 in. forms per minute, changing the application to print 2-Up 11 in. forms increases the
maximum throughput to 720 simplex pages per minute. If the application is duplex, the maximum
throughput is doubled to 1440 pages per minute.
Increasing the throughput increases the amount of data per minute being transferred to and processed
by the system and the printer. System and channel loads may need to be reevaluated and adjusted to
allow for the increased processing and transfer requirements. Increasing the number of pages per
minute also intensifies processing based on page count, such as Checkpointing. Consider increasing
the Check Point interval for applications using N-Up, CSE, or duplexing.
v How busy is the system?
Several things affect the performance of the system and directly affect communication with the printer:
– Speed of the computer system
– Amount of available storage
– Importance of tasks assigned in the system
– Control program used to drive the printer
v Can the adapter support the data rate required for this application?
Slower technologies are not recommended for applications that are data intensive and require a high
bandwidth. Newer technologies such as FICON channel or Gigabit Ethernet provide excellent bandwidth
and room for future growth in print data.
Plan your system so that it can adjust to the change and growth of your company.
SNMP Remote Access
Printers that are connected to a LAN may be accessed by SNMP. The InfoPrint Network Printer Manager
is a free application that runs on Windows. It may be downloaded by accessing http://
www.infoprintsolutionscompany.com and searching on Infoprint Network Printer Manager. This
application uses the SNMP interface to obtain configuration and status information about the printer.
All or part of the following MIBs are supported by the InfoPrint 4100 POWER Controller. The ASN.1
documents identified in the tables below are on the InfoPrint 4100 User Information CD and on the
InfoPrint Solutions Company web site (www.infoprint.com). These may be used in conjunction with a MIB
browser, or by customer written applications.
Table 11. MIB variables supported by the InfoPrint 4100 POWER controller
MIB Description
ASN.1 Document
Printer MIB
(RFC 3805)
Printer-MIB.txt
Host Resources MIB
(RFC 2790)
HOST-RESOURCES-MIB.txt
Comments
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
63
Table 11. MIB variables supported by the InfoPrint 4100 POWER controller (continued)
MIB Description
ASN.1 Document
Comments
MIB-2
(RFC 1213)
RFC1213-MIB.txt
Supported Groups:
v system
v interfaces
v at (address translation)
v ip
v icmp
v tcp
v udp
v snmp
Unsupported Groups
v egp (extended gateway protocol)
v transmission
The following ASN.1 documents are imported by one or more of the supported MIB documents listed in
the previous table and are useful for compiling the MIBs into a MIB browser. These documents contain
Structure of Management Information (SMI) definitions, Object Identifiers, textual conventions that are
referenced by the ASN.1 documents. Some of these documents contain additional MIB variable definitions.
Their inclusion does not imply that they are supported by the InfoPrint 4100 POWER controller. The MIB
variables supported by the InfoPrint 4100 POWER controller are as documented in Table 11 on page 63.
Table 12. ASN.1 documents
Reference
ASN.1 Document
IANA
IANA-PRINTER-MIB.txt
IANA
IANA-CHARSET-MIB.txt
IANA
IANAifType-MIB.txt
RFC 2790
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES.txt
RCF 2863
IF-MIB.txt (see note)
RCF 3418
SNMPv2-MIB.txt (see note)
RCF 2578
SNMPv2-SMI.txt
RCF 2579
SNMPv2-TC.txt
Note: These documents contain MIB variable definitions that are not supported by the InfoPrint 4100 POWER
controller, but they also contain declarations that are needed to compile the other ASN.1 documents.
Advanced Function Presentation Licensed Programs
Some Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs are required for operating the printer;
others are optional.
The planning team should work with the end-user community to determine which optional advanced
functions are needed. Using the Guide to Advanced Function Presentation may be helpful during this
process. That publication contains a summary of Advanced Function Presentation , its concepts, products,
and benefits. It contains an introduction to Advanced Function Presentation and describes how the
licensed programs can meet your specific needs.
64
Planning and Configuration Guide
InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation Software
Determining the printing needs of your company and selecting the software that best meets these needs
are important steps in improving your printing operations. Refer to Guide To Advanced Function
Presentation G544-3876, for a description of available AFP software.
You need to order Print Services Facility (PSF) licensed programs for the operating system of each host to
which your printer will be attached. “AFP Software Summary” lists the PSF licensed programs that the
InfoPrint Solutions Company requires for use with its Advanced Function Printers.
Contact your marketing representative for the minimum PSF levels and prerequisites and limitations that
apply for supporting the printer.
AFP Software Summary
v PSF for System i5: 5763-SS1, 5769-SS1
v InfoPrint Manager for AIX, Windows XP and Windows 2000: 5648-A35, 5648-B34
v PSF for z/OS: 5655-B17
InfoPrint Manager can be used along with the SNMP support in the printer to monitor the status of the
printer remotely. SNMP support in the printer also gives faster effect at the printer when it is purging pages
for the InfoPrint Manager “Forward Space and Backward Space” function.
Optical Character Recognition and Bar Code Applications
You can use the printer for optical character recognition (OCR) and bar code applications.
Because of variations in OCR readers and bar-code scanners, be sure that you test the printer OCR and
bar code output with the actual readers and scanners that you use in your processing environment.
“Testing Forms and Applications” on page 94 has more information related to testing OCR and bar code
output.
For more information about OCR and bar-code printing, refer to:
v Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers
v About Type: InfoPrint Solutions Company's Technical Reference for 240-Pel Digitized Type
v Bar Code Object Content Architecture Reference
See your marketing representative to obtain these publications.
All of the printers support OCR-A and OCR-B fonts.
InfoPrint supports three methods for processing bar codes:
v Bar Code Object Content Architecture (BCOCA), which is InfoPrint Solutions Company’s strategic
method
v Document Composition Facility (Program 5748-xx9)
v Bar Codes and Optical Character Recognition Fonts (Program 5688-021)
BCOCA Support
All of the PSFs process BCOCA objects once the objects are generated. InfoPrint supplies the following
BCOCA generators:
v Advanced Function Printing Utilities/400 (57xxAF1)
v OS/400 Data Description Specification (DDS)
v Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA) (5688–190)
v Advanced Print Utility for AS/400
v Advanced Function Printing Toolbox
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
65
Other platforms require non-InfoPrint generators to produce BCOCA objects.
66
Planning and Configuration Guide
BCOCA supports the following bar code types:
Table 13. Bar-code type and modifier combinations
Bar Code Type
Modifier
X'01': 3-of-9 Code
X'01' and X'02'
X'02': MSI
X'01' through X'09'
X'03': UPC/CGPC, Version A
X'00'
X'05': UPC/CGPC, Version E
X'00'
X'06': UPC, 2-Character Supplemental
X'00'
X'07': UPC, 5-Character Supplemental
X'00'
X'08': EAN 8 (includes JAN short)
X'00'
X'09': EAN 13 (includes JAN standard)
X'00'
X'0A': 2-of-5 Industrial
X'01' and X'02'
X'0B': 2-of-5 Matrix
X'01' and X'02'
X'0C': Interleaved 2-of-5
X'01' and X'02'
X'0D': Codabar
X'01' and X'02'
X'11': Code 128
X'02'
X'16': EAN, 2 Digit Add-on
X'00'
X'17': EAN, 5 Digit Add-on
X'00'
X'18': Postnet
X'00' through X'03'
X'1A': RM4SCC
X'00'
X'1B': Japan Postal Bar Code
X'00' and X'01'
X'1C': Data Matrix 2D Bar Code
X'00'
X'1D': MaxiCode 2D Bar Code
X'00'
X'1E': PDF 417 2D Bar Code
X'00' and X'01'
X'1F': Australian Post Bar Code
X'00' through X'08'
X'20': QR Code 2D Bar Code
X'02'
X'21': Code 93
X'00'
X'22': USPS Four-State
X'00' through X'03'
X'86': UPC, 2-Character Supplemental
X'01' and X'02'
X'87': UPC, 5-Character Supplemental
X'01' and X'02'
X'91': Code 128
X'03'
X'92': Code 128 (new HRI formatting)
X'04'
X'96': EAN, 2 Digit Add-on
X'01'
X'97': EAN, 5 Digit Add-on
X'01'
X'98': PLANET
X'04'
X'9A': Dutch KIX
X'01'
Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment
67
Page Printer Formatting Aid (Program 5688-190)
v Codabar
v Code 3 of 9
v Industrial 2 of 5
v Matrix 2 of 5
v Interleaved 2 of 5
v MSI
v European article numbers (EAN) 8 and 13, which include Japanese article number (JAN) Short and
Standard
v Universal product codes (UPC) A and E, which include Canadian grocery product code (CGPC)
Installing and Verifying
The system programmer installs and verifies the AFP programs before the printer is installed. Licensed
programs include test procedures to ensure that the software is installed correctly.
At installation, the application programmer creates the resources (form definitions, page definitions,
electronic overlays, and page segments) that will be in the resource libraries.
Conversion
With the availability of Advanced Function Presentation, you may want to review your general approach to
printed output to get maximum benefit from the new functions. Your application development staff may
want to begin planning for this conversion effort before the printer is installed. Typical tasks to consider
include:
v Changing font character sets
v Converting line-printer applications to page-printer applications
v Converting preprinted forms to electronic overlays
v Creating new applications by using electronic overlays
v Enhancing existing applications to take advantage of printer functions
v Investigating applications that have special programming requirements
68
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
Chapter Overview
This chapter describes the environmental, power, physical, and space requirements that are
necessary before you install the printers. Refer to Appendix B, “Work Sheets,” on page 157 for an
installation-planning work sheet and a physical-planning work sheet. The audience for this chapter is
the physical planner and the system programmer.
Environmental Requirements
Consider the following requirements as you select the location for your printer:
v Temperature and humidity
Extremes of temperature and relative humidity can affect forms and adversely affect machine
performance. These affects may include forms jams and unacceptable print quality. For optimal
performance, operate the printer within the following ranges of temperature and humidity and within the
parameters specified in Table 14:
– Temperature: 18 – 24° C (65–75°F)
– Relative Humidity: 40% – 60%
Table 14. Operating Environment Power On
Operating Environment - Power On
Dry Bulb Temperature
Relative Humidity
15.6° C (60°F)
20% - 80%
18.0° C (65°F)
20% - 80%
21.1° C (70°F)
20% - 65%
23.9° C (75°F)
20% - 50%
26.7° C (80°F)
20% - 35%
v Ventilation
Dust and other contamination can cause machine faults. It is not recommended to place the printer in
close proximity to storage devices, such as tape drives and disk drives. The printer operates best in an
air-conditioned computer room with year-round humidity control and predominately recirculated, filtered air.
Refer to theGeneral Information Manual: Installation Manual—Physical Planning for details about
ventilation requirements for other equipment.
To maintain the ambient temperature within the above temperature range for optimal performance, there
must be an adequate supply of cooling air and outdoor make-up air for each print engine in the printer
room.
Cooling air:
3600 m3/hr
Outside make-up air:
A minimum 10% of the cooling air must be outside make-up air.
Additional ventilation may be required depending on paper selection and environmental conditions. Refer
to Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers for more information about
selecting preprinted forms and using them safely.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
69
Environmental Impact
Consider the heat and sound generated by the printer when selecting its location.
Heat/Power (Models MS1 and MD1/2)
The heat dissipation values in the following table apply to InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD1/2.
Table 15. Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD1/2
Idle Ready Mode
Printing
50 Hz
60 Hz
20 lb
20 lb
3.0
10.5
10.5
2.0
2.0
10
10
6.8
6.8
34
34
50 Hz
60 Hz
kVA
3.0
kW
kBTU/Hr
Heat/Power (Models HS2 and HD3/4)
The heat dissipation values in the following table apply to InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4.
Table 16. Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4
Idle Ready Mode
Printing
50 Hz
60 Hz
20 lb
20 lb
3.0
12.5
12
2.0
2.0
12
12
6.8
6.8
41
41
50 Hz
60 Hz
kVA
3.0
kW
kBTU/Hr
Heat/Power (Models HS3 and HD5/6)
The heat dissipation values in the following table apply to InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6.
Table 17. Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6
Idle Ready Mode
Printing
50 Hz
60 Hz
20 lb
20 lb
3.7
15.5
15.5
2.5
2.5
14.9
14.9
8.5
8.5
50.8
50.8
50 Hz
60 Hz
kVA
3.7
kW
kBTU/Hr
Acoustics (Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4)
The acoustical noise emission levels are as follows for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and
HD3/4. Operating levels are measured during continuous running with 20-pound forms.
70
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 18. Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2,
MD1/2, and HD3/4
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level,
LWAd (B)
Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LpAm (dB)
Operating
Idling
Operating
Idling
8.8
7.8
65
58
Notes:
1. LWAd is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level.
2. LpAm is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at one-meter bystander positions.
3. 1 B = 10 dB.
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
Acoustics (Models HS3 and HD5/6)
The acoustical noise emission levels are as follows for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6. Operating
levels are measured during continuous running with 20-pound forms.
Table 19. Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and
HD5/6
Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level,
LWAd (B)
Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,
LpAm (dB)
Operating
Idling
Operating
Idling
56 ips
(inches per
second)
8.6
7.4
69
57
66 ips
(inches per
second)
8.5
7.4
68
57
Notes:
1. LWAd is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level.
2. LpAm is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at one-meter bystander positions.
3. 1 B = 10 dB.
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
71
Physical Requirements
Consider the electrical requirements for the printer when selecting its location.
Normal Precautions to Prevent Fire
Because the forms and toner used in the printer can burn, take precautions to prevent fire. These
precautions include common-sense measures, such as keeping potentially combustible materials (for
example, curtains and chemicals) away from the printer, and providing adequate ventilation and cooling.
Power Requirements
The following sections describe power requirements for the print engines, the printer control unit, and the
Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit.
Power Outlet and Cable Summary
You should plan for one or more outlets, as summarized below.
v Print engine (one outlet for simplex and two outlets for duplex). See “Power - Print engine” for details.
v Printer control unit (one outlet for simplex and two outlets for duplex). See “Power - Printer control unit”
on page 73 for details.
v Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit (one outlet if the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit is installed). See “Power Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 73 for details.
Plan for cable lengths when doing your space planning. Figure 19 shows cable lengths for the print engine
power cable and the printer control unit power cable.
Print engine power cable
4.2 m (14 feet)
Printer control unit power cable
2.8 m (9.2 feet)
Rear
Signal/communication
Cable access
av2u0041
Top View
Front
Figure 19. Power cable lengths for engine and printer control unit
The following sections provide more detailed information about power requirements for the print engine,
the printer control unit, and the Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit.
Power - Print engine
Ensure that you have an electrical outlet that supports 15.5 kVA (Models HS3 and HD5/6), 12 kVA (Models
HS2 and HD3/4), or 10.5 (Models MS1 and MD1/2) and meets the power requirements listed in Table 20
on page 73 for each printer. This outlet must supply 3-phase power and be able to disconnect power from
each printer, such as:
v A compatible plug and receptacle installed near each printer. See “Print Engine Power Cable and
Receptacle” on page 77 for more information.
v A circuit breaker that breaks all live poles for each printer. This circuit breaker must be dedicated to the
printer and be within easy reach.
72
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 20. Basic electrical requirements for the printer
AC Voltages
Maximum
Country
U.S.A,
Canada
60Hz
Japan
50/60Hz
Europe
50Hz
Maximum Load
Nominal
Minimum
208
220
230
240
187
198
207
216
200
380
400
415
229
242
252
264
180
220
342
360
374
418
440
456
Wiring Information Phase Models MS1,
HS2, MD1/2, &
HD3/4
Models HS3 &
HD5/6
4-wire power cable
with three phases
and ground. Neutral
is not required.
3
48 Amperes
55 Amperes
4-wire power cable
with three phases
and ground. Neutral
is not required.
3
48 Amperes
55 Amperes
5-wire power cable
with three phases,
ground, and neutral.
Direct connection of
neutral to ground
required.
3
30 Amperes
30 Amperes
Attention: The 50-Hz 380/400/415 Volt version does not support non-earthed neutral and impedance-grounded
neutral power distribution systems. Installation on an impedance-grounded neutral power system (IT Power System)
could result in failures of motors and transformers in the printer.
Note: The current load for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6 is greater than previous InfoPrint 4100
Models, consistent with their higher throughput. Installation of this printer might require that you
increase your branch circuit service rating. Consult your local electrical authority to ensure your
service is sufficient.
Power - Printer control unit
An additional outlet is required to provide power to the printer control unit. The MS1, HS2, and HS3
(simplex) systems require one additional outlet. The MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 (duplex) systems require
two additional outlets. You should ensure that appropriate service, including an outlet, is provided. The
cables, which are provided, extend 282 cm (9.2 feet) from the control unit.
Table 21. Basic electrical requirements for the printer control unit
Country
All
Hz
50/60
AC Voltage¹
200–208/220/230/240
Power Plug Information
Phase
Circuit
Rating
See Appendix C, “Standard
Power Plug Listings,” on page
217 for descriptions of the
power plugs provided.
1
10 Amperes
Notes:
1. Maximum/minimum limits are 10% above/below nominal voltages.
Power - Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit
If the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit is installed, an additional outlet is required. You should ensure that
appropriate service, including an outlet, is provided. The cable, which is provided, extends 425 cm (14
feet) from the Buffer/Flipper Unit.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
73
Table 22. Basic electrical requirements for the Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit
Country
All
Hz
50/60
AC Voltage¹
200–208/220/230/240
Power Plug Information
Phase
Circuit
Rating
See Appendix C, “Standard
Power Plug Listings,” on page
217 for descriptions of the
power plugs provided.
1
2.5
Amperes
Notes:
1. Maximum/minimum limits are 10% above/below nominal voltages.
Physical installation power and grounding recommendations
Note: Consult electrical authorities to ensure compliance with local electrical code.
Power recommendations: De-rate facility step-down transformers 50% to handle surge currents and
harmonic currents. Assume that the transformer’s neutral connection (400V installations) will see two times
(2X) the current of any of the phases.
The transformer neutral connection is bonded to earth. Ensure that (1) the connection between earth and
transformer is secure, (2) that the grounding rods are in good condition and in good contact with earth,
and (3) that the connection distance is the shortest path possible.
To minimize interference between devices in the printing room, separate step-down transformers may be
used to feed separate groups of equipment. However, this is not always feasible. To reduce interference,
install the transformers as close as possible to the distribution panel and, from the panel, feed every
device with its own separate power cord (L1, L2, L3, (N,) E). This will ensure the shortest length of
common (shared) wiring.
The power cord neutral wire must be at least as large as the phase wires.
To best balance the loading on the phases of the transformer when more than one printer engine is
installed, the phase wires (but not neutral wire) to the printers may be rotated. See Figure 20 on page 75.
If more than one printer is installed, the power line wires may be rotated to balance the transformer phase
loading. In high voltage regions (400V), a neutral wire is present, but is not rotated.
74
Planning and Configuration Guide
TB101
1
R
2
S
3
TB101
N
T
T
2
R
3
N
S
Printer 2
1
S
2
T
3
R
Printer 3
TB101
N
1
R
2
S
3
N
T
Printer 4
av1u0038
Printer 1
1
TB101
To Breaker Panel and Transformer
Figure 20. Breaker panel and transformer wiring
Power Distribution:
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
75
2
3
1
4
10
5
av9mc272
7
8
6
9
Legend:
Phase Wires and Neutral
Insulated Green Wire Ground
Figure 21. Power distribution system
1. Grounding terminal bar electrically attached (bonded) to enclosure and building steel
2. Remotely operated power service disconnect
3. Neutral bus
4. Circuit breakers of appropriate size
5.
6.
7.
8.
Branch circuits
Customer-supplied receptacles/connectors in accordance with local codes
Conduit electrically attached to enclosure
Ground
9. Service entrance ground or suitable building ground interconnected with all other grounds
10. Neutral
Grounding recommendations:
v Good grounding (earthing) is essential for reliable operation of electronic printers.
v Ensure that neutral is securely bonded to ground at the feeding transformer.
v Neutral must always be separate from ground except at the transformer (TNS).
v Each distribution panel should have a dedicated ground feed from the transformer’s earth connection.
v The printer power cord must contain a dedicated ground wire. Using conduit for grounding of electronic
devices is not sufficient and is not reliable.
76
Planning and Configuration Guide
v To ensure all equipment operates from an equal potential ground, the facility may utilize a grounding
ring around the periphery and/or a grounding grid under the floor or building.
v To maintain good grounding at high frequencies, it is recommended that ground be accessible close to
the printers. This might be in the form of rods driven into the earth directly under the printer room floor,
or the building’s steel structure which should be in good contact with the earth. The service technician
will connect a wire from this local ground to the frame of the printer.
v Since the pre- and post-processing equipment works integrally with the printer, it is recommended that
the frame of each pre/post device be wired to the frame of the printer. The service representative will
perform this wiring.
Auxiliary power source recommendations: The InfoPrint printers are designed to tolerate loss of
power without damage. Therefore, backup power sources such as UPS units or other electronic power
supplies are not recommended.
The dynamic power consumption of laser printers must be understood if a backup power source is being
considered.
1. Startup power, and current, might exceed five times (5X) the continuous, or average, power. This is
highly dependent on the impedance of the facility’s distribution system and power source. This surge of
power lasts only a few cycles of AC and rapidly falls to its nominal level.
2. While printing, there are regular changes in current loading as lamps and heaters cycle on and off, and
this intermittent, instantaneous power might exceed two times (2X) the average power.
3. The continuous, or average, power was specified in the preceding sections.
Therefore, the selection of an auxiliary power source must involve careful consideration of these aspects
of power consumption, and it is recommended that the manufacturer of such equipment understand these
power requirements.
Additional electrical requirements for 50Hz 400 V installations
In addition to the electrical requirements defined in Table 20 on page 73 and Table 22 on page 74 and
Table 21 on page 73, the following are minimum requirements for service current capacity and short circuit
ratio:
Service current capacity (Iscc)
75 amps minimum for duplex models
50 amps minimum for simplex models
Short circuit ratio (Rsce)
150 minimum
Note: Refer to “Glossary” on page 263 for definitions of these terms.
Interface point requirements for low frequency phenomena
EN 61000-3-11 Compliance Statement: This equipment complies with EN 61000-3-11 provided that Zmax
is less than or equal to 0.05 ohms at the interface point between the user’s supply and the public network.
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure the equipment is connected only to a supply of that impedance or
less. The user may consult with the electrical utility, if necessary, to determine the network impedance.
Print Engine Power Cable and Receptacle
An AC power cable is supplied with all printers. This cable measures 427 cm (14 feet), except for printers
installed in Chicago, Illinois, U.S.A., where the power cable measures 183 cm (6 feet).
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
77
U.S. and Canada (Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4)
InfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4 use cords with Hubbell plugs (part number 53F1722, or
part number 53F1723 for printers installed in Chicago; both include the cord and Hubbell plug type
460P9V05). Provide either of the following Hubbell connector or receptacle (or equivalent) for this plug:
460C9V05
Connector (inline)
460R9V0
Receptacle (mounts on a wall or rail)
Note: These parts are available through Hubbell even though the part numbers shown may not be a
standard item listed in their catalog. The Hubbell part numbers may have “HBL” prefixed to the part
number shown above.
Figure 22 shows a Hubbell cord, plug, and receptacle.
R1
S2
G
A23I0030
T3
Figure 22. Hubbell plug and receptacle
Positions for phase connectors R1, S2, T3, and ground (G) are shown. An angle back box may be used in
conjunction with the receptacle.
U.S. and Canada (Models HS3 and HD5/6)
InfoPrint Models HS3 and HD5/6 use cords with Russellstoll plugs (part number 17R7613, or part number
17R8236 for printers installed in Chicago; both include the cord and Russellstoll plug type RS4100P9W).
Provide either of the following Russellstoll connector or receptacle (or equivalent) for this plug:
RS4100C9W
Connector (inline)
RS4100R9W
Receptacle (mounts on a wall or rail)
Note: These parts are available through Russellstoll or their distributors.
Figure 23 on page 79 shows a Russellstoll cord, plug, and receptacle.
78
Planning and Configuration Guide
R1
S2
G
A23I0030
T3
Figure 23. Russellstoll plug and receptacle
Positions for phase connectors R1, S2, T3, and ground (G) are shown. An angle back box may be used in
conjunction with the receptacle.
All Other Countries (All Models)
The power cable is supplied without a plug. Provide the appropriate plug and compatible receptacle.
Understand the electrical standards for your country, and use only an approved plug. Your marketing
representative has information on the voltage requirements in your country.
For more information about voltage requirements and for Russellstoll and Hubbell part numbers, refer to
the General Information Manual: Installation Manual—Physical Planning
Vacuum Cleaner
Ensure that the vacuum cleaner used to clean the printer meets the following requirements:
v All attachments or tools that are connected to the vacuum cleaner through which paper dust, toner, or
developer mix pass are nonconductive.
v Vacuum-cleaner motor cooling must be separate from the vacuum line so that these same substances
do not contact the electrical brushes of the vacuum-cleaner motor. Filtering the vacuum line and
allowing the filtered air to cool the motor is not safe.
CE Toolkit
Remind your service representative to order the CE Toolkit. For ordering information, refer to RETAIN® tip
H173282 for InfoPrint Models HS3 and HD5/6 or H137066 for InfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and
HD3/4.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
79
Space Requirements
Attention!
The InfoPrint 4100 models are 990.6 mm (39 in.) in width. Special accommodations such as wider
doorways may be necessary.
The minimum size for Channel Cable Access opening is 200 x 200 mm (8 x 8 in.).
Important
For printing systems with the Customer Changeable Developers (like the InfoPrint 4100), space must
be allocated for the developer cart and CE Service Rail.
Duplex Systems
This section describes the following suggested duplex configurations: Inline, Left-Angle, and 'H'. Alternative
configurations should be discussed with your marketing representative.
The dimensions of the Duplex Printing System and the Buffer/Flipper Unit (1), the optimum separation of
the units, the service clearance around the allowable configurations of these units, and the power cable
and channel cable locations are shown in the following figures.
Note: The minimum size for Channel Cable Access opening is 200 x 200 mm (8 x 8 in.).
80
Planning and Configuration Guide
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2
Maintenance Area
1524
(60)
914
(36)
Maintenance Area
2997
(118)
789
(31)
Channel Cable Access
914
(36)
660
(26)
914
(36)
420
(16.5)
990
(39)
Printer 1
996
(39.25)
467
(18.4)
965
(38)
Front
420
(16.5)
832
(32.75)
Printer 2
Cable
Access
660
(26)
Tall
Buffer Flipper
279
(11.0)
467
(18.4)
965
(38)
Front
492
(19.37)
1574
(62)
492
(19.37)
2692
(106)
4089
(161 = 13'-5")
508
(20)
2692
(106)
Leveling Pad
Power Cable
Caster
g5aud233
9804
(386 = 32'-2")
English measurements in inches
are shown in parentheses. Larger
measurements are converted to feet.
Developer Service Rail or Cart
Figure 24. Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2
Notes:
1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit is required for Models MD1/2 in the inline configuration.
2. With the Signature Page feature, an additional 305 mm (12 in.) are required between the output of
Printer 1 and the Buffer/Flipper Unit
3. To allow for adequate cooling, a minimum paper length of 3657.6 mm (12 feet) is required between the
forms exit area and the point in the postprocessing device where the forms are stacked, folded, or
rewound.
4. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with or without the CCD Cart feature.
5. Figures are not drawn to scale.
6. For information about outlets and power cables, see “Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page 72.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
81
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4
Maintenance Area
914
(36)
Channel Cable Access
914
(36)
660
(26)
914
(36)
420
(16.5)
990
(39)
420
(16.5)
832
(32.75)
Printer 2
Printer 1
996
(39.25)
467
(18.4)
965
(38)
Front
Cable
Access
660
(26)
Air
Bearing
489
(19.25)
467
(18.4)
965
(38)
Front
492
(19.37)
1574
(62)
492
(19.37)
2692
(106)
4089
(161 = 13'-5")
508
(20)
2692
(106)
9804
(386 = 32'-2")
English measurements in inches
are shown in parentheses. Larger
measurements are converted to feet.
Leveling Pad
Power Cable
Caster
Developer Service Rail or Cart
g5aud195
1524
(60)
Maintenance Area
2997
(118)
789
(31)
Figure 25. Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4
Notes:
1. The Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit is required for Models HD3/4 in the inline configuration.
2. The inline configuration requires about 27 square feet more floor space than earlier InfoPrint 4100
models. The shaded areas indicate where changes were made to the inline configuration compared to
earlier models.
Inline
Configuration
g5aud157
Note: Figure 26 compares the old footprint for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 with the footprint for
Models HD3/4 shipped after December 1, 2005.
Old footprint: 13'5" x 29'10"
New footprint: 13'5" x 32'2"
Figure 26. Comparison of footprint for inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4
3. With the Signature Page feature, an additional 305 mm (12 in.) are required between the output of
Printer 1 and the Buffer/Flipper Unit
4. To allow for adequate cooling, a minimum paper length of 3657.6 mm (12 feet) is required between the
forms exit area and the point in the postprocessing device where the forms are stacked, folded, or
rewound.
5. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with or without the CCD Cart feature.
6. Figures are not drawn to scale.
7. For information about outlets and power cables, see “Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page 72.
82
Planning and Configuration Guide
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6
Maintenance Area
1524
(60)
914
(36)
Maintenance Area
2997
(118)
789
(31)
Channel Cable Access
914
(36)
660
(26)
914
(36)
420
(16.5)
990
(39)
Printer 1
996
(39.25)
467
(18.4)
965
(38)
Front
420
(16.5)
832
(32.75)
Printer 2
Cable
Access
660
(26)
Air
Tall
Bearing Buffer Flipper
489
279
(19.25)
(11.0)
467
(18.4)
965
(38)
Front
492
(19.37)
1574
(62)
492
(19.37)
2692
(106)
4089
(161 = 13'-5")
508
(20)
2692
(106)
Leveling Pad
Power Cable
Caster
g5aud092
9804
(386 = 32'-2")
English measurements in inches
are shown in parentheses. Larger
measurements are converted to feet.
Developer Service Rail or Cart
Figure 27. Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6
Notes:
1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit and the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit are required for Models HD5/6 in the
inline configuration.
2. The inline configuration requires about 27 square feet more floor space than earlier InfoPrint 4100
models. The shaded areas indicate where changes were made to the inline configuration compared to
earlier models. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit was added to provide the additional paper length required
for adequate cooling when running at high speeds. Approximately 23.5 additional inches of floor space
between the printers is required to accommodate the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit.
Inline
Configuration
g5aud157
Note: Figure 28 compares the old footprint for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 with the footprint for
Models HD5/6 and Models HD3/4 shipped after December 1, 2005.
Old footprint: 13'5" x 29'10"
New footprint: 13'5" x 32'2"
Figure 28. Comparison of footprint for inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6
3. With the Signature Page feature, an additional 305 mm (12 in.) are required between the output of
Printer 1 and the Buffer/Flipper Unit
4. To allow for adequate cooling, a minimum paper length of 3657.6 mm (12 feet) is required between the
forms exit area and the point in the postprocessing device where the forms are stacked, folded, or
rewound.
5. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with or without the CCD Cart feature.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
83
6. Figures are not drawn to scale.
7. For information about outlets and power cables, see “Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page 72.
Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6
7799
(307 = 25'-7")
3499
(137.75)
Maintenance Area
789
(31)
1524
(60)
914
(36)
660
(26)
Channel Cable Access
420
(16.5)
990
(39)
Buffer Flipper
(Tall)
Printer 2
4089
(161 = 13'-5")
276
(11)
2546
(100.25)
965
(38)
Front
1574
(62)
2057
(81)
914
(36)
492
(19.37)
2692
(106)
7417
(292 = 24'-4")
Front
660
(26)
English measurements in inches
are shown in parentheses.
2692
(106)
Printer 1
Maintenance Area
Leveling Pad
Power Cable
Caster
Developer Service Rail or Cart
492
(19.37)
965
(38)
1574
(62)
990
(39)
4089
(161 = 13'-5")
Cable
Access
508
(20)
1524
(60)
g5aud089
420
(16.5)
467
(18.4)
Figure 29. Left-angle configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 and HD5/6
Notes:
1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit is required for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 in the left-angle
configuration.
2. The left-angle configuration requires about 108 square feet more floor space than earlier InfoPrint 4100
models. The shaded areas indicate where changes were made to the left-angle configuration
compared to earlier models. Printer 2 was moved 1830 mm (6 feet) to the left and Printer 1 was
moved 610 mm (2 feet) toward the bottom of the layout graphic.
Note: Figure 30 on page 85 compares the old footprint for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 with the
footprint for InfoPrint Models HD5/6 and Models HD3/4 shipped after December 1, 2005.
84
Planning and Configuration Guide
g5aud160
Left-Angle
Configuration
Old footprint: 22'4" x 19'7"
New footprint: 28'4" x 25'6"
Figure 30. Comparison of footprint for left-angle configuration
3. To allow for adequate cooling, a minimum paper length of 3657.6 mm (12 feet) is required between the
forms exit area and the point in the postprocessing device where the forms are stacked, folded, or
rewound.
4. With the Signature Page feature, an additional 305 mm (12 in.) are required between the output of
Printer 1 and the Buffer/Flipper Unit
5. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with or without the CCD Cart feature.
6. Figures are not drawn to scale.
7. For information about outlets and power cables, see “Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page 72.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
85
‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 (both printers
facing the same direction)
Optional
Walkover
Turn Bar
Tall
Buffer Flipper
1219
(48)
914
(36)
Maintenance Area
Front
Front
660
(26)
965
(38)
5334
(210 =17'-6)
Maintenance Area
492
(19.37)
2692
(106)
Printer 2
Printer 1
965
(38)
789
(31)
Cable
Access
1574
(62)
990
(39)
420
(16.5)
467
(18.4)
2100
(83)
990
(39)
Cable
Access
508
(20)
1524
(60)
English measurements in inches
are shown in parentheses.
Leveling Pad
Power Cable
Caster
g5aud084
7178
(283 - 23'-6")
Developer Service Rail or Cart
Figure 31. ‘H’ configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 (both printers facing the same
direction)
Notes:
1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit is required for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 in the ’H’ configuration.
2. The 'H' configuration requires about 42.25 square feet more floor space than earlier InfoPrint 4100
models. The shaded areas indicate where changes were made to the 'H' configuration compared to
earlier models. The distance between the printers and the turn bar and the Buffer/Flipper unit was
increased by 610 mm (2 feet). The tall Buffer/Blipper Unit was added to accommodate the additional
paper length.
Note: Figure 32 on page 87 compares the old footprint for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 with the
footprint for InfoPrint Models HD5/6 and Models HD3/4 shipped after December 1, 2005.
86
Planning and Configuration Guide
g5aud158
H Configuration
Old footprint: 15'8.5" x 23'6"
New footprint: 17'6" x 23'6"
Figure 32. Comparison of footprint for 'H' configuration
3. To allow for adequate cooling, a minimum paper length of 3657.6 mm (12 feet) is required between the
forms exit area and the point in the postprocessing device where the forms are stacked, folded, or
rewound.
4. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with/without the CCD Cart feature.
5. Figures are not drawn to scale.
6. For information about outlets and power cables, see “Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page 72.
Important
v The customer-provided turnbar is not available from the InfoPrint Solutions Company and must be
ordered through a pre/post vendor. It must be ordered, delivered, and ready to use before
installation time.
v The optional walkover is not available from the InfoPrint Solutions Company. It can be ordered
through a pre/post vendor.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
87
Simplex Systems
InfoPrint 4100 Models
Figure 33 shows the dimensions of the printer, space and service clearance, and power cable and channel
cable locations for all InfoPrint 4100 Models.
Maintenance Area
1524
(60)
914
(36)
Cable
Access
660
(26)
420
(16.5)
991
(39)
991
(39)
Printer 1
4089
(161 = 13'-5")
467
(18.4)
English measurements in inches
are shown in parentheses.
965
(38)
Front
1574
(62)
492
(19.37)
Power Cable
Caster
Developer Service Rail or Cart
2692
(106)
508
(20")
g5aud198
Leveling Pad
4115
(162" = 13'-6")
Figure 33. Dimensions, service clearance, power cable, and cable locations for InfoPrint 4100 Models
Notes:
1. To allow for adequate cooling, a minimum paper length of 1829 mm (6 feet) is required between the
forms exit area and a postprocessing device. Additional space may be required when printing certain
applications, such as when using heavy paper.
2. The power cable shown on the printer control unit applies to InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6
only.
3. Figures are not drawn to scale.
4. For information about outlets and power cables, see “Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page 72.
88
Planning and Configuration Guide
Physical Layout
As you plan your physical layout, be sure to:
v Install the printer away from the main traffic pattern. Allow space for operators and service
representatives to perform their tasks. This space should not extend into walkways.
v Install the printer in a location that is convenient for the operator. For example, consider whether the
planned location is close to printer supply storage areas and to output distribution areas.
v Allow 210 cm (83 inches) between the floor and the lowest permanently attached object above the
printer, such as a light or a cable rail. This layout gives printer operators and service representatives
space in which to work.
v Allow 152 cm (60 inches) between any outside surface of the printer and an adjacent wall to prevent
ambient heat rise. If the specified clearance cannot be achieved, see “Installation Requirements” on
page 91.
Shipping Notes
As you plan for the arrival of the printer, note that:
v Each printer is shipped on two separate pallets: one pallet for the printer frame and a second pallet for
the control unit frame. For sizes and weights, see Table 24, and Table 26 on page 90.
v In addition to the pallets, one or two additional cartons are shipped with the printer. These cartons
contain options and miscellaneous hardware necessary to install the printer.
v Check the route that the printers must travel from your loading dock to the location where they will be
installed to ensure that they fit through the doorways and halls. The printers are wider than a standard
doorway.
Physical Dimensions
Approximate dimensions of the printer frames and control units are shown in Table 24 and Table 23.
Approximate dimensions of the Buffer/Flipper Units are shown in Table 23.
Table 23. Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2,
MD1/2, and HD3/4
Dimension
Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2,
and HD3/4 Print Engine
Printer 1 Control Unit
Printer 2 Control Unit1
Depth2
990 mm (39 in.)
990 mm (39 in.)
990 mm (39 in.)
Height
1550 mm (61 in.)
1550 mm (61 in.)
1550 mm (61 in.)
Length
1905 mm (75 in.)
789 mm (31 in.)
789 mm (31 in.)
Weight
1023 kg (2250 lb)
227 kg (500 lb)
249 kg (550 lb)3
Notes:
1. Simplex or printer 2 in a duplex system.
2. The printer is wider than a standard doorway.
3. Including the weight of the printer controller.
4. Floor loading is estimated to be approximately 105 lbs/sq. in. (average) distributed across the seven feet under
the engine section and approximately 40 lbs./sq. in. (average) under the control unit section.
Table 24. Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and
HD5/6
Dimension
Models HS3 and HD5/6 Print
Engine
Printer 1 Control Unit
Printer 2 Control Unit1
Depth2
1000 mm (39 in.)
990 mm (39 in.)
990 mm (39 in.)
Height
1550 mm (61 in.)
1550 mm (61 in.)
1550 mm (61 in.)
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
89
Table 24. Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and
HD5/6 (continued)
Dimension
Models HS3 and HD5/6 Print
Engine
Printer 1 Control Unit
Printer 2 Control Unit1
Length
2639 mm (104 in.)
789 mm (31 in.)
789 mm (31 in.)
Weight
1025 kg (2260 lb)
193 kg (425 lb)
249 kg (550 lb)3
Notes:
1. Simplex or printer 2 in a duplex system.
2. The printer is wider than a standard doorway.
3. Including the weight of the printer controller.
4. Floor loading is estimated to be approximately 105 lbs/sq. in. (average) distributed across the seven feet under
the engine section and approximately 40 lbs./sq. in. (average) under the control unit section.
Table 25. Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the Buffer/Flipper Units
Dimension
Short Buffer/Flipper
Tall Buffer/Flipper
Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper
Unit
Depth
635 mm (25 in.)
635 mm (25 in.)
832 mm (32.75 in.)
Height
838 mm (33 in.)
1600 mm (64 in.)
1245 mm (49 in.)
Length
279 mm (11 in.)
279 mm (11 in.)
489mm (19.25 in.)
Weight
16 kg (36 lb)
32 kg (70 lb)
145 kg (320 lb)
Table 26. Printer frame physical dimensions when crated1
Dimension
Simplex Models
Duplex Models
Depth
1181 mm (46.5 in.)
1181 mm (46.5 in.)
Height
1791 mm (70.5 in.)
1791 mm (70.5 in.)
Length
2032 mm (80.0 in.)
2032 mm (80.0 in.)
Weight
1149 kg (2533 lb)
1149 kg (2533 lb)
Physical Attachment Requirements
The system programmer, the InfoPrint Solutions Company representative, and the physical planner plan
the channel-cable route between the controlling computers and the printer.
v For Ethernet, copper cabling must meet specifications in ANSI/IEEE Standard 802.3a, b, c, and e.
– Ethernet Twisted Pair
- To connect to 100BaseT LAN or 1000BaseT LAN, use category 5 or category 6 unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cabling supplied by the customer with a RJ45 connector.
- To connect to 10BaseT LAN, use category 3, 4, or 5 (UTP) cabling supplied by the customer with
a RJ45 connector.
– The building cabling must conform to EIA-569 standard. Which includes that the cable should be set
away from an EMI source. Some excerpts from the standard show the minimum distance from:
- Transformers and electric motors: 40 inches.
- Power Source at 480 V or less, Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to
open or non-metal pathways: 24 inches.
- Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to grounded metal conduit pathway.
Power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit in proximity to grounded metal conduit pathway:
12 inches.
90
Planning and Configuration Guide
- Fluorescent lighting: 12 inches.
v For Gigabit Ethernet SX, fiber optic cabling must meet the specifications in IEEE standard 802.3 (2000).
Consult Planning for Fiber Optic Links when planning fiber optic connections.
v For Gigabit Ethernet TX, cabling must meet the specifications in IEEE standard 802.3 (2000).
v For FICON and ESCON channels — Refer to Planning for Fiber Optic Links for definitions of the cable
groups and the maximum cable lengths for the printer.
When you order your printer, also order cables for Ethernet or the FICON or ESCON channel, plus any
channel extenders, converters, directors, switching boxes, terminators, or multi-station access units
required in the interface.
Installation Requirements
A service representative installs the printer. However, you are responsible for the following pre-installation
tasks:
v Ensure that the environmental, electrical, and space requirements specified in this chapter are met. Use
the “Installation Planning Work Sheet” on page 158 to complete this step.
v With a Duplex Configuration, if the required distance between the printer and an adjacent wall cannot
be achieved, install air blowers to circulate air between the printer and the wall.
v Ensure that a forklift and forklift operator are available at delivery to remove the printer from its shipping
pallet.
After the printer is removed from the shipping pallet, you can move it on its own casters to the desired
location.
Note: As soon as possible after your printer arrives, unpack it and check for external damage. If the
covers are broken, bent, or scratched, work with the shipping contractor and your marketing
representative to resolve the problem.
v Inspect the receiving area and the areas through which the printer must be moved. Ensure that no
obstacles interfere with moving the printer to its planned location. Consider the following:
– The forklift needs space in which to operate.
– Ensure that halls and doorways are large enough for the printer to pass through (see Table 24 on
page 89).
– Ensure that hall corners and angles are large enough to permit the printer to turn.
– Ramps must have no more than a 13° incline.
– Elevators and elevator doorways must be able to accommodate the size and weight of the printer
and the people who are moving it.
– Stairs, door sills, floor gaps, and carpeting can make it impossible to roll the printer.
v Ensure that the floor is level within ±1°.
v Ensure that the correct adapter cables and hardware are available for Ethernet LANs, FICON channels,
or ESCON channels.
v Ensure that approved electrical outlets with correct power are reserved for the printer, and that they can
be reached with the power cables. The approximate locations of the printer power cable and the signal
communication cable areas are shown earlier in this chapter.
v Ensure that a separate ground wire for all connections from the printer engine, the printer control unit,
and all pre/postprocessors go to the ground bus bar of the circuit breaker box. See Figure 21 on page
76.
v Ensure that the ground wire and the neutral wire between the circuit breaker box and the source
(building ground) are separate wires; one wire is for neutral and one is for ground. See Figure 21 on
page 76.
v Ensure that the printer engine power and the control unit power go to the same circuit breaker box.
Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment
91
v If you are installing the printer on a raised floor, ensure that the access holes in the raised floor are
large enough for both the channel cable and the power cable, and ensure that the raised floor panels
under the right side (developer side) of the printer are vented (perforated with holes) to prevent internal
heat rise.
92
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 6. Selecting and Testing Forms
Chapter Overview
This chapter reviews the basic requirements for print materials intended for use on InfoPrint 4100
Models HS3 and HD5/6 printers.
To get maximum reliability and print quality from the printer, the InfoPrint Solutions Company recommends
that you rely on the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers, your
forms supplier, and your marketing representative to help you choose the best forms and special-purpose
materials for your applications.
Continuous Forms
The printer generally uses single-ply, fanfold forms with both edges punched for tractor feeding and with
horizontal perforations between the sheets. Micro-perforated forms can be used for cleaner cuts between
sheets. With appropriate pre-processing and post-processing devices attached, the printer can also use
roll-feed forms.
Stacking Forms
The stacker can stack forms prefolded from 7 to 14 inches (178 to 356 mm) in length as measured in the
process direction (parallel to the tractor holes). 7.0 in. to 17 in. (147.3 to 356 mm) for InfoPrint 4100
models.
Notes:
1. The prefolded forms length does not have to be identical to the forms length printed (as specified in
the defined forms). For example: A 3-inch form may have been prefolded with three forms between
folds (a 9-inch prefolded length).
2. Roll forms cannot be stacked. For these and other applications you must have suitable post-processing
equipment installed and enabled on the printer, which disables the stacker.
Attention
Printing to the internal stacker is not supported in duplex mode.
Continuous forms are folded and stacked on a stacker table. As the height of the form stack increases, the
stacker table lowers until the printing stops or until the stacker is full.
You can adjust the length and width of the stacker to fit the size of forms being used. The two shortest
lengths of the common-use sizes, 3½ and 5½ inches, are prefolded two lengths at a time, in folds of 7 and
11 inches, respectively.
The two shortest lengths of ISO sizes, 3½ and 3 inches, are folded two and three lengths at a time, in folds
of 7 and 9 inches, respectively. Forms that are 6 inches long are folded in 12-inch lengths.
Special-Purpose Materials
Discuss your special-purpose applications with your forms suppliers and ensure that they understand that
the forms are being run on a printer. Before you use new preprinted forms for production runs, test the
jobs that print them to ensure everything works well.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
93
Work closely with your marketing representative while you are selecting what kinds of forms and
special-purpose materials to use. Your marketing representative can give you technical help, share
information from other successful printer users, and help you design your own special materials.
Preprinted Forms
If you are planning to use preprinted forms (for example, your company letterhead), ensure that the ink is
designed for nonimpact printing. Certain inks are likely to rub off or smear after they have been heated by
the fuser. Remember the following recommendations when selecting ink for preprinted forms:
v Use offset lithography to make preprinted forms for the printer.
v Choose laser inks that can tolerate the high temperatures in the fuser. Generally, oxidation-cured,
oil-based inks withstand high temperatures better than latex inks.
v Allow plenty of drying time (from 1 to 2 weeks) before running preprinted forms through the printer. This
is especially important when oil-based inks are used. Drying should take place in a mild environment of
15° to 27°C (60° to 80°F) and 35% to 50% relative humidity.
v Limit the amount of ink on the preprinted forms.
v Limit the use of oxidation retardants on the printing press when oxidation-cured inks are used.
v Choose forms with a surface that absorbs ink well. Avoid forms with a ribbed or heavy surface because
they do not absorb ink well.
Storing Print Materials
Store forms and special-purpose materials in an area where temperature and humidity are similar to the
environment in which they are used. If forms are allowed to absorb too much moisture, wrinkles and blank
spots may result.
Avoid areas with extreme heat or humidity. Extended exposure to these extremes can permanently
damage the materials. Also, storing forms in an area where relative humidity is above 65% may result in
reduced print quality.
Testing Forms and Applications
An ideal application for the printer would print standard-font text and simple images on plain white paper,
75-g/m² (20-lb) bond. This paper would be manufactured specifically for use in nonimpact printers, and
would be free of binder holes, cut-outs, and other cuts. The page layout would keep text and images away
from perforations. After leaving the printer, output from an ideal application would be allowed to cool, and
would receive minimal handling, rubbing, and creasing.
When it is processing an ideal application, the printer can deliver maximum print quality and reliability. With
applications that deviate from the ideal, print quality may decrease, and the need for operator interventions
may increase. This does not mean that the printer cannot be used for the application; it does mean that
you need to test the application.
For detailed information on deciding what forms and applications to test and how to test them, refer to
Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers
94
Planning and Configuration Guide
Valid Form Lengths in Inches
Table 27. Examples of some valid form lengths in inches
If the Form Length is:
Use this value at the Touchscreen
Use this value at the Stacker
Control Panel:
3.0
3.0
See note 2
3¹/₂
3.5
See note 2
4.0
4.0
See note 2
4¹/₂
4.5
See note 2
5.0
5.0
See note 2
5¹/₂
5.5
See note 2
6.0
6.0
See note 2
6¹/₂
6.5
See note 2
7.0
7.0
7.0
7¹/₂
7.5
7¹/₂
8.0
8.0
8.0
8¹/₆
8.1
See note 1
8¹/₃
8.3
8¹/₃
8¹/₂
8.5
8
8²/₃
8.6
8²/₃
8⁵/₆
8.8
See note 1
9.0
9.0
9.0
9¹/₂
9.5
9¹/₂
10.0
10.0
10.0
10¹/₂
10.5
10¹/₂
11.0
11.0
11.0
...
...
...
28.0
28.0
28.0
Notes:
1. The form lengths shown are examples only. You can enter form lengths in one-sixth of an inch increments at the
touchscreen. For reference, see 8¹/₃ and 8²/₃ above.
The stacker control panel does not allow form lengths in one-sixth of an inch. The smallest increment allowed on
the stacker control panel is one-third of an inch.
2. The setting equals the forms length as measured from fold perforation to fold perforation. InfoPrint 4100 Models
DO NOT support page sizes less than 76 mm (3 inches) in length.
3. Form lengths as prefolded greater than 17.0 inches up to the maximum are permissible if a postprocessing
device is installed and enabled.
Form lengths greater than 28 inches can be used if the Signature Page feature (FC 4553) is installed.
Chapter 6. Selecting and Testing Forms
95
96
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
Chapter Overview
This chapter describes how to set and update the printer definition. Please note the table contains
information on all possible choices across the various models. Not all entries are applicable to all
models.
Appendix B, “Work Sheets,” on page 157 contains work sheets you can use to record your definition
choices
You can define the printer in the categories of information described in the following sections:
v “Changing the Language of Messages”
v “Changing Access Levels and Passwords” on page 98
v “Defining the Printer” on page 100
v “Defining Adapters” on page 130
v “Defining Protocols” on page 131
v “Defining Remote Access” on page 132
v “Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices” on page 136
Changing the Language of Messages
This procedure changes the language used for all text within the console panels and windows, and (except
for Russian, Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese) on the printer operator panel display as
well. When you select Russian, Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese, the printer operator
panel displays U.S. English text.
Once you change the language, it remains in effect until changed again with this procedure.
A selection box lists the available language choices. A scroll bar on the right side of the box displays
additional choices not shown in the box, and highlights the current choice. The options are:
v English
v Spanish
v German
v Japanese
v French
v Italian
v Brazilian Portuguese
v Simplified Chinese
v Traditional Chinese
v Korean
v Russian
v Hungarian
Changing the language
Printer Definition → Printer → Basic → Language
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
97
Changing Access Levels and Passwords
The different levels of authorization are:
v Operator: No password is required for access to Operator procedures.
v Administrator: The Administrator has access to all functions except those related to the service and
repair of the printer.
v Service Representative (SSR): The service representative has access to all functions of the printer.
Initial Operation
When the printers are shipped from the factory, they are set for the Administrator user authorization
level. This makes all procedures except service-related activities available. The factory-set password
is empty. That is, if you change the user level to the Operator level and then want to go back to the
Administrator level, simply select Administrator and OK on the Logon panel when it appears. You
do not need to enter any data.
If you want to maintain an Administrator authorization level, the InfoPrint Solutions Company
recommends that you establish a new password for the Administrator when the installation of the
system is complete. If you treat all operators as administrators, then leave the current ″all blanks″
password as it is. When the printer is powered on and there is an Administrator password you are
logged on as Operator. If there is no password you are logged on as Administrator.
If the current Administrator password is forgotten or lost, the system accepts a fixed, alternate
password for that level. Obtain this alternate password from your system administrator.
You can create new user or operator identities. See “Managing and Defining New Users” for more
details. This allows you to customize the functions that individual users have authority to perform.
The capability to manage users is available by default to the Administrator and Service authorization
levels.
This procedure lets you set the authorization level of the person working on the printer and change the
user authorization password. Access to higher user authorization levels is protected by a password. If the
current password is not known, access to the requested user authorization level is denied.
1. On the Main touch panel, select Logon to display the Logon window.
2. On the Logon window, select the User ID that you want to change and select OK.
If the User ID you are changing to has a password, the Enter Password window displays. Enter the
password and select OK.
Note: To change a password for a User ID, you must be logged on with that user ID and the user ID
cannot be the default login user ID.
3. To change a password:
a. Select Change Password.... You see the Change Password window.
b. Enter the old password.
c. Enter the new password (twice).
d. Select OK to change the password or Cancel if you decide not to change the password.
Managing and Defining New Users
You can create new user identities.
1. On the Main touch panel, select Logon to display the Logon window.
98
Planning and Configuration Guide
2. On the Logon window, select Manage Users.... You see the Defined Users window, which lists all
users that are defined and visible to the current user. For example, if you are logged in as
Administrator, all users who are subsets of the Administrator and Operator access authority levels will
be visible in the list.
3. To add a new user:
a. Select New User.... You see the New User window, which lets you specify a new user name, the
access authority level for the user, and an optional password.
b. Enter the new user name in the Name field.
c. Select an access authority level from the Console Access Authority list. This access authority
allows the specified user to use the console.
d. Select an access authority level from the Online Access Authority list. This access authority
allows users to access the printer using InfoPrint Online Access (Web Pages).
e. Enter a password if desired.
f. Select OK to save your changes or Cancel to quit without saving your changes.
4. To specify a subset of functions to apply to the new user login:
a. Select the user name from the Defined Users list.
b. Select User Functions.... You see the User Functions window, which displays all functions that are
available to the user, depending on the access authority level you selected.
c. For functions that you do not want the user to access, select the functions from the Functions list
and use the arrows to add those functions to the Functions Unavailable to ’User’ list. Then select
Close.
You can also use the arrows to remove items from the Functions Unavailable to ’User’ list.
5. To manage users in other ways:
a. Make the user the default login after a reboot by selecting Yes for Default Login, which will
change to Yes.
b. Select a console display language for each user by selecting a language from the Language
drop-down list.
Note: Select Default if you do not want to override the language set in Printer Definition →
Printer → Basic.
c. Customize two hot buttons that will display on the Main touch panel for each user. From the
Custom Button 1 or Custom Button 2 drop-down list, select the panel you want the hot button to
display.
6. Select OK when you have customized the settings on this panel.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
99
Defining the Printer
This procedure lets you view or update a copy of the printer definition.
Note: The printer can have multiple sets of definition data: one for each mode in which the printer can
operate. To update a definition for a particular mode, the printer must be running in that mode.
Printing printer data
Maintenance → Print Samples → Printer Configuration
Important
Printer data is always printed in U.S. English regardless of the language used on the touch panel.
Configuring the Printer
To view printer configuration settings, select Printer Definition → Printer. You must stop the printer to
make any configuration changes.
Note: To see descriptions and the ranges of values you can enter in the fields, select the field on any of
the Printer Definition panels and press F1 on the keyboard or press and hold the left mouse button
for 2 seconds.
To change printer configuration settings:
1. Change any incorrect configuration settings on the panels.
2. When you have made all the changes, select OK.
3. Restart the printer, if instructions to do so are given.
4. Select Start on the Main touch panel to make the printer Ready.
Printer Definition Information
The following tables describe all printer configuration items, what each is used for, and the allowable value
options for each item. The factory set default value options are underlined or separately specified.
Important! The printer definition tables list all configuration items for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2,
HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 printers. Some items may be grayed out or not shown on particular
models.
v Configuration items marked (D) appear only for duplex systems.
v Configuration items marked (S) appear only for simplex systems.
v All unmarked items appear for both duplex and simplex systems.
v ‡ indicates items that are saved in Snapshots.
100
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 28. Settings for Printer Definition → Print Quality
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Print Quality
Printer 1 Contrast ‡
This entry is used to adjust the contrast (toner density) of
print on the forms.
1 to 7
Default is 4
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 1 Boldness ‡
This entry is used to change the vector boldness. The
boldness is expressed as a percentage of stroke width.
0 to 100
Default is 50
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 1 Preheat
Temperature ‡
This entry is used to adjust the preheat platen
1 to 100
temperature. The value entered is a relative number, not a
Default is 50
measure of degrees, with 1 being the coolest and 100
being the hottest.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 1 Fuser
Temperature ‡
This entry is used to adjust the hot roll temperature. The
value entered is a relative number, not a measure of
degrees, with 1 being the coolest and 100 being the
hottest.
1 to 100
Default is 50
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 1 Oil Rate ‡
This entry is used to adjust the amount of oil fed to the oil 1 to 100
belt or oil roller. The value entered is a relative number,
Default is 50
not a measure of quantity, with 1 being the lowest rate
and 100 being the highest rate.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 1 Oil Belt ‡
This entry is used to adjust the speed at which the oil belt 2 to 100
moves. The value entered is a relative number, not a
Default is 50
measure of speed, with 1 being the slowest speed and
100 being the fastest speed.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Recommended
Settings
Shows the recommended settings for preheat
temperature, fuser temperature, oil rate, and oil belt
temperature for various toner types and paper weights.
Selecting the paper weight range from the drop-down list
adjusts the corresponding sliders to show recommended
settings for the selected paper weight.
v < 75 gsm (< 20 pounds)
v 75 - 95 gsm (20 - 26 pounds)
v > 98 gsm (> 26 pounds)
These settings are saved in the current Snapshot when
you save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 2 Contrast (D) See entry for Printer 1.
‡
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
101
Table 28. Settings for Printer Definition → Print Quality (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer 2 Boldness
(D) ‡
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 2 Preheat
Temperature (D) ‡
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 2 Fuser
Temperature (D) ‡
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 2 Oil Rate (D) See entry for Printer 1.
‡
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 2 Oil Belt (D)
‡
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer Definition → Print Quality → Advanced
Printer 1 Use Backup This entry indicates whether the backup idler roll (BIR) is
Idler Roll ‡
to be used to improve fusing and reduce bloom.
Note: The service representative must enable this
configuration item using Printer Definition → Printer →
Service where you must state whether the backup idler
roll is physically installed.
v Default
v Yes
v No
Default allows the BIR to be switched on or off
automatically depending on whether the printer is in
duplex or simplex mode.
Yes overrides normal operation and always uses the
backup idler roll.
No overrides normal operation and never uses the backup
idler roll.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 1 Preheat
Offset ‡
(Service Change Only) This entry is used to specify
-100 to 20
temperature delta between the lower preheat platen (base
temperature) and the upper preheat platen (variable
temperature). To operate with the default settings instead
of the variable temperature offsets, select Use Default
Settings.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
102
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 28. Settings for Printer Definition → Print Quality (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer 2 Use Backup See description for Printer 1.
Idler Roll (D) ‡
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer 2 Preheat
Offset ‡
(Service Change Only) See description for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
This setting is saved in the current
Snapshot when you save the
current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer Definition → Print Quality → Beam Adjustments
Printer 1 Beam 1
Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only) Beam adjustment is used by
Beam 1 cannot be changed.
maintenance personnel to control the vertical alignment or
horizontal adjustment of the separate beams of a
multi-beam printer. See “AOM Skew” in the Multi-Beam
Printhead section of “Removal and Adjustments” within
the Maintenance Information.
Printer 1 Beam 2
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment)
0.0 to 15.9
Default is 8.0 units
Unit = .1 pel.
Printer 1 Beam 3
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment)
(See information in Beam 2 offset
adjustment)
Printer 1 Beam 4
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment)
(See information in Beam 2 offset
adjustment)
Printer 1 Beam 5
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment)
(See information in Beam 2 offset
adjustment)
Printer 2 Beam 1
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Printer 1 Beam 1 offset adjustment)
Beam 1 cannot be changed.
Printer 2 Beam 2
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Printer 1 Beam 1 offset adjustment)
(See information in Printer 1
Beam 2 offset adjustment)
Printer 2 Beam 3
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Printer 1 Beam 1 offset adjustment)
(See information in Printer 1
Beam 2 offset adjustment)
Printer 2 Beam 4
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Printer 1 Beam 1 offset adjustment)
(See information in Printer 1
Beam 2 offset adjustment)
Printer 2 Beam 5
Offset Adjustment
(See information in Printer 1 Beam 1 offset adjustment)
(See information in Printer 1
Beam 2 offset adjustment)
Printer Definition → Print Quality → PQE Adjustments
Printer 1 Beam
Number
(Service Change Only) This entry allows you to select a
beam on which to make print quality enhancements.
Selecting All changes the settings for each beam,
overriding any changes you have made for specific
beams.
v All
Printer 1 Current
Vector
(Service Change Only)
0 to 7
Printer 1 Vector
Boldness
(Service Change Only)
0 to 100
Printer 1 Horizontal
High
(Service Change Only)
0 to 63
v 1 to 5
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
103
Table 28. Settings for Printer Definition → Print Quality (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer 1 Horizontal
Low
(Service Change Only)
0 to 63
Printer 1 Vertical
High
(Service Change Only)
0 to 63
Printer 1 Vertical Low (Service Change Only)
0 to 63
Printer 2 Beam
Number
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Current
Vector
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Vector
Boldness
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Horizontal
High
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Horizontal
Low
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Vertical
High
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Vertical Low See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
104
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 29. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Basic
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Printer → Basic
Printer Mode
This entry allows setting whether the duplex system is to
be operated in duplex or simplex (dual-simplex) mode.
v Duplex
v Simplex
When you change this value, you must restart the printer
for the change to take effect. If you are in dual-simplex
mode, both printers need to be restarted.
Printer Speed ‡
|
|
Use Printer Speed to control the printer speed. Use High v High
for normal operations. Use Low for situations involving
v Low
heavy weight or other hard to fuse papers.
Note: Print speed does not apply to InfoPrint 4100
Models MS1 or MD1/2.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Side 2 Verify (D)
Front Sheet
Sequence (D) ‡
This feature automatically checks to make sure that the
duplex printing system is properly aligned and that the
printing on both sides of the form is synchronized.
Note: This field is displayed only if the Side 2 Verify
Disable feature (RPQ 8B4282) is installed.
v Enable
This entry sets whether the front side of the form will be
printed on Printer 1 or Printer 2 in duplex mode.
v Front First
v Disable
v Front Second
Front First means that the odd pages (1st, 3rd, 5th,...) of
a customer job will print on Printer 1, and the even pages
(2nd, 4th, 6th, ...) pages will print on Printer 2. Front
Second means just the opposite of Front First.
If a postprocessing device that bursts and stacks the
output is being used, the Front Second setting will deliver
output with the odd number pages facing to the front. This
the preferred setting when you want the pages to stack in
order.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
||
|
||
|
|
|
Same Side Printing‡
Printer 2 will print on the same side of the paper as
Printer 1 (the paper is not being flipped over between
machines).
v No
v Yes for duplex data
v Yes for color
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
105
Table 29. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Basic (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Eject to Front Facing Box paper unfolds accordion style, alternating pages
‡
between front facing and back facing. This entry allows
accepting or rejecting the Eject to Front Facing (EFF)
signals sent by the host. When set to Disabled, EFF
signals are suppressed. When set to Enabled, the EFF
signal from the host will cause a blank page to be
inserted between print jobs if the prior job contained an
odd number of pages. When set, Forms -> Front Facing
can be used to adjust whether the form is front facing or
rear facing.
Value Options
v Enabled
v Disabled
When you change this value, you must restart the printer
for the change to take effect.
This option should be set to Disabled if a postprocessing
device that bursts and stacks output pages is installed.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Auto NPRO at EOF
‡
This entry indicates whether an automatic nonprocess
runout (NPRO) is performed when an End of Forms is
detected. During an NPRO, the forms move through the
printer with no new pages being printed.
v Yes
v No
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Language
This entry changes the language used for all text within
the console panels and windows, and (except for Russian,
Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese) on the
printer operator panel display as well. When you select
Russian, Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional
Chinese, the printer operator panel displays U.S. English
text.
Note: This affects only operator and administrator access
levels. Service-level access always displays the console
in English.
v English
v Spanish
v German
v Japanese Kanji
v French
v Italian
v Brazilian Portuguese
v Simplified Chinese
v Traditional Chinese
v Korean
v Russian
v Hungarian
Keyboard Language
(CE Only) Indicates which keyboard is used. This entry
changes the language used for all text within the console
panels and windows.
v English
v Spanish
v German
v Japanese Kanji
v French
v Italian
v Brazilian Portuguese
v Simplified Chinese
v Traditional Chinese
v Korean
v Russian
v Hungarian
106
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 30. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Date/Time
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Printer → Date/Time
Date and Time
This entry specifies the date and time.
yyyy=year
mm=month
The time is a 24-hour clock.
dd=day
hh=hour
To adjust, highlight the field to change and press arrow up mm=minute
or arrow down.
ss=second
Time Zone
Select a time zone from the list.
Time Source
Select a time source to define how the time settings are
input to the printer.
v Manual
Manual uses the time input specified in the Date and
Time field above.
v Any Network Server
v Specific Network Server
Specific Network Server uses the time input from the
network time server specified in this field. When this
option is selected, entry fields for specifying the name and
type of the network time server are displayed. In the Time
Server Name field in the resulting Network window,
specify the network name or IP address of the specified
network time server that the printer will request the date
and time from. In the Time Server Type field, select the
time protocol (Time or SNTP) of the specified network
time server that the printer will request the date and time
from.
Any Network Server uses the time input from any
available network time server that the printer can find.
Note: When DHCP Plug-and-Play is set to On, the
additional fields that appear for the Specific Network
Server are not available.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
107
Table 31. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Service
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Printer → Service
Printer 1 Machine
Serial
(CE Change on Initial Configuration Only) This is the code 9 characters
for plant of manufacture of Printer 1 (2 numeric only
characters) and sequence number for Printer 1 (7
alphanumeric characters).
Printer 1 Print Count
(Service Change Only) The Print Usage Count from the
mechanical counter at the rear of the printer may be
transferred to this counter, which will then become a new
base count in the running “Printer Count” displayed in the
main touch panel.
0 to 2 000 000 000
Printer 1 Backup
Idler Roll Installed
(Service Change Only) This entry indicates whether a
Backup Idler Roll (BIR) is installed.
v Yes
Toner Type
(Service Change Only) Identifies the toner cartridge
installed on the printer.
Printer 1 Scan
Factory Adjustment
600 Pels
(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnel
to adjust the scan direction printing registration. See
“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal and
Adjustments” within the Maintenance Information.
0 to 100 units
(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnel
to adjust the scan direction printing registration. See
“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal and
Adjustments” within the Maintenance Information.
0 to 100 units
(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnel
to adjust the process direction printing registration. See
“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal and
Adjustments” within the Maintenance Information.
0 to 60 units
(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnel
to adjust the process direction printing registration. See
“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal and
Adjustments” within the Maintenance Information.
0 to 60 units
Printer 1 BIR Dwell
Time
(Service Change Only) This is the number of seconds the
BIR will engage each time the printer starts printing if the
Use Backup Idler Roll setting is to Default.
Note: This option only displays when the Backup Idler
Roll Engagement feature is installed.
Default is 30 seconds
Printer 2 Machine
Serial (D)
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Print Count
(D)
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 BIR
Installed (D)
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Toner Type
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Scan
Factory Adjustment
600 Pel (D)
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Scan
Factory Adjustment
480 Pel (D)
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 1 Scan
Factory Adjustment
480 Pels
Printer 1 Process
Factory Adjustment
600 Pels
Printer 1 Process
Factory Adjustment
480 Pels
108
Planning and Configuration Guide
v No
Default is 40 units
Unit = 2 pels.
Default is 40 units
Unit = 2 pels.
Default is 14 units
Unit = 2 pels.
Default is 14 units
Unit = 2 pels.
Table 31. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Service (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer 2 Process
Factory Adjustment
600 Pel (D)
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Process
Factory Adjustment
480 Pel (D)
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 BIR Dwell
Time
See entry for Printer 1.
See entry for Printer 1.
Printer 2 Side 2
Verify Factory Adjust
(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnel 20 to 220 pels
to adjust the Side 2 Verify timing (in pels) in the process
Default is 120 pels
direction. Use this adjustment after the print position has
been set correctly using Scan Factory Adjustment and
Process Factory Adjustment, if the Side 2 Verify sensor
position cannot or should not be moved. The sensor
should not be moved after it has been adjusted for
tractorless mode registration.
Printer 2 Side 1
Verify Factory Adjust
(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnel 20 to 220 pels
to adjust the Side 1 Verify timing (in pels) in the process
Default is 120 pels
direction. Use this adjustment after the print position has
been set correctly using Scan Factory Adjustment and
Process Factory Adjustment, if the Side 1 Verify sensor
position cannot or should not be moved. The sensor
should not be moved after it has been adjusted for
tractorless mode registration.
Note: This field is available when Dual Sensor Installed
is set to Yes (Printer Definition → Printer → Setup →
Advanced).
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
109
Table 32. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Resource Utilization
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Printer → Resource Utilization (Service)
IPDS Font Usage
This entry allows you to select the amount of memory that v High
the printer control unit (computer) will use for font
v Medium
management. Select the font usage according to the type
v Low
of print jobs you run.
Select Low font usage for jobs using a normal number of
fonts with normal point sizes, but not double-byte fonts.
Medium font usage indicates an abnormal SBCS
(single-byte character set) printing mode; select it for jobs
using a large number of fonts or very large point sizes,
but not double-byte fonts. High font usage is primarily for
double-byte font jobs.
IPDS Page Segment
Usage
IPDS Overlay Usage
This entry is used to allocate space for IPDS source for
page segments and overlays. Set to Low if the size or
number of page segments and overlays is a small. Set to
High if the size or number of page segments and
overlays is large.
v Unlimited (Disk)
This parameter is used to set overlay caching. Set to
None if overlays are not reused multiple times or if
overlays are not reused in the same location on
subsequent pages.
v High
v High (RAM)
v Medium (RAM)
v
v Medium
v Low
v None
||
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
IPDS Input Buffer
Size
This parameter is used to allocate space for the IPDS
v Low
data that was just received from the server before being
v Medium (RAM)
processed by the control unit. Set to Low if pages contain
v High
little data or if printing from PSF for z/OS on a S/370
channel or a FICON or ESCON channel (this is because
of the frequent IPDS acknowledgment rate). Set to High if
printing pages with large amounts of data (such as large
images).
IPDS Output Buffer
Size
This parameter is used to allocate space for ready-to-print v Low
pages, including pages between the transfer points of a
v Medium (RAM)
continuous-forms, duplex printer. Set the value to Low if
v High
these conditions are met:
v The pages contain little data
v This is a simplex printer
v This is a duplex printer with a distance between
transfer points of less than 400 inches.
|
|
|
|
|
Set the value to High if these conditions are met:
v The pages contain large amounts of data, especially
shaded areas
v This is a duplex printer with a distance between
transfer points of over 400 inches.
110
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 33. Settings for Printer Definition → PDL
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
Cut Sheet Emulation
‡
Select this option to print on continuous forms as though
you were printing on cut-sheet forms. Sheets are divided
in half using an imaginary line that is parallel to the edge
of the form. Each resulting ″half sheet″ is treated as if it
were a whole sheet running through a cut-sheet printer.
None implies the cut-sheet emulation is not enabled.
v None
v Normal Left-to-Right
v Normal Right-to-Left
v Inverted Left-to-Right
v Inverted Right-to-Left
Normal Left-to-Right allows the print data to be placed
on the left half-sheet first and then the right half-sheet.
The left half-sheet is closest to the operator. The physical
orientation of the data is based on the lower-left corner of
the paper as viewed from the operator’s viewpoint.
Normal Right-to-Left allows the print data to be placed
on the right half-sheet first and then the left half-sheet.
The right half-sheet is furthest from the operator. The
physical orientation of the data is based on the lower-left
corner of the paper as viewed from the operator’s
viewpoint.
Inverted Left-to-Right allows the print data to be placed
on the left half-sheet first and then the right half-sheet.
The left half-sheet is furthest from the operator. The
physical orientation of the data is based on the upper-right
corner of the paper as viewed from the operator’s
viewpoint. This mode is the ″upside down″ version of the
Normal Left-to-Right mode.
Inverted Right-to-Left allows the print data to be placed
on the right half-sheet first and then the left half-sheet.
The right half-sheet is closest to the operator. The
physical orientation of the data is based on the upper-right
corner of the paper as viewed from the operator’s
viewpoint. This mode is the ″upside down″ version of the
Normal Right-to-Left mode.
This value is used only when no other value is set during
the Define Forms procedure for a specific form.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
IPDS Printhead
Resolution ‡
This parameter changes the resolution that the printhead
in this printer uses.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
v 480
v 600
The values available to you
depend on the model of printer.
To have a selectable IPDS
resolution, select 600.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
111
Table 33. Settings for Printer Definition → PDL (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
IPDS Resolution ‡
Select an IPDS resolution value for jobs to be received
from the print server. This parameter can only be set
when the IPDS Printhead Resolution is set to 600 dpi
because an IPDS Printhead Resolution of 480
automatically limits IPDS Resolution to 240. When you
select a specific resolution (600, 300, or 240), the printer
will only accept jobs in that resolution. If you select
Automatic, the printer will accept jobs in any resolution.
Note: Not all values are supported on all printers.
v Automatic
v 240
v 300
v 600
The values available to you
depend on the model of printer
and the printhead resolution
selected.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Reprint Pages After
Jams‡
This entry controls the conditions the host system uses to
retransmit pages after a forms jam, halt, or emergency
stop has been cleared.
v Yes - All lost pages are automatically retransmitted and
reprinted.
v Yes
v No recovery for MICR pages
v No
v No recovery for MICR pages - Lost pages printed with
a MICR printer will not be retransmitted.
v No - No lost pages will be retransmitted. Any missing
or damaged pages must be manually recovered.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Logical Page
Increment
This entry allows expansion of the logical page size, for
cases where the printed page is larger than the valid
printable area, without errors being set.
0 to 20 pels
The value entered will increase the valid printable area by
that number of pels in all directions. Please review your
applications to ensure that this setting does not cause
loss of data, such as printing on the tractor hole carrier
strip that will be trimmed off.
3130 Bar Code
Emulation
This entry controls whether the printer operates in 3130
Bar Code Compatibility mode.
v Yes
Fixed Orientation
This entry sets the default orientation to the upper left
corner. Use this setting when printing legacy 3800 style
page mode applications.
v Yes
Simulate Color with
Gray
This entry allows the printer to print color print jobs using
gray tones.
v Yes
Single-byte Font
Smoothing
This entry is used for edge smoothing of raster single-byte v Yes
fonts
v No
Double-byte Font
Smoothing
This entry is used for edge smoothing of double-byte
raster fonts.
v Yes
Suppress Off Page
Errors
This entry sets the distance (in pels) to suppress off page
errors. This will allow the job to print off the physical page
without errors and data can be lost. This is useful when
you want to print jobs that are poorly defined and
changing the print job is not an option.
0 to 100 pels
112
Planning and Configuration Guide
v No
v No
v No
v No
Table 33. Settings for Printer Definition → PDL (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Scale GOCA Lines
Select Yes to scale GOCA line widths according to the
scale-to-fit ratio when the GOCA mapping is set to
scale-to-fit. Select No when you do not want to scale
GOCA line widths.
v Yes
v No
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
113
Table 34. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → Edit...
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
|
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → FICON
|
|
|
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or uninstalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printer
controller, the adapter is automatically logically installed.
||
|
||
|
|
|
|
Adapter Cards
|
|
Device Address
||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
||
v FICON Link A
This entry specifies the 2-digit hexadecimal channel
address which includes the device address.
X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal
notation)
Notes:
Default is X'00'.
v FICON Link B
1. In simplex mode, only one device address is required.
In dual simplex mode, each printer requires a unique
device address. Printer 1 requires an even number
(for example, X'30'); Printer 2 requires the next
consecutive number (for example, X'31').
2. The duplex system does not require a unique number.
It can use either of the addresses used for dual
simplex Printer 1 or dual simplex Printer 2. However, it
is often easier from an operational viewpoint to assign
duplex a separate address (so the duplex and simplex
printers look like unique devices to the operating
system). The general convention in this case is to
assign the duplex system the next consecutive
address (even) after the address for simplex Printer 2.
For example, if you define Printer 1 in dual simplex as
X'30', you should then define Printer 2 in dual simplex
as X'31', and, optionally, define the complete system
in duplex as X'32'.
3. The device addresses specified above must match the
device addresses defined to the host PSF software,
and in the case of S/390 hosts, the I/O device
definitions.
Multi-Host
Environment Flag
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
This entry specifies whether FICON Link A or B is
installed. If more than one FICON adapter card is
installed, you can select one or both adapters. The
adapter card can be installed to multiple LPDs.
Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled.
If the adapter card is physically present on the printer
controller, the adapter is automatically installed.
This entry indicates whether a multiple host
printer-sharing system exists. (Multi-Host Environment
support increases configuration flexibility and simplifies
operational procedures for FICON-attached printers.)
v True
v False
Notes regarding FICON attachment:
v Do not enable this flag unless all hosts sharing the
printer have PSF ASSIGN/UNASSIGN support.
If these conditions are not satisfied, and Multi-Host
Environment is enabled on the printer, PSF may not be
able to access the printer.
Maximum Block
Length
114
The maximum size of data blocks sent to the printing
system.
Planning and Configuration Guide
v 32K
v 64K
|
Table 34. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → Edit... (continued)
|
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
||
|
||
|
|
Media Speed
(FICON Link A)
This entry specifies the maximum speed. If only one
adapter is installed, this field is called Media Speed and
this is active. If two adapters are installed, this field is
called Media Speed FICON Link A and it is not active
unless Use Adapter A is selected.
v Autonegotiate
||
|
||
|
|
Media Speed FICON This entry specifies the maximum speed. If only one
Link B
adapter is installed, this field does not appear. If two
adapters are installed, this field is called Media Speed
FICON Link B and it is not active unless Use Adapter B
is selected.
v Autonegotiate
|
|
|
Priority
1 to 10
This entry specifies the priority of print jobs from each
printing interface. One is the highest priority. The highest
priority protocol are processed first.
v 1 Gigabit
v 2 Gigabits
v 1 Gigabit
v 2 Gigabits
Default is 5
|
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → ESCON
|
|
|
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or uninstalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printer
controller, the adapter is automatically logically installed.
||
|
||
Adapter Cards
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Device Address
This entry specifies whether ESCON Link A or B is
installed. If more than one ESCON adapter card is
installed, you can select one or both adapters. The
adapter card can be installed to multiple LPDs.
Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled.
If the adapter card is physically present on the printer
controller, the adapter is automatically installed.
v ESCON Link A
This entry specifies the 2-digit hexadecimal channel
address which includes the device address.
X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal
notation)
Notes:
Default is X'00'
v ESCON Link B
1. In simplex mode, only one device address is required.
In dual simplex mode, each printer requires a unique
device address. Printer 1 requires an even number
(for example, X'30'); Printer 2 requires the next
consecutive number (for example, X'31').
2. The duplex system does not require a unique number.
It can use either of the addresses used for dual
simplex Printer 1 or dual simplex Printer 2. However, it
is often easier from an operational viewpoint to assign
duplex a separate address (so the duplex and simplex
printers look like unique devices to the operating
system). The general convention in this case is to
assign the duplex system the next consecutive
address (even) after the address for simplex Printer 2.
For example, if you define Printer 1 in dual simplex as
X'30', you should then define Printer 2 in dual simplex
as X'31', and, optionally, define the complete system
in duplex as X'32'.
3. The device addresses specified above must match the
device addresses defined to the host PSF software,
and in the case of S/390 hosts, the I/O device
definitions.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
115
|
Table 34. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → Edit... (continued)
|
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
||
|
||
Multi-Host
Environment Flag
This entry indicates whether a multiple host
printer-sharing system exists. (Multi-Host Environment
support increases configuration flexibility and simplifies
operational procedures for ESCON-attached printers.)
v True
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v False
Notes regarding ESCON attachment:
v Do not enable this flag unless all hosts sharing the
printer have PSF ASSIGN/UNASSIGN support.
If these conditions are not satisfied, and Multi-Host
Environment is enabled on the printer, PSF may not be
able to access the printer.
||
|
|
Maximum Block
Length
The maximum size of data blocks sent to the printing
system.
v 32K
|
|
|
|
Priority
This entry specifies the priority of print jobs from each
printing interface. One is the highest priority. The highest
priority protocol are processed first.
1 to 10
116
Planning and Configuration Guide
v 64K
Default is 5
|
Table 35. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters
|
Definition Item
|
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #1
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Primary
This entry specifies whether the selected adapter is the
v Yes
primary LAN adapter when multiple adapters are installed.
v No
DHCP Addressing
This entry specifies whether the printer sends Dynamic
v On
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) requests to the
v Off
server to have an IP address assigned to the printer at
bootup. The default setting is On. As part of the DHCP
communication, the printer requests that the DHCP server
register the printer’s IP host name with the DNS server.
v Off - the printer does not send DHCP addressing
requests.
v On - the printer attempts to get IP addressing using the
DHCP protocol.
Notes:
1. The printer requests that the DHCP server register the
printer host name with a DNS server.
2. The printer attempts to obtain information from a
DHCP server up to the time limit specified in DHCP
Time Out.
DHCP Plug-and-Play This entry specifies if DHCP plug-and-play is enabled or
disabled.
v Enable
v Disable
Enabling plug-and-play causes the printer to request
several values from the DHCP server. The values the
printer requests include: the address of the DNS servers,
SMTP server, Time server, SNTP server, and Time Zone.
The printer uses the values received from the DHCP
server to update its configuration. If no value is provided
by the DHCP server, the respective value is null.
DHCP Time Out
IP Address
|
|
|
This entry specifies the number of seconds the printer
waits for responses from the DHCP server. A server will
normally respond in a few seconds. However, in network
configurations that include switches, a switch can block
network activity to or from a new station during its
Spanning Tree checkout for a minute or more. During this
time the printer’s DHCP broadcasts may be blocked by
the switch. Increasing the DHCP Timeout value allows
more time for the printer retries to occur.
1 to 300
This entry specifies the Internet protocol (IP) address of
the printer in dotted decimal format. Get this value from
your LAN administrator. This value must match the IP
address value in the host PSF configuration.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Default is 60
This value must be set for each configuration. For
example, set it for simplex mode, dual simplex mode, and
duplex mode.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
117
Table 35. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Subnet Mask
This entry specifies the mask that identifies the local
subnet in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your
LAN administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of
Local Host
If this field is left blank, the default host name will be
used. To change the host name, type a new host name
into this field.
IP Address of
Primary and
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format for the
primary DNS server. A DNS server translates network
names into dotted decimal addresses.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Plug-and-Play is Enabled.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Media Speed
The Media Speed setting includes both the speed and
duplex setting. The Media Speed setting of the printer
must match the media speed and duplex setting of the
link partner (usually an Ethernet switch). If you have
difficulty getting a connection to work, make sure that both
the speed and duplex settings of the printer and the link
partner are the same. For example, an Auto setting in the
printer may result in poor communication with a switch
port that is set to 100-Full. In this case, set both the
printer and the switch to Auto or 100-Full.
v Auto Negotiation
Default Gateway
Address
This entry specifies the IP address of the default gateway
in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your LAN
administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of
Local Host
Obtain the value for the Domain Name from your network
administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper NIC
|
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Primary
118
This entry specifies whether the selected adapter is the
v Yes
primary LAN adapter when multiple adapters are installed.
v No
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 35. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
DHCP Addressing
This entry specifies whether the printer sends Dynamic
v On
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) requests to the
v Off
server to have an IP address assigned to the printer at
bootup. The default setting is On. As part of the DHCP
communication, the printer requests that the DHCP server
register the printer’s IP host name with the DNS server.
v Off - the printer does not send DHCP addressing
requests.
v On - the printer attempts to get IP addressing using the
DHCP protocol.
Notes:
1. The printer requests that the DHCP server register the
printer host name with a DNS server.
2. The printer attempts to obtain information from a
DHCP server up to the time limit specified in DHCP
Time Out.
DHCP Plug-and-Play This entry specifies if DHCP plug-and-play is enabled or
disabled.
v Enable
v Disable
Enabling plug-and-play causes the printer to request
several values from the DHCP server. The values the
printer requests include: the address of the DNS servers,
SMTP server, Time server, SNTP server, and Time Zone.
The printer uses the values received from the DHCP
server to update its configuration. If no value is provided
by the DHCP server, the respective value is null.
DHCP Time Out
IP Address
This entry specifies the number of seconds the printer
waits for responses from the DHCP server. A server will
normally respond in a few seconds. However, in network
configurations that include switches, a switch can block
network activity to or from a new station during its
Spanning Tree checkout for a minute or more. During this
time the printer’s DHCP broadcasts may be blocked by
the switch. Increasing the DHCP Timeout value allows
more time for the printer retries to occur.
1 to 300
This entry specifies the Internet protocol (IP) address of
the printer in dotted decimal format. Get this value from
your LAN administrator. This value must match the IP
address value in the host PSF configuration.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Default is 60
This value is unique to a duplex system, and is the same
regardless of whether the printer is in duplex or
dual-simplex mode.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
Subnet Mask
This entry specifies the mask that identifies the local
subnet in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your
LAN administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
Internet Name of
Local Host
If this field is left blank, the default host name will be
used. To change the host name, type a new host name
into this field.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
119
Table 35. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
IP Address of
Primary and
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format for the
primary DNS server. A DNS server translates network
names into dotted decimal addresses.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Plug-and-Play is Enabled.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Media Speed
The Media Speed setting includes both the speed and
duplex setting. The Media Speed setting of the printer
must match the media speed and duplex setting of the
link partner (usually an Ethernet switch). If you have
difficulty getting a connection to work, make sure that both
the speed and duplex settings of the printer and the link
partner are the same. For example, an Auto setting in the
printer may result in poor communication with a switch
port that is set to 100-Full. In this case, set both the
printer and the switch to Auto or 100-Full.
v Auto Negotiation
Default Gateway
Address
This entry specifies the IP address of the default gateway
in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your LAN
administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of
Local Host
Obtain the value for the Domain Name from your network
administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Fiber NIC
|
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Primary
This entry specifies whether the selected adapter is the
v Yes
primary LAN adapter when multiple adapters are installed.
v No
DHCP Addressing
This entry specifies whether the printer sends Dynamic
v On
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) requests to the
v Off
server to have an IP address assigned to the printer at
bootup. The default setting is On. As part of the DHCP
communication, the printer requests that the DHCP server
register the printer’s IP host name with the DNS server.
v Off - the printer does not send DHCP addressing
requests.
v On - the printer attempts to get IP addressing using the
DHCP protocol.
Notes:
1. The printer requests that the DHCP server register the
printer host name with a DNS server.
2. The printer attempts to obtain information from a
DHCP server up to the time limit specified in DHCP
Time Out.
120
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 35. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
DHCP Plug-and-Play This entry specifies if DHCP plug-and-play is enabled or
disabled.
v Enable
v Disable
Enabling plug-and-play causes the printer to request
several values from the DHCP server. The values the
printer requests include: the address of the DNS servers,
SMTP server, Time server, SNTP server, and Time Zone.
The printer uses the values received from the DHCP
server to update its configuration. If no value is provided
by the DHCP server, the respective value is null.
DHCP Time Out
IP Address
This entry specifies the number of seconds the printer
waits for responses from the DHCP server. A server will
normally respond in a few seconds. However, in network
configurations that include switches, a switch can block
network activity to or from a new station during its
Spanning Tree checkout for a minute or more. During this
time the printer’s DHCP broadcasts may be blocked by
the switch. Increasing the DHCP Timeout value allows
more time for the printer retries to occur.
1 to 300
This entry specifies the Internet protocol (IP) address of
the printer in dotted decimal format. Get this value from
your LAN administrator. This value must match the IP
address value in the host PSF configuration.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Default is 60
This value is unique to a duplex system, and is the same
regardless of whether the printer is in duplex or
dual-simplex mode.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
This entry specifies the mask that identifies the local
subnet in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your
LAN administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
Internet Name of
Local Host
If this field is left blank, the default host name will be
used. To change the host name, type a new host name
into this field.
IP Address of
Primary and
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format for the
primary DNS server. A DNS server translates network
names into dotted decimal addresses.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Plug-and-Play is Enabled.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Media Speed
The Media Speed setting includes both the speed and
duplex setting. The Media Speed setting of the printer
must match the media speed and duplex setting of the
link partner (usually an Ethernet switch). If you have
difficulty getting a connection to work, make sure that both
the speed and duplex settings of the printer and the link
partner are the same. For example, an Auto setting in the
printer may result in poor communication with a switch
port that is set to 100-Full. In this case, set both the
printer and the switch to Auto or 100-Full.
v Auto Negotiation
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
121
Table 35. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters (continued)
|
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Default Gateway
Address
This entry specifies the IP address of the default gateway
in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your LAN
administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of
Local Host
Obtain the value for the Domain Name from your network
administrator.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Addressing is On.
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #2 (Service)
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Primary
This entry specifies whether the selected adapter is the
v Yes
primary LAN adapter when multiple adapters are installed.
v No
DHCP Addressing
This field is not supported on the service adapter. A fixed
IP address should be used.
DHCP Plug-and-Play This field is not supported on the service adapter. A fixed
IP address should be used.
DHCP Time Out
This field is not supported on the service adapter. A fixed
IP address should be used.
IP Address
For use by Service personnel only.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
This entry specifies the mask that identifies the local
subnet in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your
LAN administrator.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of
Local Host
This field is not supported on the service adapter.
IP Address of
Primary and
Secondary DNS
Server
This field is not supported on the service adapter.
Media Speed
The Media Speed setting includes both the speed an
duplex setting. The Media Speed setting of the printer
must match the media speed an duplex setting of the link
partner (usually an Ethernet switch). If you have difficulty
getting a connection to work, make sure that both the
speed and duplex settings of the printer and the link
partner are the same. For example, an Auto setting in the
printer may result in poor communication with a switch
port that is set to 100-Full. In this case, set both the
printer and the switch to Auto or 100-Full.
v Auto Negotiation
Default Gateway
Address
This entry specifies the IP address of the default gateway
in dotted decimal format. Get this value from your LAN
administrator.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of
Local Host
Obtain the value for the Domain Name from your network
administrator.
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
122
Planning and Configuration Guide
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Table 36. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → IPDS TCP/IP
|
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
TCP Port
This entry specifies the TCP socket address of the
attachment.
5001 to 65535
Notes:
1. In dual simplex mode, each printer requires a unique
port. If you use the default value of 5001 for simplex
Printer 1, the InfoPrint Solutions Company
recommends using 5002 as the value for simplex
Printer 2.
2. The duplex printing system must have a single unique
port number. It can use either of the TCP port
numbers specified for simplex Printer 1 or simplex
Printer 2. However, it is often easier from an
operational viewpoint to assign duplex a separate TCP
port number. If 5001 and 5002 are used for simplex
Printer 1 and simplex Printer 2, the InfoPrint Solutions
Company recommends that the duplex system be
assigned TCP port number 5003.
3. The TCP Port numbers specified in the printer
configuration must match the PORT numbers
assigned in the host PSF system.
Data Timeout
This entry specifies the number of seconds the printer
0 to 300 seconds
waits for data before it determines there is no more data
Default is 0 (infinite)
to receive for the job. The printer then ends the job and
checks other interfaces for new jobs. Valid values are 0 to
300. Zero specifies an infinite timeout period, where
printing is completely dependent on the host system to
end the connection. Zero is the default for TCP protocols.
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → FTP (Service)
|
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Data Timeout
This entry specifies the number of seconds the printer
0 to 300 seconds
waits for data before it determines there is no more data
Default is 15 seconds
to receive for the job. The printer then ends the job and
checks other interfaces for new jobs. Valid values are 0 to
300. Zero specifies an infinite timeout period, where
printing is completely dependent on the host system to
end the connection.
|
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → Push Print (Service)
|
Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:
Data Timeout
This entry specifies the number of seconds the printer
0 to 300 seconds
waits for data before it determines there is no more data
Default is 15 seconds
to receive for the job. The printer then ends the job and
checks other interfaces for new jobs. Valid values are 0 to
300. Zero specifies an infinite timeout period, where
printing is completely dependent on the host system to
end the connection.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
123
Table 37. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → SNMP
Note: Select Edit... to access the following items:
SNMP Agent
Enabled
Select Yes to allow (enable) any SNMP functions,
v Yes
including monitoring and Forward/Backward space control.
v No
Allow to Configure
Printer
Select Yes to allow SNMP to configure the printer.
SNMP Trap Host
Enter the IP address of a trap host in dotted decimal
format.
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
SNMP Community
Name
See Table 40 on page 129.
Alphanumeric characters
v Yes
v No
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → Online Access (Web Pages)
Note: Select Edit... to access the following items:
Online Access (Web
Pages) Enabled
Select Yes to allow (enable) InfoPrint 4100 Online Access v Yes
(Web Pages) to access the printer.
v No
Show Online Access
Log
Select Show Online Access Log to display the InfoPrint
4100 Online Access (Web Pages) activity log.
Clear Online Access
Log
Select Clear Online Access Log to clear the InfoPrint
4100 Online Access (Web Pages) activity log.
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → E-mail
Note: Select Edit... to access the following items:
||
|
||
|
|
E-mail Enabled
Select Yes to enable e-mail notification so that information v Yes
about certain printer conditions and internal traces may be
v No
sent to support personnel using e-mail. If this combo box
is grayed out, make sure an Ethernet adapter is installed
(Printer Definition -> Network -> Attachments).
Printer Supplies
E-mail Address
Specify the printer supplies e-mail address when sending
supplies information. Multiple e-mail addresses must be
separated by a space.
Printer Problems
E-mail Address
Specify the printer problems e-mail address when sending
problem information. Multiple e-mail addresses must be
separated by a space.
Printer Service
E-mail Address
Specify the printer service e-mail address when sending
service information. Multiple e-mail addresses must be
separated by a space.
Default Trace E-mail
Destination
Type in the e-mail address of the support person who will
receive trace data generated by the printer. This would
normally be an InfoPrint Solutions Company support
person. Trace information contains internal debug data
that is used to diagnose printer problems. Trace
information is sent as an attachment to the e-mail.
Multiple e-mail addresses are not allowed.
124
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 37. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access (continued)
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
SMTP Mail Server
Hostname or IP
Address
Specifies the IP host name or the IP address of the
Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) server. If a host
name is entered the printer will resolve the name to an IP
address using the DNS server specified by the DNS
entries. The printer sends e-mail it generates to this
server. Select Show SMTP Log to access the SMTP
server connection log, which may be useful for debugging
e-mail notification problems.
Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCP
Plug-and-play is enabled. When DHCP Plug-and-Play is
enabled, the printer requests the address of the SMTP
mail server from the DHCP server.
SMTP Timeout
Specifies the timeout value when the printer sends e-mail 0 to 999
to the SMTP server. If a timeout occurs, the current e-mail
message is cancelled.
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → PRSCD
|
Note: Select Edit... to access the following items:
||
|
||
PRSCD E-mail
Address
Specify the e–mail address where the Printer Reported
Service and Configuration Data will be sent when the
Send PRSCD E-mail button is selected.
v No
v Yes
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
125
Table 38. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Restricted Access
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Network → Restricted Access
Print Jobs
Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to print jobs. v Unrestricted
If restricted, jobs originating from IP addresses outside the
v Restricted
restricted ranges are not accepted. If unrestricted, this
function can be accessed from any originating IP address.
Online Access (Web
Pages)
Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to accesses v Unrestricted
by Online Access (Web Pages). If restricted, Online
v Restricted
Access accesses originating from IP addresses outside
the restricted ranges are ignored.
SNMP
Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to SNMP
v Unrestricted
client accesses. If restricted, SNMP client accesses
v Restricted
originating from IP addresses outside the restricted ranges
are ignored. If unrestricted, this function can be accessed
from any originating IP address.
Productivity Tracking
Feature
Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to the
v Unrestricted
Productivity Tracking Feature client accesses. If restricted,
v Restricted
the Productivity Tracking Feature client accesses
originating from IP addresses outside the restricted ranges
are ignored. If unrestricted, this function can be accessed
from any originating IP address.
Note: Select Edit Ranges... to access the following items:
v Inactive
v Active
These entries allow you to make the specified IP address
ranges active. Multiple IP address ranges can be
combined to control access to the restricted functions.
Select Active for each IP address range to include the
range in the set of addresses that are allowed to access
the restricted functions.
Examples:
v If you restrict SNMP to IP address ranges 10.1.1.1
through 10.1.1.5, only SNMP client accesses that
originate from an address in that address range will be
allowed.
v If you restrict Print Jobs to only one IP address
(specify the range as 10.1.1.1 through 10.1.1.1), only
print jobs that originate from that IP address will be
accepted.
126
Planning and Configuration Guide
v Inactive
v Active
Table 39. Settings for Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing
Definition Item
Description
Value Options
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → Pre/Postprocessing
Note: Select New... to access the following items:
New Device Name
Type in up the name of the pre/postprocessing device you Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
have defined.
New Device Type
Select the device type.
v Coupled Preprocessor
v Coupled Postprocessor
v Advanced Postprocessor MICR
v Advanced Postprocessor - Bar
Code Checking
v UP3I Sequence
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → Postprocessing Options
Use Internal Stacker
‡
This entry indicates whether an internal stacker is enabled v Yes
(InfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4 only). A
v No
setting of Yes enables the internal stacker if there are no
other enabled postprocessing devices (either UP3I or
non-UP3I). For InfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and
HD3/4, the following apply:
1. An internal stacker must be installed (Feature Code
4770).
2. The printer mode must be set to Simplex (Printer
Definition → Printer → Basic → Printer Mode).
3. The printer speed must be set to Low (Printer
Definition → Printer → Basic → Printer Speed).
(Models HS2 and HD3/4 only)
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Offsetter Enabled ‡
This entry indicates whether an installed offsetter
postprocessing device is to be used. The host system will
send “Alternate Offset Stacker” commands if the offsetter
is enabled and the print job contains these commands
v Yes
v No
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
BTS Enabled ‡
This entry indicates whether an installed Burster/Trimmer
Stacker (BTS) postprocessing device is being used. The
host system will not send eject-to-front-facing commands
if the BTS is enabled.
v Yes
v No
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Offset on Mark
Forms ‡
If Yes is selected, offset commands are sent to an
enabled postprocessor only for pages that contain Mark
Forms. Any “Alternate Offset Stacker” commands that are
sent from the host are ignored.
v Yes
v No
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → UP3I Devices
Note: Select Edit UP3I Devices... to access the following items:
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
127
Table 39. Settings for Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing (continued)
Definition Item
Description
UP3I Device Name
Use this entry to change the UP3I device that you want to
view or edit. The name you enter will override the name
communicated over the UP3I network with one that is
more appropriate for your installation.
Distance
Specifies the approximate distance (in inches) between
this postprocessor and the printer in inches.
128
Planning and Configuration Guide
Value Options
Table 40. SNMP Community Names
Community Name Value
Description
Value Options
public
This is a standard community.
v Read
v Write
ibmpsc_admin
ibmpsc_job
Access
This is the default community name
used by InfoPrint network print
management tools.
v Read
This is the default community name
used by InfoPrint network print job
monitoring tools.
v Read
This entry is set for each SNMP
community name.
v Read
v Write
v Write
v Write
v None
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
129
Defining Adapters
This procedure lets you view or edit the adapter settings of an installed adapter.
The following adapters are available:
v Ethernet Copper Integrated #1
v Ethernet Copper Integrated #2 (Service)
v Ethernet Fiber NIC
v Ethernet Copper NIC
v FICON Link A | Link B
v ESCON Link A | Link B
Before you install an adapter or change a definition value for an adapter, please review the configuration
settings for the type of adapter you are changing (see the table of printer definition items beginning on
117).
Before you print the adapter configuration, ensure that all IPDS protocols are disabled. See “Enabling and
Disabling Protocols” in the Operator’s Guide for more information. You do not need to disable IPDS
protocols if you are viewing or changing the configuration.
|
|
|
Defining Adapters
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Fiber or Copper Integrated #1 | Ethernet
Fiber or Copper Integrated #2 | Ethernet Fiber NIC, slot n | Ethernet Copper NIC, slot n |
FICON Link A, slot n| FICON Link B, slot n| ESCON Link A, slot n | ESCON Link B, slot n
Note
Selecting Restart may be required in these cases:
v Certain configuration items require a Restart for a change in the parameter to take effect. If a
Restart is required, a console message will notify you.
v All FICON, ESCON, and Resource Utilization configurations require restarting both printers in
dual-simplex mode.
Configuring Adapters
| To view adapter settings, select Printer Definition → Network → Attachments.
To change adapter settings:
1. Disable the associated protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → Manage
Protocols).
| 2. Select the adapter you want to configure on the Network - Adapters panel (Printer Definition →
|
Network → Attachments) and select Edit....
3. Enter your configuration settings.
4. When you have made all the changes, select OK.
5. Follow any instructions given after selecting OK.
6. Enable the associated protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → Manage
Protocols)
7. Select Start on the Main touch panel to make the printer Ready.
130
Planning and Configuration Guide
Defining Protocols
This procedure lets you view or edit the protocol settings for an installed adapter.
|
|
|
|
|
The following protocols are available:
v FICON for channel adapters
v ESCON for channel adapters
v IPDS TCP/IP for Ethernet adapters
v FTP (Service) for Ethernet adapters
v Push Print (Service) for Ethernet adapters
Before you install a protocol or change a definition value for an protocol, please review the configuration
settings for the type of protocol you are changing (see the table of printer definition items beginning on
123).
Before you print the protocol configuration, ensure that all IPDS protocols are disabled. See “Enabling and
Disabling Protocols” in the Operator’s Guide for more information. You do not need to disable IPDS
protocols if you are viewing or changing the configuration.
|
|
Defining Protocols
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → IPDS TCP/IP | FTP | PUSH
PRINT
Configuring Protocols
You must stop the printer before making configuration changes. To view protocol settings, select Printer
Definition → Network → Attachments.
To change protocol settings:
1. Disable the protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → Manage Protocols).
|
|
2. Select the protocol you want to configure on the Network - Attachments panel (Printer Definition →
Network → Attachments).
|
|
|
Note: The appropriate adapter for the protocol you want to configure must be installed and enabled.
Use the Network - Attachments panel (Printer Definition → Network → Attachments) to
configure the appropriate adapter.
3. Enter your configuration settings.
4. When you have made all the changes, select OK.
5. Follow any instructions given after selecting OK.
6. Enable the protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → Manage Protocols).
7. Select Start on the Main touch panel to make the printer Ready.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
131
Defining Remote Access
This procedure lets you enable and define remote access to the printer for both SNMP and e-mail.
|
Defining Remote Access
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → SNMP | Online Access| E-mail | PRSCD
Configuring Remote Access for SNMP
The printer can be accessed remotely by SNMP. To view remote access settings, select Printer Definition
→ Network → Remote Access and select SNMP from the list.
To change remote access settings for SNMP:
1. Select SNMP Agent Enabled.
2. Enter Yes to enable SNMP or No to disable it.
3. When you have made all the changes, select OK.
4. Follow any instructions given after selecting OK.
The following industry standard SNMP MIBs are supported by the printer:
v Printer MIB v2 (RFC 3805, follow-on to RFC 1759)
v Host Resources (RFC 1514)
v MIB-2 (RFC 1213)
The ANSI files for these MIBs may be downloaded from many internet sites. They are also available on
the InfoPrint 4100 User Information CD.
Configuring Remote Access for Online Access (Web Pages)
The printer can be accessed remotely using the InfoPrint 4100 Online Access (Web Pages). To view
remote access settings, select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select Online Access
(Web Pages) from the list.
To change remote access settings for Online Access:
1. Select Online Access (Web Pages) Enabled.
2. Enter Yes to enable Online Access or No to disable it.
Note: The Online Access field is displayed only if the user has Online Access Authority, which is
defined on the Logon - Manage Users window on the printer console.
3. When you have made all the changes, select OK.
4. Follow any instructions given after selecting OK.
Optionally, you may choose to view the Online Access (Web Pages) activity log by selecting Show Online
Access Log or to clear it by selecting Clear Online Access Log
Configuring Remote Access for E-mail
| Several functions within the printer may send information to an e-mail address. These include E-mail
| notification, Traces, PRSCD data. The printer must be configured for outgoing e-mail in order for these
| functions to use the e-mail interface.
To configure the printer for outgoing e-mail, enter the name or IP address of the SMTP (Simple Main
Transport Protocol) server for your network. This may be provided by your network administrator. If you
enter this as a name (the typical case), then you must also enter the IP addresses of the DNS (Domain
132
Planning and Configuration Guide
Name Server) for your network. The DNS values are entered on the Edit window for the primary adapter
on the Network - Adapters panel (Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → Edit).
Notes:
1. An Ethernet adapter must be configured and logically installed before you can use e-mail notification.
|
2. After configuring the printer for outgoing e-mail notification, you can select to save traces when a
problem occurs and then you can e-mail the trace data to the selected mail destination.
3. After configuring the printer for e-mail, you may send the PRSCD log by e-mail.
To configure the printer so that you can e-mail trace data to a specified mail destination, you must specify
e-mail settings as follows:
1. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access.
2. Select E-mail from the list.
3. Select Yes for E-mail Enabled.
4. Check with your LAN administrator for the correct settings and enter those settings for each of the
following fields:
v SMTP Mail Server Hostname or IP Address
v IP Address of Name Server
5. The default mail destination is [email protected], which is the InfoPrint Solutions Company Printer
Service Machine that saves e-mail traces. You can change the default by entering a different name in
Default Trace E-mail Destination. All names that you enter here can be selected from a drop-down
list when you select to e-mail the trace data.
6. When you have made all the changes, select OK.
|
Configuring Remote Access for PRSCD (Printer Reported Service and
Configuration Data)
|
|
|
The printer collects internal configuration data, called PRSCD (Printer Reported Service and Configuration
Data) log. This configuration data is useful for servicing the printer. The log may be viewed at the console
or sent to a user by e-mail.
|
|
You may send the PRSCD log to a user of your choice. Type the e-mail address where you want to send
the log and select Send PRSCD E-mail.
|
|
Note: The Remote-Access for E-mail function must be configured for the PRSCD e-mail operation to
work. Refer to the “Configuring Remote Access for E-mail” on page 132 for more information.
|
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
133
Troubleshooting LAN Connectivity and LAN Communication Problems
If you are having problems getting the printer to communicate over Ethernet, use the Network - Remote
Access Status panel to check the status of the Ethernet adapters that are in the installed state. Select
Printer Definition → Network → Status → LAN Status... to display the Network - Remote Access Status
panel for LAN attachments.
v If the Actual Speed/Duplex value does not match the Desired Speed/Duplex value, you may have the
printer’s configuration set to a value that is incompatible with the Ethernet switch to which the printer is
connected. The speed and duplex setting of the printer must be set to the same value as the switch.
For example, if you set the printer for Auto, the switch port must also be set for Auto; if you set the
printer for 100 Full duplex, then the switch port must also be set to 100 Full duplex.
v If the link is inactive, then check the Speed/Duplex setting. Also check the RJ45 cable connections at
both ends of the Ethernet cable (the connection at the printer and the connection to the wall or switch
port).
v If the link is active and working correctly you will normally see the count of Octets Received and
Packets Received change every few seconds. If the link is active but you do not see any numbers
changing, the printer’s network configuration parameters may not be set correctly, or the Ethernet switch
may not be configured correctly. Check the printer’s IP addressing information to be sure it is correct. If
these values are correct, contact your network administrator for further assistance.
If you are using InfoPrint Manager to communicate with the printer and the printer does not seem to
respond quickly (within about 5 seconds) to IPM printer-pause or job-cancel requests, use the Network Remote Status panel to check the SNMP status. Select Printer Definition → Network → Status → Remote
Access Status... to display the Network - Remote Access Status panel for SNMP status.
v If SNMP status is Not Running, use the Network - Remote Access panel to set remote access settings
for SNMP. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select SNMP from the list.
Select the Edit... button and set SNMP Agent Enabled to Yes and Allow to Configure Printer to Yes.
v Check IPDS Fast Path. A status line that says “No Request Received” or shows a timestamp that is old
(the time is shown as local time) means that the printer has not received any Fast Path requests from
the IPM system. This may be caused by a firewall in the network path (between the InfoPrint Manager
system and the printer) that does not pass SNMP packets. Contact your network administrator for
further assistance.
Note: IPM attempts to use SNMP to obtain fast printer response for pause and cancel even when the
IPM printer icon has SNMP set to Disabled.
If you have configured the printer to automatically send e-mail for printer status changes, but the specified
e-mail recipient is not receiving notifications by e-mail, use the Network - Remote Access Status panel to
determine the status of the e-mail function in the printer. Select Printer Definition → Network → Status →
Remote Access Status... to display the Network - Remote Access Status panel for E-mail status.
v If E-mail status is Disabled, use the Network - Remote Access panel to set remote access settings for
e-mail. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select E-mail from the list. Select
the Edit... button and set E-mail Enabled to Yes and set the SMTP Mail Server Hostname or IP
Address for your installation. Contact your network administrator for the address of the mail server for
your installation.
v If E-mail status is Running, check the e-mail address of notifications that you specified on the e-mail
panel. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select E-mail from the list. Select
the Edit... button and check the e-mail settings for notifications. If this is correct, press the Show SMTP
Log button and check the log for errors. The log shows the interaction between the printer’s SMTP
client and the SMTP server.
v Check MRPD status. It will show the last time that an attempt to send the MRPD data by FTP was
attempted, and the last time that an FTP transfer was successful. The time is shown as local time. The
automatic transfer is done once per day. To force MRPD to immediately attempt an FTP transfer, select
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select MRPD from the list. Select the Edit...
134
Planning and Configuration Guide
button and the Show MRPD Log button. This attempts an FTP transfer and shows the log. Return to
the Network - Remote Access Status panel and check MRPD status again. An unsuccessful transfer
may be caused by a local firewall that does not allow FTP traffic. Contact your network administrator for
further assistance.
If you are trying to display the printer’s Online Access (Web Pages) with a web browser and the printer
does not seem to respond, use the Network - Remote Access Status panel to check the status of the
printer’s web server. Select Printer Definition → Network → Status → Remote Access Status... to display
Online Access status.
v If Online Access is Not Running, select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select
Online Access from the list. Select the Edit... button and set Online Access Enabled to Yes. The
inability to display the printer's Online Access web pages on a remote system may be caused by a
firewall in the network path (between the remote system and the printer) that does not pass SNMP
packets. Contact your network administrator for further assistance.
Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values
135
Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices
Options for Simplex and Duplex Models
InfoPrint 4100 models can have up to four pre/postprocessing device interfaces per engine. Port 1 in each
printer has an interface adaptor installed as a standard feature that may used either for a preprocessing or
postprocessing device (hereafter called Pre/Post).
Up to three additional optional Pre/Post device interface adaptors may be installed in Ports 2, 3, and 4 of
each printer. Allowable combinations for each printer are shown in Table 41.
Note: The Forms Identification feature (FC 4464) uses a port in Printer 1 and could use an additional port
in Printer 2 if you are printing in dual simplex mode.
Table 41. Preprocessing/postprocessing interface options
Port
136
Configuration Options
1
Pre/Post
Pre/Post
Pre/Post
Pre/Post
2
—
Pre/Post
Pre/post
Pre/post
3
—
—
Pre/Post
Pre/Post
4
—
—
—
Pre/Post
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 8. Establishing Form Settings
Setting form values
Forms → Form Settings
Before you can print forms, you must establish settings for the form or determine which of the default
forms settings already established (Snapshots) match the forms you intend to use.
You must identify all forms used in the printer before you can complete the form-loading procedure. You
can identify and store forms before you attempt to load them into the printer, or you can identify and store
them while you load them. Identify forms with the values for the settings described in Table 43 on page
138.
Once you identify and save the form settings in a Snapshot, all future uses of that form need only identify
the Snapshot name during the loading procedure.
Table 42 shows the default read only Snapshots that are established in the printer at the factory.
Table 42. Default Snapshots
Snapshot Name
Description-Length x Width
InfoPrint-2up Letter
2–Up Letter - 11.0 in. x 18.0 in.
InfoPrint-2up Letter Tractorless
2–Up Letter (Tractorless) - 11.0 in. x 17.0 in.
InfoPrint-2up A4
2-Up A4 - 296.3 mm x 445.0 mm
InfoPrint-2up A4 Tractorless
2-Up A4 (Tractorless) - 296.3 mm x 432.0 mm
Letter
Letter - 8.5 in x 12.0 in
Legal
Legal - 8.5 in x 15.0 in
Ledger
Ledger - 11.0 in x 18.0 in
A3
A3 - 296.3 mm x 445.0 mm
Standard
Standard - 11.0 in x 15.0 in
Table 43 on page 138 describes the required form settings and the values you can enter for a form.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
137
Table 43. Settings for Forms → Form Settings
Setting
Description
Value Options
Forms → Form Settings
Length
Specify the length dimension of the printed output as
measured in the process direction (parallel to the tractor
holes). You can specify this dimension in millimeters or
inches and in lengths from 76 to 432 millimeters (3 to 17
in.).
Note: The printer can stack only forms that are prefolded
at lengths between 178 to 432 mm (7 to 17 in.) between
the fold perforations. To stack printed forms lengths of
less than 7 inches or greater than 17 inches, see
“Stacking Forms” on page 93.
See “System Characteristics” on
page 2 for detailed information
about minimum and maximum
lengths for each model.
Specify the length either in millimeters as a whole number
or in inches to two decimal places. The printer rounds to
the nearest ¹/₆ inch the length you enter and displays it
on the screen.
Note: You can define forms lengths up to 54 inches if the
Signature Page feature (FC 4554) has been installed
Note: Any of these features can affect performance.
For related information, see “Valid Form Lengths in
Inches” on page 95.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Width
Specify the total physical form widths (including the
0.5-inch tractor hole carrier strips on either side of the
form). For information about the form widths supported by
different printer models, see “System Characteristics” on
page 2.
See “System Characteristics” on
page 2 for detailed information
about minimum and maximum
widths for each model.
When you enter a value in inches, use a decimal for
fractional dimensions (for example, 13.5). When you enter
a value in millimeters, do not use a decimal point (use
whole numbers only).
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Units
This entry is for both Width and Length.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
IPDS Form Name
This entry must be a unique identifier.
Note: This field is case sensitive.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
138
Planning and Configuration Guide
v Inches
v Millimeters
12 characters maximum
Table 43. Settings for Forms → Form Settings (continued)
Setting
Description
Value Options
IPDS Host Setup ID
This entry is defined by your company to tell the host
system if the form loaded in the printer is the correct form
for the print job being sent to the printer. The host system
checks the form loaded in the printer and compares the
form definition in the Host Setup ID.
0 to 65535
If the loaded form is the form required by the Host Setup
ID, the job is sent to the printer. If the loaded form is not
the form required by the Host Setup ID, an error message
is posted on the host system console.
Use 0 if no checking is to be done.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Form Bar Code
This entry is used to specify the alphanumeric value of a 0000 to FFFF
bar code preprinted on special forms. These forms require
the installation of the Forms Identification feature (FC
4464).
Use 0000 for all forms that do not have a preprinted bar
code.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Tractorless
Select Yes if you are using paper without tractor strips.
Select No if you are using paper with tractor strips.
v Yes
v No
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Marks
This entry specifies the toner mark position in reference to v Set Print registration mark for
the top of the form (for tractorless forms only).
Printer 1 to Yes if you want
Note:
Printer 1 to print a registration
mark, which is typically read by
Earlier versions of the AFCCU microcode did not provide
Printer 2.
a separate Marks parameter, but did provide the following
v Set Print registration mark for
settings for the Tractorless parameter:
Printer 2 to Yes if you want
v No
Printer 2 to print a registration
mark, which is sometimes
v Yes: Print marks
required by post processing
v Yes: Marks are on the page
equipment.
v Yes: Both
v Set Preprinted registration
marks to Yes for Printer 1 if
Table 44 on page 140 shows how Snapshots containing
the form that you are using has
Tractorless settings (from earlier microcode that did not
a preprinted registration mark
provide a Marks parameter) are migrated to the newer
on the page for registering
microcode that provides both the Tractorless and Marks
printer 1.
parameters.
v Set Preprinted registration
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
marks to Yes for Printer 2 if
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
the form that you are using has
a preprinted registration mark
on the page for registering
printer 2.
Chapter 8. Establishing Form Settings
139
Table 43. Settings for Forms → Form Settings (continued)
Setting
Description
Value Options
Oversize Paper
This entry indicates whether printing is to extend into each v Yes
carrier strip 3.8 mm (0.15 in.). Selecting Yes also turns off
v No
any other printing in the carrier strips, including copy edit
marks.
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Paper Weight
This entry indicates to the printer the weight of the form
you are defining. This enables the printer to compensate
for the form weight during printing.
v < 75 gsm (< 20 pounds)
v 75 - 98 gsm (20 - 26 pounds)
v > 98 gsm (>26 pounds)
This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when you
save the current setting to the Snapshot.
Table 44. Migration of Snapshot settings for the Tractorless and Marks parameters
Tractorless setting (earlier microcode
without the Marks parameter)
Tractorless and Marks settings (when Snapshots are migrated
from earlier microcode without the Marks parameter)
No
v Tractorless = No
v Print registration mark for Printer 1 = Yes
v Print registration mark for Printer 2 = No
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 1 = No
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 2 = No
Yes: Print marks
v Tractorless = Yes
v Print registration mark for Printer 1 = Yes
v Print registration mark for Printer 2 = No
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 1 = No
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 2 = No
Yes: Marks are on the page
v Tractorless = Yes
v Print registration mark for Printer 1 = No
v Print registration mark for Printer 2 = No
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 1 = Yes
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 2 = No
Yes: Both
v Tractorless = Yes
v Print registration mark for Printer 1 = Yes
v Print registration mark for Printer 2 = No
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 1 = Yes
v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 2 = No
140
Planning and Configuration Guide
Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots
This section describes how:
v Create and save Snapshots
v Edit values in individual or multiple Snapshots
v Save print quality settings to Snapshots
v Copy Snapshots between printer controllers
Snapshots allow you to ″take a picture″ of some of the essential printer configuration items that you set in
the Printer Definition panels and the form settings that you specify in the Form Settings panels. Snapshots
allow you to save printer and form settings that you may use frequently in your environment. Table 45
shows the settings that are saved in a Snapshot.
Creating or updating a Snapshot involves setting values for a form and setting other printer definition
values, including values for print quality, basic printer definitions, registration, and pre/postprocessing.
Table 45 lists the values that you see in a snapshot.
Table 45. Snapshot values
Forms → Form
Settings
Forms → Print
Registration
Printer
Definition →
Print Quality
Printer
Definition →
Printer → Basic
v Length
v Paper Feed
Direction for
Printer 2
v Contrast
v Printer Speed v Jam
Recovery
v Front Sheet
Point
Sequence
Distance
v Eject to Front
Facing
v Width
v Unit of
measure for
length and
width
v IPDS - Form
Name
v IPDS - Host
Setup ID
v Form Bar
Code
v Form type
(tractorless or
with tractor
holes)
v Oversize
Paper
v Paper Feed
Direction for
Printer 1
v Across
Paper Feed
Direction for
Printer 2
v Across
Paper Feed
Direction for
Printer 1
v Boldness
v Preheat
Temperature
v Fuser
Temperature
v Oil Rate
v Oil Belt
v Advanced...
– Use
Backup
Idler Roll
v Auto NPRO
at EOF
Printer
Definition→
Printer→
Setup
Printer
Definition→
PDL→ IPDS
Printer
Definition →
Pre/Postprocessing →
Postprocessing
Options
v Cutsheet
Emulation
v Use
Internal
Stacker
v Reprint
(see note
Pages after
2)
Jams
v Offsetter
v IPDS
Enabled
Resolution
v IPDS
Printhead
Resolution
v BTS
Enabled
v Offset on
Mark
Forms
– Preheat
Offset
(see note
1)
v Paper Weight
v Registration
Marks
– Printer
Registration
Marks
– TOF Offset
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
141
Table 45. Snapshot values (continued)
Forms → Form
Settings
Forms → Print
Registration
Printer
Definition →
Print Quality
Printer
Definition →
Printer → Basic
Printer
Definition→
Printer→
Setup
Printer
Definition→
PDL→ IPDS
Printer
Definition →
Pre/Postprocessing →
Postprocessing
Options
Notes:
1. The preheat offset is a CE only value.
2. The internal stacker is available for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4 with Feature Code
4770/4771.
Snapshots affect how the print job is printed. You can create and save your own Snapshot using the
default Snapshots as a template. And you can select and load a specific Snapshot when you want to print
a job that has the same requirements as those specified in a particular Snapshot. You can also make
changes to your Snapshots and save them on your printer. You can view the Snapshot settings by
selecting the Show Details... button on the Snapshots panel.
Note: Your service representative can specify whether to save all the following configuration settings or to
save only form settings in a Snapshot using the Snapshot Mode field in the Printer - Setup panel
(Printer Definition → Printer → Setup).
Notes:
1. Loading snapshots changes the printer configuration.
2. Printer configuration changes cause NACKs to the host.
3. The host will reprint any pages that need to be reprinted due to configuration changes.
Creating and saving Snapshots
Before saving a Snapshot, you should review all printer and forms settings that are saved to Snapshots.
Use Table 45 on page 141 to see which values are saved and where those values are defined on the
console touch panels.
Do this procedure to create and save a Snapshot:
1. Select the Snapshots panel (Frequent Tasks → Snapshots).
2. Select Show Details... and review the values for the currently loaded Snapshot. These values will be
saved to the Snapshot you are creating.
3. If you want to make changes to the printer and forms settings, use Table 45 on page 141 to find the
panel where that value is defined.
4. Navigate to each of the following touch panels and review or change the values that are saved to
Snapshots:
v Select the Forms Settings panel (Forms → Forms Settings). and review or change the forms
values you want to save to the Snapshot.
v Select the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality) and review or change the print
quality values you want to save to the Snapshot. See “Saving Print Quality Settings to a Snapshot”
on page 143 for more information about saving print quality values.
v Select the Printer - Basic panel (Printer Definition → Printer → Basic) and review or change the
basic printer settings you want to save to the Snapshot.
v Select the Pre/Postprocessing - Postprocessing Options panel (Printer Definition →
Pre/Postprocessing → Postprocessing Options) to review or change the postprocessing settings
you want to save to the Snapshot.
142
Planning and Configuration Guide
5. Review the printer definition settings on these panels:
v Print Registration panel (Forms → Print Registration)
v Printer - Setup panel (Printer Definition → Printer → Setup)
v PDL - IPDS panel (Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS)
6. Select the Snapshots panel (Frequent Tasks → Snapshots).
7. Select Save current settings as... to save the Snapshot using the current settings for printer and
forms.
8. Enter a name for the new Snapshot.
9. Select OK.
10. Select Close to return to the Main panel.
Editing multiple Snapshots
Before changing values in a Snapshot and saving the changed Snapshot, you should review all printer and
forms settings that are saved to Snapshots. Use Table 45 on page 141 to see which values are saved and
where those values are defined on the console touch panels.
Do this procedure to edit the values saved in Snapshots:
1. Before making changes to your Snapshot settings, you should consider whether to save the current
settings. Do the following to create a backup copy of your current Snapshot settings:
a. Plug the USB flash memory device into the InfoPrint POWER Controller keyboard.
b. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.
c. Select Create Backup to copy the Snapshots file (config.bak) to the USB flash memory device.
d. Remove the USB flash memory device from the printer keyboard.
2. Select the Snapshots panel (Frequent Tasks → Snapshots).
3. Select the wrench to open the Edit Snapshot window. From this window you can change values for
one or more Snapshot settings and you can save your changed settings.
a. Select a cell in one or more Snapshots for the setting you want to change. When selecting cells in
more than one Snapshot, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting the cell in each of the
desired Snapshots.
b. Select Edit... to open the editing window for the selected setting.
c. Select or type the new value and select OK to save your change.
4. Select Close to return to the Main panel.
Saving Print Quality Settings to a Snapshot
Do this procedure to save a Snapshot that contains your changed print quality settings. You can save your
settings to a new Snapshot or change an existing one that you want to use for checking print quality
settings.
1. Select the Forms Settings panel (Forms → Forms Settings). Select the paper weight range for the
paper you are printing.
2. Select the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality). In the Recommended Settings
field, select the appropriate range for the paper weight you selected in the Forms Settings panel. This
sets the print quality settings to the optimal values based on the paper weight you selected and the
toner installed in your printer.
3. Run some print samples using these settings.
4. If you need to adjust the print quality settings after running the print samples, select the Print Quality
panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality) and review the current print quality settings. See
“Understanding Print Quality” on page 144 for more information about setting print quality values.
Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots
143
5. Select the Snapshots panel (Frequent Tasks → Snapshots) and make sure that all printer and forms
settings are set the way you want them. See “Creating and saving Snapshots” on page 142 for more
information.
6. Select Save current settings as.... You will be prompted to enter the name of the Snapshot you want
to save. The Name field will be filled in with the previously saved Snapshot. You can save it with that
name or specify a new name.
7. Select Close to return to the Main panel.
Understanding Print Quality
Print quality settings are defined on the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality). You
should carefully review the current print quality settings before saving them to a Snapshot.
Frequent
Tasks
Forms
Printer
Definition
Maintenance
Logon...
Printer2
Print Quality
Printer1
4
4
1
2
3
5
Printer
6
Contrast
7
1
2
3
5
A
0
20
60
40
PDL
80
100
Boldness
A
A
0
20
40
50
0
20
80
Preheat
Temperature
100
0
20
40
50
Network
100
Fuser
Temperature
0
50
0
20
40
0
20
40
80
100
60
80
100
60
80
100
60
80
100
A
50
60
80
100
Oil Rate
0
20
40
60
80
100
Oil Belt
0
20
40
50
Features
60
50
0
Pre/Post
Processing
7
50
60
40
6
50
50
50
Recommended
Settings:
Infoprint
POWER
Controller
8:56
Start
Stop
Check/Reset
NPRO
Shut Down
Cancel
Help
Set Print
Registration
6/2/05
g5aud205
OK
Advanced...
Figure 34. Print Quality panel
v Contrast - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by one
unit. The default value is 4.
Contrast determines how much toner coverage is being applied to the page. If you want darker logos,
pictures, or bar codes, you might have to increase the contrast. If you are printing mostly text, the
contrast can usually be decreased. The higher the contrast is set, the more toner is used.
4
Contrast
1
2
3
Figure 35. Contrast setting on the Print Quality panel
144
Planning and Configuration Guide
5
6
7
g5aud210
The contrast setting has little effect on the readability of small fonts or the appearance of grayscale or
halftones. These are adjusted by the boldness setting.
v Boldness - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by one
unit. The default value is 50. Values greater than 85 or less than 15 will turn the scroll bar red,
indicating that you are reaching the high end or the low end of adjustment.
50
Boldness
A
0
20
40
60
80
A
100
g5aud206
Boldness determines the look of the characters as well as the amount of haltone or grayscale that
appears on a page. If a small font appears hard to read, increasing the boldness may fix the problem. If
a haltone or grayscale is too dark, decreasing the boldness may improve the look.
Changing the boldness will not significantly affect the amount of toner fill desired on the page.
Figure 36. Boldness setting on the Print Quality panel
v Preheat Temperature - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the
value by one unit. The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type. Values
greater than 85 or less than 15 will turn the scroll bar red, indicating that you are reaching the high end
or the low end of adjustment.
The preheat temperature determines the amount of heat that is applied to the preheat platen. The
preheat platen is the long curved metal plate that the paper travels on when entering the fuser area.
Adjust this setting according to the type of paper being used. Normally lighter paper requires less heat
and heavier paper requires more heat.
50
Preheat
Temperature
0
20
40
60
80
100
g5aud207
Adjusting this setting can help achieve the best fusing quality.
Figure 37. Preheat Temperature setting on the Print Quality panel
v Fuser Temperature - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value
by one unit. The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type.
The fuser temperature determines the amount of heat that is applied to the fuser roll. Adjust this setting
according to the type of paper being used. The middle setting should be used for light or normal weight
paper. The high setting should be used for heavier paper. A low setting of 0 should only be used if
instructed by your service representative.
Fuser
Temperature
50
0
100
g5aud208
When printing forms with high toner coverage, more heat may be needed to fuse it correctly. Therefore,
a high heat setting may be needed on a medium-weight paper that has high toner coverage.
Figure 38. Fuser Temperature setting on the Print Quality panel
v Oil Rate - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by one
unit. The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type.
The oil rate determines the amount of fuser oil that is applied to the fuser roll. Adjust this setting to a
lower number if a lower heat is being applied to the fuser roll (see Fuser Temperature above). Adjust it
to a higher number if the fuser roll is being run at high heat.
Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots
145
Note: If your printer has an oil roll installed instead of an oil belt, you might need to lower the oil rate
down to 30 to prevent over oiling.
Oil Rate
0
20
40
60
80
100
g5aud209
50
Figure 39. Oil Rate setting on the Print Quality panel
v Oil Belt - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by one unit.
The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type.
The oil belt setting determines the speed of the oil belt. If the fuser temperature and oil rate are
increased, the oil belt speed can also be increased. If the fuser temperature and oil rate are decreased,
the oil belt speed can also be decreased.
The oil belt speed may need to be increased if the forms give off excess ink or residue that sticks to the
surface of the oil belt.
Note:
If your printer has oil roll installed instead of an oil belt, this control will not display on the Print
Quality panel.
Oil Belt
0
20
40
60
80
100
g5aud211
50
Figure 40. Oil Belt setting on the Print Quality panel
v Use Backup Idler Roll (select Advanced... to see this setting) - Select either Default, Yes, or No.
The backup idler roll applies extra pressure to the fuser roll and can help with fusing and wrinkling
problems on certain forms.
The default setting will set the roll to run at the same speed as the printer. If you are not sure of the
speed, select Yes to engage the backup idler roll or No to disengage it.
v Select OK to close the Advanced window.
v Select OK to close the Print Quality panel.
Copying Snapshots between InfoPrint POWER Controllers
Do this procedure to copy Snapshots from one InfoPrint POWER Controller to another:
1. Plug the USB flash memory device into the InfoPrint POWER Controller keyboard.
2. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.
3. Select Create Backup to copy the Snapshots file (config.bak) to the USB flash memory device.
4. Remove the USB flash memory device from the printer keyboard and move to the printer where you
want to copy the Snapshots.
5. Plug the USB flash memory device into the keyboard on the second printer.
6. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.
7. Select Load Configuration.
8. Do the following to load the Snapshots file from the USB flash memory device to the control unit:
a. Select Snapshots on the window that lists items to read from the recovery USB flash memory
device.
b. Select OK.
146
Planning and Configuration Guide
Note: Select Summary to see a list of Snapshots currently on the printer.
c. On the resulting window, you can select whether to add only unique Snapshots, replace all
Snapshots, or add unique Snapshots and replace Snapshots that are not unique.
Note: If you select Replace all snapshots or Add unique plus replace non-unique snapshots,
the Snapshots on the USB flash memory device will overlay Snapshots that have the same
name on the printer. Default Snapshots provided with the printer cannot be overlaid or
deleted.
d. Select OK.
Note: Select Summary to see a list of Snapshots currently on the printer.
Copying Snapshots from the AFCCU to the InfoPrint POWER
Controller
Do this procedure to copy Snapshots from the AFCCU control unit to the InfoPrint POWER Controller.
Note: The diskette that you use to do the following steps must be formatted so that no other data exists
on the diskette.
1. Do the following on the AFCCU control unit:
a. Insert a diskette into the diskette drive in the AFCCU control unit.
b. Select Maintenance → Diskette Operations to display the Diskette Operations panel.
c. Select Create Recovery Diskette to load the Snapshots file (cnfgdata.bak) to the diskette.
d. Copy the file from the diskette to a personal workstation that has a USB port.
e. Insert a USB flash memory device into the workstation and copy the Snapshots file to it.
Attention: Make sure the USB flash memory device you use does not contain a file named
config.bak.
2. Do the following on the InfoPrint POWER Controller:
a. Plug the USB flash memory device into the keyboard on the InfoPrint POWER Controller keyboard.
b. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.
c. Select Load Configuration. This displays a window that lists items to read from the recovery USB
device.
3. Do the following to load the Snapshots from the diskette to the control unit:
a. Select Snapshots on the window that lists items to read from the recovery USB device.
b. Select OK.
c. On the resulting window, you can select whether to add only unique Snapshots, replace all
Snapshots, or add unique Snapshots and replace Snapshots that are not unique.
Note: If you select Replace all snapshots or Add unique plus replace non-unique snapshots,
the Snapshots on the diskette drive will overlay Snapshots that have the same name on the
printer. Default Snapshots provided with the printer cannot be overlaid or deleted.
d. Select OK.
Note: Select Summary to see a list of Snapshots currently on the printer.
Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots
147
148
Planning and Configuration Guide
Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies
Chapter Overview
This chapter describes the printer supplies and how you can order and store them. For some
models, it provides estimates for the quantity of forms (in feet) that each supply item can process.
Supplies
|
|
|
For optimum print quality and reliability, use InfoPrint Solutions Company supplies, which are engineered
specifically for InfoPrint printers. Use Table 46 on page 151 to help you order supplies for the printer
before the system is delivered, and to maintain a stock of supplies for continuous operation.
When a printer runs low on a supply item, it displays a status message on the touch panel, sounds an
alarm, and turns on the operator alert light on top of the printer.
InfoPrint Solutions Company recommends that you keep the following quantities on hand per print engine:
Item
Suggested Quantity
Toner
24 cartridges
Developer mix
4 bottles
Fuser oil
4 bottles
Oiler belt
2 belts
Fine filter
2 filters
Splicing tape
72 rolls
The estimated quantities are approximations for planning purposes only, and do not represent a warranty,
a guarantee, or a minimum. The actual consumption depends on variables such as machine toner
settings, job-stream percent toner coverage, form characteristics, temperature, and humidity.
Also ensure that a toner-certified vacuum cleaner (see page 79) is available for printer operators to use
when cleaning the printer.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
149
Supplies Work Sheet
Important Notes Concerning Supplies
Notes:
1. Make sure to use the correct part numbers when you order new supplies. Different models use
different supplies (such as toner, developer, fuser oil, oiler belts, and fine filters). Using the wrong
developer or toner, for example, causes serious print quality problems and will require a service call to
restore correct print quality.
2. The toner bottle can also be used as a waste toner collection bottle.
Note: Do not reuse waste toner.
3. The yields listed in Table 47 on page 152 are approximations. They are not a warranty or guarantee of
minimum life, and are provided only to assist in supplies planning. Toner yield is affected by many
factors, including print coverage per page, contrast setting, paper type and size, model type, and
environmental conditions. More dense applications, such as extensive bar codes, or images, or solid
area fill, or printing with a higher contrast setting can expect to achieve yields lower than those
achieved with the average text page. Your actual usage data should be used to establish the life of the
supply product in your specific application.
4. Yield estimates shown in Table 47 on page 152 are based on four square inches of toner coverage per
foot of forms (see note 6).
a. For MICR toner, approximate yields are based on an average signal strength setting of 120%.
b. For most toners, approximate yields are based on an optical density setting of 1.20.
c. For InfoPrint 4000 Enhanced Printing toner Version III, approximate yields are based on an optical
density setting of 1.15.
d. for InfoPrint 4100 Enhanced Printing Toner Version 6, approximate yields are based on an optical
density setting of 1.05.
5. The life of the absorbent pad for the oil pan varies according to the way you run your printer. In
general, the more often the printer is idle, the more often you may need to replace the pad. InfoPrint
Solutions Company recommends that you check the absorbent pad weekly. The InfoPrint 4000/4100
Operator’s Guide contains instructions for checking the pad. Contact your service representative for
replacement pads.
6. When calculating yields for multiple-up printing, you must calculate for the side-by-side placement of
the page on the form. For example, when printing 2-up on 8.5 x 11 inch paper, four square inches
must be multiplied by 11/12, which equals 3.67 square inches. So for 2-up printing, you must divide
3.67 by two, which equals 1.835 squares inches per page.
Table 46 on page 151 and Table 47 on page 152 are work sheets that list supplies and their part numbers.
Make copies of these work sheets to use when you order supplies.
150
Planning and Configuration Guide
InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD1/2 Supplies Work Sheet
Table 46. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1 and MD1/2
Supply Item
Part Number
Minimum Order Quantity
InfoPrint 4100 Enhanced
Printing Toner Version 2
3.0 kg (6.6 lb) cartridge
69G7377
1 carton (4 cartridges per
carton)
InfoPrint 4100 Enhanced
Printing Developer Version 2
(octagonal symbol on cap)
4.0 kg (8.8 lb) bottle
69G7370
1 carton (2 bottles per carton)
Fuser Oil
1-kg (2.2-lb) bottle
17R7655
1 carton (1 bottle per carton)
Oiler Belt
17R7656
1 carton (1 belt per carton)
Oil Pan Absorbent Pad
18R0409
1 carton (1 belt per carton)
Fine Filter
1372464
1 carton (1 filter per carton)
Extra Toner Bags
28P0446
1 carton (25 bags per carton)
Splicing Tape
4165880
1 carton (72 rolls per carton)
PTFE Mat (with FC 4940)
17R7843
1 package (4 mats per
package)
Wear Strip (with FC 4940)
10R4308
1 package (4 wear strips per
package)
Quantity Needed
Note: Refer to the InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3, HD5 and HD6 Duplex and Simplex Models announcement
letter for information about estimated supplies yields.
Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies
151
InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4 Supplies Work Sheet
Table 47. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4
Supply Item
Approximate Forms
Processed (In Feet)
Part Number
Minimum Order
Quantity
Enhanced Printing Toner
Version 3
3.0 kg (6.6 lb) cartridge
100,000 feet per
cartridge
(See note 4d on
page 150)
57P1887
1 carton (4 cartridges
per carton)
Enhanced Printing
Developer Version 3
(octagonal symbol on cap)
4.0 kg (8.8 lb) bottle
1.6 million feet per
bottle
57P1892
1 carton (2 bottles per
carton)
Enhanced Printing Toner
Version 4
3.0 kg (6.6 lb) cartridge
90,000 feet per
cartridge
(See note 4d on
page 150)
17R7719
1 carton (4 cartridges
per carton)
Enhanced Printing
Developer Version 4
(octagonal symbol on cap)
4.0 kg (8.8 lb) bottle
2 million feet per
bottle
17R7720
1 carton (2 bottles per
carton)
Enhanced Printing Toner
Version 5
3.0 kg (6.6 lb) cartridge
100,000 feet per
cartridge
(See note 4d on
page 150)
17R7725
1 carton (4 cartridges
per carton)
Enhanced Printing
Developer Version 5
(octagonal symbol on cap)
4.0 kg (8.8 lb) bottle
2 million feet per
bottle
17R7726
1 carton (2 bottles per
carton)
MICR Toner
101,000 per
cartridge
(See note 4a on
page 150)
57P2074
1 carton (4 cartidges per
carton)
MICR Developer
1.2 million feet per
bottle
57P2100
1 carton (2 bottles per
carton)
Fuser Oil
1-kg (2.2-lb) bottle
700,000 feet per
bottle
1372463
1 carton (1 bottle per
carton)
Oiler Belt
1.5 million feet
57P2249
1 carton (1 belt per
carton)
18R0409
1 carton (1 belt per
carton)
1372464
1 carton (1 filter per
carton)
28P0446
1 carton (25 bags per
carton)
Oil Pan Absorbent Pad
(see note)
Fine Filter
3.5 million feet per
filter
Extra Toner Bags
Splicing Tape
45 feet of tape per
roll
4165880
1 carton (72 rolls per
carton)
PTFE Mat (with RPQ
8B5023 and FC 4940)
N/A
17R7843
1 package (4 mats per
package)
Wear Strip (with RPQ
8B5023 and FC 4940)
N/A
10R4308
1 package (4 wear strips
per package)
152
Planning and Configuration Guide
Quantity Needed
Note: The oil pan absorbent pad is required only for models that have the oil pan installed.
Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies
153
InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6 Supplies Work Sheet
Table 48. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6
Supply Item
Part Number
Minimum Order Quantity
InfoPrint 4100 Enhanced
Printing Toner Version 2
3.0 kg (6.6 lb) cartridge
69G7377
1 carton (4 cartridges per
carton)
InfoPrint 4100 Enhanced
Printing Developer Version 2
(octagonal symbol on cap)
4.0 kg (8.8 lb) bottle
69G7370
1 carton (2 bottles per carton)
InfoPrint 4100 MICR Toner
57P2074
1 carton (4 cartidges per
carton)
InfoPrint 4100 MICR Developer
57P2100
1 carton (2 bottles per carton)
Fuser Oil
1-kg (2.2-lb) bottle
17R7655
1 carton (1 bottle per carton)
Oiler Belt
17R7656
1 carton (1 belt per carton)
Oil Pan Absorbent Pad
18R0409
1 carton (1 belt per carton)
Fine Filter
1372464
1 carton (1 filter per carton)
Extra Toner Bags
28P0446
1 carton (25 bags per carton)
Splicing Tape
4165880
1 carton (72 rolls per carton)
PTFE Mat (with FC 4940)
17R7843
1 package (4 mats per
package)
Wear Strip (with FC 4940)
10R4308
1 package (4 wear strips per
package)
Quantity Needed
Note: Refer to the InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3, HD5 and HD6 Duplex and Simplex Models announcement
letter for information about estimated supplies yields.
154
Planning and Configuration Guide
Ordering Supplies
You can order supplies directly from your service representative, who can assist you in the procedure for
placing your first order of supplies.
Maintenance Supply Items
In the U.S.A., Latin America, and EMEA, the Monthly Maintenance Charge includes the fuser oil, oiler belt,
and fine filter. Approximately a 90-day stock of these items are supplied with each printer.
In the U.S.A., you can order these maintenance items by calling 1-800-346-3939 if you have a
Maintenance Contract.
Customer-replaceable Supply Items
|
|
In North America, you can order supplies from the Supplies Fulfillment Operation (ISFO) at 888-426-7746.
For information about ordering supplies for other locations, see www.infoprint.com and select “Supplies”.
Warranty Returns
If the supplies you receive are defective, return them to the place of purchase during the warranty period
for a free replacement.
Include a copy of your invoice, a description of the problem, print-quality samples, and an estimate of the
amount of printing already done with that supply.
This information applies only to supplies purchased in the U.S. In other countries, contact your point of
purchase for information about returns.
Storing Supplies
Store printer supplies in the printer operating environment for at least one day before you use them. At
other times, you can store supplies in an environment that does not exceed the following requirements:
Temperature
−25° to 40°C (−13° to 104°F)
Relative Humidity
5% to 90%
Forms have different storage requirements. Store forms in an area where temperature and humidity are
similar to the environment in which they will be used. If forms do not adapt to moisture changes, wrinkles
and voids can occur during printing.
Avoid areas of extreme heat or humidity. Extended exposure to these extremes can damage the materials
permanently. Relative humidity levels above 65% may reduce print quality.
Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies
155
156
Planning and Configuration Guide
Appendix B. Work Sheets
Chapter Overview
This chapter contains work sheets on which you can record your installation requirements,
configuration choices, and forms definitions for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2,
HD3/4, and HD5/6 printers. Fill in a copy of these work sheets and give a copy of the completed
form to the service representative when the printer is installed.
You can specify some configurations within the printer and some characteristics of its function. For
example, you can select the language in which messages will be displayed. These options are known as
configuration information.
The printer controller needs to know all of the current configuration information to operate the system
accurately. Initially, the service representative sets configuration options when the printer is installed. You
can change any of the configuration options later if the physical configuration changes or if the operating
characteristics change.
You can change all configuration information by using the touch panels.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
157
Installation Planning Work Sheet
Before your printer is delivered, prepare a site installation plan. Use the following work sheet to ensure
that all of the pre-installation requirements are met.
Table 49. InfoPrint 4100 installation planning work sheet
Requirements
Meets
Requirements:
Environmental
Ventilation
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Space
Layout
Storage space for supplies
Clearances
Delivery rout
Electrical
Outlets:
Can be reached by cables?
Correctly grounded?
Meet local and national codes?
Building branch circuit:
Correctly grounded?
Is there a separate ground wire
(not just conduit) for all
connections from the printer and
pre/postprocessors that go to the
ground bus bar of the circuit
breaker box? See Figure 21 on
page 76.
Are the ground wire and the
neutral wire between the circuit
breaker box and the source
(building ground) separate wires?
See Figure 21 on page 76.
Are the printer engine power and
the control unit power going to the
same circuit breaker box?
Enough power to meet needs?
Note: Note that the maximum
load for low-voltage 60 Hz
machines is 55 Amps. Customer
circuits must have sufficient rating
to comply with local electrical
code.
Meets local and national
codes?
Host System Attachment
Ethernet cables and connectors
158
Planning and Configuration Guide
Needs
Attention:
Assigned to: Date Due:
Date
Completed:
Table 49. InfoPrint 4100 installation planning work sheet (continued)
Requirements
Meets
Requirements:
Needs
Attention:
Assigned to: Date Due:
Date
Completed:
FICON channel cables
ESCON channel cables
Security
Appendix B. Work Sheets
159
Physical Planning Work Sheet
The physical planner:
v Identifies the location for the printer when the system is ordered
v Plans the electrical wiring and outlet requirements
v Schedules installing and testing of the electrical wiring and outlets before the printer arrives.
Use Table 50 as a work sheet when preparing the site for the printer.
Table 50. InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 physical planning work sheet
Weeks
before
Delivery
15
Task
1. Identify the location for the printer and arrange
for any necessary changes to the site.
2. Identify a delivery route to the location of the
printer.
3. Prepare a layout plan.
4. Determine the requirements for electrical
outlets. If you are installing a Air Bearing
Buffer Flipper or an InfoPrint 4100 HS3 or
HD5/6, you will need additional outlets. See
“Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page
72 for more information.
Assigned to:
Scheduled Completion
Date:
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
5. Order the ‘H’ configuration unique items, such
as the turnbar/flipper and adapter piece.
10
1. Install and test the electrical wiring and
outlets.
2. Verify that a forklift and operator will be
available when the printer arrives.
4
1. Order additional electrical service if required.
Note: Note that the maximum load for
low-voltage 60 Hz machines is 55 Amps.
Customer circuits must have sufficient rating
to comply with local electrical code.
Arrival
1. Unpack the printer and inspect it for external
damage.
2. Move the printer to the prepared site.
160
Planning and Configuration Guide
Duplex Definition Work Sheet
Record your configuration choices on this work sheet, and give a copy of the completed form to the
service representative when the printer is being installed. See Chapter 7, “Setting Printer Definition
Values,” on page 97 for detailed information about each item.
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Print Quality
Printer 1 Contrast
1 to 7
Printer 2 Contrast
1 to 7
Printer 1 Boldness
0 to 100
Printer 2 Boldness
0 to 100
Printer 1 Preheat Temperature
1 to 100
Printer 2 Preheat Temperature
1 to 100
Printer 1 Fuser Temperature
1 to 100
Printer 2 Fuser Temperature
1 to 100
Printer 1 Oil Rate
1 to 100
Printer 2 Oil Rate
1 to 100
Printer 1 Oil Belt
2 to 100
Printer 2 Oil Belt
2 to 100
Example Settings
Medium / Heavy
Appendix B. Work Sheets
161
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Print Quality → Beam Adjustments
Printer 1 Beam 1 Offset Adjustment
Cannot be changed.
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Beam 2 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Beam 3 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Beam 4 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Beam 5 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Beam 1 Offset Adjustment
Cannot be changed.
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Beam 2 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Beam 3 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Beam 4 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Beam 5 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
162
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Print Quality → PQE Adjustments
Printer 1 Beam Number
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Current Vector
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Vector Boldness
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Horizontal High
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Horizontal Low
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Vertical High
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Vertical Low
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Beam Number
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Current Vector
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Vector Boldness
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Horizontal High
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Horizontal Low
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Vertical High
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Vertical Low
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Appendix B. Work Sheets
163
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Printer Definition → Print Quality → Advanced
Printer 1 Use Backup Idler Roll
Yes / No
Printer 2 Use Backup Idler Roll
Yes / No
Printer 1 Preheat Offset
-100 to 20
Printer 2 Preheat Offset
-100 to 20
164
Planning and Configuration Guide
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Printer → Basic
Printer Mode
Duplex / Simplex
Printer Speed
High/Low
Side 2 Verify
Enable / Disable
Front Sheet Sequence (Duplex mode v Front First
only)
v Front Second
Same Side Printing
Yes / No
Eject to Front Facing
v Enabled
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
v Disabled
Auto NPRO at EOF
Yes / No
Language
v English
v Spanish
v German
v Japanese Kanji
v French
v Italian
v Brazilian Portuguese
v Simplified Chinese
v Traditional Chinese
v Korean
v Russian
v Hungarian
Keyboard Language
v English
v Spanish
v German
v Japanese Kanji
v French
v Italian
v Brazilian Portuguese
v Simplified Chinese
v Traditional Chinese
v Korean
v Russian
v Hungarian
Appendix B. Work Sheets
165
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Printer → Setup
Snapshot Mode
(CE Only Change)
MICR Installed
v None
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
v Printer 1
v Printer 2
Jam Recovery Point Distance
0 to 700 inches
Printer 1 to Printer 2 Distance
(Duplex mode only)
150 to 800 inches
NPRO Length
0 to 1200 inches
Fuser Sleep Timeout
v None
v 1 Hour
v 2 Hours
v 4 Hours
Clear Memory for Security
Yes / No
Audible Alarm
Yes / No
Auto Align
Yes / No
Contact
Text entry field - up to 80
alphanumeric characters
Printer Name
Text entry field - up to 80
alphanumeric characters
Engine 1 Name
Text entry field - up to 80
alphanumeric characters
Engine 2 Name
Text entry field - up to 80
alphanumeric characters
Printer Location
Text entry field - up to 80
alphanumeric characters
Support Address Name
Text entry field - up to 80
alphanumeric characters
Support Address URL
Text entry field - up to 255
alphanumeric characters
166
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Printer → Setup → Advanced
Stop on Toner Low
Yes / No
Open Clear Buffers Alert
Yes / No
Dual Sensor Installed
Yes / No
Required Log Entry Timeout
v Disabled
N/A
N/A
N/A
v 1 minute
v 2 minutes
v 4 minutes
v 15 minutes
v 30 minutes
Appendix B. Work Sheets
167
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Printer → Date/Time
Date and Time
yyyy=year, mm=month, dd=day, N/A
hh=hour, mm=minute,
ss=seconds
N/A
N/A
Time Zone
N/A
N/A
N/A
Time Zone
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Time Source
168
Planning and Configuration Guide
Manual / Specific Network
Server / Any Network Server
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Printer → Service
Printer 1 Machine Serial
(Service Change on initial
configuration only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Machine Serial
(Service Change on initial
configuration only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Print Count
(Service Change Only)
Printer 2 Print Count
(Service Change Only)
Printer 1 Backup Idler Roll Installed
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Backup Idler Roll Installed
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Toner Type
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Toner Type
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Scan Factory Adjustment
480 Pels
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Scan Factory Adjustment
480 Pels
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Scan Factory Adjustment
600 Pels
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Scan Factory Adjustment
600 Pels
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Process Factory Adjustment (Service Change Only)
480 Pels
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Process Factory Adjustment (Service Change Only)
480 Pels
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 1 Process Factory Adjustment (Service Change Only)
600 Pels
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Process Factory Adjustment (Service Change Only)
600 Pels
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Side 2 Verify Factory Adjust (Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Printer 2 Side 1 Verify Factory Adjust (Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Appendix B. Work Sheets
169
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Printer Definition → Printer → Resource Utilization (Service)
IPDS Font Usage
v High
v Medium
v Low
IPDS Page Segment Usage
v Unlimited (Disk)
v High (RAM)
v Medium (RAM)
v Low (RAM)
IPDS Overlay Usage
v High
v Medium
v Low
v None
IPDS Input Buffer Size
v Low
v Medium
v High
Output Buffer Size
v Low
v Medium
v High
170
Planning and Configuration Guide
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
Cut Sheet Emulation
v None
v Normal Left-to-Right
v Normal Right-to-Left
v Inverted Left-to-Right
v Inverted Right-to-Left
IPDS Printhead Resolution
v 480
v 600
The values available depend on
the model of the printer.
To have a selectable IPDS
resolution, select 600.
IPDS Resolution
v Automatic
v 240
v 300
v 600
The values available depend on
the model of the printer and the
printhead resolution selected.
Reprint Pages After Jams
v Yes
v No recovery for MICR pages
v No
Logical Page Increment
0 to 20 pels
3130 Bar Code Emulation
Yes / No
Simulate Color with Gray
Yes / No
Single-Byte Font Smoothing
Yes / No
Double-Byte Font Smoothing
Yes / No
Suppress Off Page Errors
0 to 100 Pels
Scale GOCA Lines
Yes / No
Appendix B. Work Sheets
171
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → ESCON
|
Adapter Cards
v ESCON Link A
v ESCON Link B
Device Address
X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal
notation)
Multi-Host Environment Flag
v True
v False
Maximum Block Length
v 32K
v 64K
Priority
172
Planning and Configuration Guide
1 to 10
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → FICON
|
Adapter Cards
v FICON Link A
v FICON Link B
Device Address
X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal
notation)
Multi-Host Environment Flag
v True
v False
Maximum Block Length
v 32K
v 64K
Media Speed (FICON Link A)
v Autonegotiate
v 1 Gigabit
v 2 Gigabits
Media Speed FICON Link B
v Autonegotiate
v 1 Gigabit
v 2 Gigabits
Priority
1 to 10
Appendix B. Work Sheets
173
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #1
|
DHCP Addressing
On / Off
DHCP Plug-and-Play
Enable / Disable
DHCP Time Out
1 to 300
IP Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of Local Host
IP Address of Primary and
Secondary DNS server
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Media Speed
v Auto Negotiation
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Default Gateway Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of Local Host
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
174
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper NIC
|
DHCP Addressing
On / Off
DHCP Plug-and-Play
Enable / Disable
DHCP Time Out
1 to 300
IP Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of Local Host
IP Address of Primary and
Secondary DNS server
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Media Speed
v Auto Negotiation
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Default Gateway Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of Local Host
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
Appendix B. Work Sheets
175
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Fiber NIC
|
DHCP Addressing
On / Off
DHCP Plug-and-Play
Enable / Disable
DHCP Time Out
1 to 300
IP Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of Local Host
IP Address of Primary and
Secondary DNS server
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Media Speed
v Auto Negotiation
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Default Gateway Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of Local Host
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
176
Planning and Configuration Guide
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
|
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #2
DHCP Addressing
Not supported on the service
adapter.
DHCP Plug-and-Play
Not supported on the service
adapter.
DHCP Time Out
Not supported on the service
adapter.
IP Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of Local Host
Not supported on the service
adapter.
IP Address of Primary and
Secondary DNS server
Not supported on the service
adapter.
Media Speed
v Auto Negotiation
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Default Gateway Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of Local Host
X.X.X.X where X is an
alphanumeric character
Appendix B. Work Sheets
177
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → IPDS TCP
|
TCP Port
5001 to 65535
Data Timeout
0 to 300 seconds
Priority
1 to 10
178
Planning and Configuration Guide
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → FTP (Service)
|
Data Timeout
0 to 300 seconds
Appendix B. Work Sheets
179
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → Push Print (Service)
|
|
Available Values
Data Timeout
180
Planning and Configuration Guide
0 to 300 seconds
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → SNMP
SNMP Agent Enabled
v Yes
v No
Allow to Configure Printer
v Yes
v No
Match Printer
1
Match Printer
1
SNMP Trap Host
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Match Printer
1
SNMP Community Name
Alphanumeric characters
Match Printer
1
Appendix B. Work Sheets
181
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → Online Access (Web Pages)
Online Access (Web Pages)
v Yes
v No
182
Planning and Configuration Guide
Match Printer
1
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → E-mail
E-mail Enabled
v Yes
v No
Match Printer
1
Printer Supplies E-mail address
Text entry field
Match Printer
1
Printer Problems E-mail address
Text entry field
Match Printer
1
Printer Service E-mail address
Text entry field
Match Printer
1
Default Trace E-mail Destination
Text entry field
Match Printer
1
SMTP Mail Server Hostname or IP
Address
Alphanumeric for hostname or
dotted decimal for IP address
(X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255)
Match Printer
1
SMTP Timeout
0 to 999
Match Printer
1
Appendix B. Work Sheets
183
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → MRPD
MRPD Automatic FTP Transfer
Enabled
184
Planning and Configuration Guide
v Yes
v No
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Network → Restricted Access
Print Jobs
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
SNMP
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
Online Access (Web Pages)
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
Productivity Tracking Feature
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
Ranges
v Inactive
v Active
Appendix B. Work Sheets
185
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing
New Device Name
1-12 alphanumeric characters
(including spaces)
New Device Type
v Coupled Preprocessor
v Coupled Postprocessor
v Advanced Postprocessor MICR
v Advanced Postprocessor Bar Code Checking
v UP3I Sequences
186
Planning and Configuration Guide
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → Postprocessing Options
Use Internal Stacker
Yes / No
Offsetter Enabled
Yes / No
BTS Enabled
Yes / No
Offset on Mark Forms
Yes / No
Appendix B. Work Sheets
187
Table 51. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Selected Values
Item
Available Values
Duplex
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → UP3I Devices
UP3I Device Name
Distance
188
Planning and Configuration Guide
Simplex
Printer 1
Printer 2
Simplex Definition Work Sheet
Record your configuration choices on this work sheet, and give a copy of the completed form to the
service representative when the printer is being installed. See Chapter 7, “Setting Printer Definition
Values,” on page 97 for detailed information about each item.
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Print Quality
Contrast
1 to 7
Boldness
0 to 100
Preheat Temperature
1 to 100
Fuser Temperature
1 to 100
Oil Rate
1 to 100
Oil Belt
2 to 100
Example Settings
Medium / Heavy
Appendix B. Work Sheets
189
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Print Quality → Beam Adjustments
Beam 1 Offset Adjustment
Cannot be changed.
N/A
Beam 2 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Beam 3 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Beam 4 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Beam 5 Offset Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
190
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Print Quality → PQE Adjustments
Beam Number
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Current Vector
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Vector Boldness
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Horizontal High
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Horizontal Low
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Vertical High
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Vertical Low
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Appendix B. Work Sheets
191
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Print Quality → Advanced
Use Backup Idler Roll
Yes / No
Preheat Offset)
-100 to 20
192
Planning and Configuration Guide
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Printer → Basic
Printer Mode
Simplex
Printer Speed
High / Low
Same Side Printing
Yes / No
Eject to Front Facing
v Enabled
v Disabled
Auto NPRO at EOF
Yes / No
Language
v English
v Spanish
v German
v Japanese Kanji
v French
v Italian
v Brazilian Portuguese
v Simplified Chinese
v Traditional Chinese
v Korean
v Russian
v Hungarian
Keyboard Language
v English
v Spanish
v German
v Japanese Kanji
v French
v Italian
v Brazilian Portuguese
v Simplified Chinese
v Traditional Chinese
v Korean
v Russian
v Hungarian
Appendix B. Work Sheets
193
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Printer → Setup
Snapshot Mode
(Service Change Only)
MICR Installed
v None
v Printer 1
v Printer 2
Jam Recovery Point Distance
0 to 700 inches
NPRO Length
0 to 1200 inches
Fuser Sleep Timeout
v None
v 1 Hour
v 2 Hours
v 4 Hours
Clear Memory for Security
Yes / No
Audible Alarm
Yes / No
Auto Align
Yes / No
Contact
Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumeric
characters
Printer Name
Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumeric
characters
Engine Name
Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumeric
characters
Printer Location
Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumeric
characters
Support Address Name
Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumeric
characters
Support Address URL
Text entry field - up to 255
alphnumeric characters
194
Planning and Configuration Guide
N/A
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Printer → Setup → Advanced
Stop on Toner Low
Yes / No
Open Clear Buffers Alert
Yes / No
Dual Sensor Installed
Yes / No
Required Log Entry Timeout
v Disabled
v 1 minute
v 2 minutes
v 4 minutes
v 15 minutes
v 30 minutes
Appendix B. Work Sheets
195
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Printer → Date/Time
Date and Time
yyyy=year, mm=month, dd=day,
hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=seconds
Time Zone
Time Zone
Time Source
196
Planning and Configuration Guide
Manual / Specific Network Server /
Any Network Server
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Printer → Service
Machine Serial
(CE change on initial configuration
only)
N/A
Print Count
(Service Change Only)
Backup Idler Roll Installed
(Service Change Only)
Toner Type
(Service Change Only)
Scan Factory Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
Process Factory Adjustment
(Service Change Only)
N/A
N/A
Appendix B. Work Sheets
197
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Printer → Resource Utilization (Service)
IPDS Font Usage
v High
v Medium
v Low
IPDS Page Segment Usage
v Unlimited (Disk)
v High (RAM)
v Medium (RAM)
v Low (RAM)
IPDS Overlay Usage
v High
v Medium
v Low
v None
IPDS Input Buffer Size
v Low
v Medium
v High
Output Buffer Size
v Low
v Medium
v High
198
Planning and Configuration Guide
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
Cut Sheet Emulation
v None
v Normal Left-to-Right
v Normal Right-to-Left
v Inverted Left-to-Right
v Inverted Right-to-Left
IPDS Printhead Resolution
v 480
v 600
The values available depend on the
model of the printer.
To have a selectable IPDS resolution,
select 600.
IPDS Resolution
v Automatic
v 240
v 300
v 600
The values available depend on the
model of the printer and the printhead
resolution selected.
Reprint Pages After Jams
v Yes
v No recovery for MICR pages
v No
Logical Page Increment
0 to 20 pels
3130 Bar Code Emulation
Yes / No
Simulate Color with Gray
Yes / No
Single-Byte Font Smoothing
Yes / No
Double-Byte Font Smoothing
Yes / No
Suppress Off Page Errors
Yes / No
Scale GOCA Lines
Yes / No
Appendix B. Work Sheets
199
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #1
DHCP Addressing
On / Off
DHCP Plug-and-Play
Enable / Disable
DHCP Time Out
1 to 300
IP Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of Local Host
IP Address of Primary and Secondary DNS
Server
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Media Speed
v Auto negotiation
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Default Gateway Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of Local Host
X.X.X.X where X is an alphanumeric
character
200
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #2 (Service)
DHCP Addressing
Not supported on the service adapter.
DHCP Plug-and-Play
Not supported on the service adapter.
DHCP Time Out
Not supported on the service adapter.
IP Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Subnet Mask
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Internet Name of Local Host
Not supported on the service adapter.
IP Address of Primary and Secondary DNS
Server
Not supported on the service adapter.
Media Speed
v Auto negotiation
v 10 Half Duplex
v 10 Full Duplex
v 100 Half Duplex
v 100 Full Duplex
Default Gateway Address
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
Domain Name of Local Host
X.X.X.X where X is an alphanumeric
character
Appendix B. Work Sheets
201
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → FICON
Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printer
controller, the adapter is automatically installed. Therefore, the Edit..., Install..., and Uninstall buttons are not
available on the Network - Adapters panel. Parameters for channel adapters are specified using the Network Protocols panel (Printer Definition → Network → Protocols).
202
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → ESCON
Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printer
controller, the adapter is automatically installed. Therefore, the Edit..., Install..., and Uninstall buttons are not
available on the Network - Adapters panel. Parameters for channel adapters are specified using the Network Protocols panel (Printer Definition → Network → Protocols).
Appendix B. Work Sheets
203
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → TCP
TCP Port
5001 to 65535
Data Timeout
0 to 300 seconds
Priority
1 to 10
204
Planning and Configuration Guide
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → FICON
Adapter Cards
v FICON Link A
v FICON Link B
Device Address
X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal notation)
Multi-Host Environment Flag
v True
v False
Maximum Block Length
v 32K
v 64K
Media Speed (FICON Link A)
v Autonegotiate
v 1 Gigabit
v 2 Gigabits
Media Speed FICON Link B
v Autonegotiate
v 1 Gigabit
v 2 Gigabits
Priority
1 to 10
Appendix B. Work Sheets
205
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → ESCON
Adapter Cards
v ESCON Link A
v ESCON Link B
Device Address
X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal notation)
Multi-Host Environment Flag
v True
v False
Maximum Block Length
v 32K
v 64K
Priority
206
Planning and Configuration Guide
1 to 10
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → FTP (Service)
Data Timeout
0 to 300 seconds
Priority
1 to 10
Appendix B. Work Sheets
207
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → SNMP
SNMP Agent Enabled
v Yes
v No
Allow to Configure Printer
v Yes
v No
SNMP Trap Host
X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255
SNMP Community Name
Alphanumeric characters
208
Planning and Configuration Guide
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → Online Access (Web Pages)
Online Access (Web Pages)
v Yes
v No
Appendix B. Work Sheets
209
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → E-mail
E-mail Enabled
v Yes
v No
Printer Supplies E-mail address
Text entry field
Printer Problems E-mail address
Text entry field
Printer Service E-mail address
Text entry field
Default Trace E-mail Destination
Text entry field
SMTP Mail Server Hostname or IP Address
Alphanumeric for hostname or dotted
decimal for IP address (X.X.X.X where
X ≤ 255)
SMTP Timeout
0 to 999
210
Planning and Configuration Guide
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → MRPD
MRPD Automatic FTP Transfer Enabled
v Yes
v No
Appendix B. Work Sheets
211
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Printer Definition → Network → Restricted Access
Print Jobs
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
SNMP
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
Online Access (Web Pages)
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
Productivity Tracking Feature
v Restricted
v Unrestricted
Ranges
v Inactive
v Unrestricted
v Active
212
Planning and Configuration Guide
Selected Value
Table 52. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)
Item
Available Values
Selected Value
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing
DEVICE Number__________
New Device Name
1-12 alphanumeric characters
(including spaces)
New Device Type
v Coupled Preprocessor
v Coupled Postprocessor
v Advanced Postprocessor - MICR
v Advanced Postprocessor - Bar
Code Checking
v UP3I Sequence
DEVICE Number__________
New Device Name
1-12 alphanumeric characters
(including spaces)
New Device Type
v Coupled Preprocessor
v Coupled Postprocessor
v Advanced Postprocessor - MICR
v Advanced Postprocessor - Bar
Code Checking
DEVICE Number__________
New Device Name
1-12 alphanumeric characters
(including spaces)
New Device Type
v Coupled Preprocessor
v Coupled Postprocessor
v Advanced Postprocessor - MICR
v Advanced Postprocessor - Bar
Code Checking
Appendix B. Work Sheets
213
Snapshots Work Sheet
Use the work sheet on page 215 to record Snapshot settings. You have the option of saving all settings or
of saving only form settings. Your service representative can use the Printer - Setup panel (Printer
Definition → Printer → Setup) to select whether to save all settings or save only form settings. Make
copies of the work sheets as necessary.
You may also find it helpful to make notes about loading techniques, adjusting print values, or other
information that may be particular to certain Snapshots.
214
Planning and Configuration Guide
Table 53. Snapshots work sheet
Snapshot:
Setting
Value:
Notes:
Forms → Form Settings
v Length
v _______________
v Width
v _______________
v Unit of Measure
v _______________
v IPDS Form Name
v _______________
v IPDS Host Setup ID
v _______________
v Form Bar Code
v _______________
v Form Type
v _______________
v Oversize Paper
v _______________
v Paper Weight
v _______________
v Registration Marks
– Printer Registration Marks
– TOF Offset
Forms → Print Registration
v Paper Feed Direction for
Printer 2
v _______________
v Paper Feed Direction for
Printer 1
v _______________
v Across paper Feed Direction
for Printer 2
v _______________
v _______________
v Across paper Feed Direction
for Printer 1
Printer Definition → Print Quality
v Contrast
v _______________
v Boldness
v _______________
v Preheat Temperature
v _______________
v Fuser Temperature
v _______________
v Oil Rate
v _______________
v Oil Belt Speed
v _______________
v Advanced
v _______________
– Use Backup Idler Roll
– _______________
– Preheat Offset (CE only)
– _______________
Printer Definition → Printer →Basic
v Printer Speed
v _______________
v Front Sheet Sequence
v _______________
v Eject to Front Facing
v _______________
v Auto NPRO at EOF
v _______________
Printer Definition → Printer → Setup
v Jam Recovery Point Distance
v _______________
Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS
Appendix B. Work Sheets
215
Table 53. Snapshots work sheet (continued)
Snapshot:
Setting
Value:
Notes:
Forms → Form Settings
v Cutsheet Emulation
v _______________
v Reprint Pages after Jams
v _______________
v IPDS Resolution
v _______________
v IPDS Printhead Resolution
v _______________
Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → Postprocessing Options
v Use Internal Stacker
v _______________
v Offsetter Enabled
v _______________
v BTS Enabled
v _______________
v Offset on Mark Forms
216
Planning and Configuration Guide
Appendix C. Standard Power Plug Listings
Chapter Overview
Table 54 shows the applicable standard and a diagram of the power plug for common plug types.
Diagrams show the contact arrangement and dimensions. Plug dimensions are nominal and are given for
reference purposes only. Pole and wire configurations are 2-pole, 3-wire plugs. Diagrams of power plugs
requiring polarization are so marked. Single-phase plugs may be marked with the E, G, or earth symbol for
protective earth, and N or W for neutral.
Devices are rated for 10 Amperes and you should ensure that the appropriate service is provided.
Table 54. Standard power plugs for control unit, printer utility module, and Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit
Country or Region
Standard
Bahamas, Barbados,
Bermuda, Bolivia,
Brazil, Canada,
Cayman Islands,
Columbia, Costa Rica,
Domican Republic,
Ecuador, El Salvador,
Guatemala, Guayana,
Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, South
Korea, Mexico,
Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama,
Peru, Phillipines,
Puerto Rico, Saudi
Arabia, Suriname,
Trinidad, Taiwan,
U.S.A., Venezuela
NEMA WD-1 6–15P
Argentina, Australia,
Columbia, New
Zealand, Paraguay,
Uruguay
IEC 83–A5 1957
Power Plug Diagram
18.29
(.72)
6.35
(.25)
30
7.92
(.312)
10.16
(.4)
21.34
(.675)
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
1.52
(.06)
217
Table 54. Standard power plugs for control unit, printer utility module, and Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit (continued)
Country or Region
Denmark
Standard
Power Plug Diagram
NORMBLAD 4
36.5 -+ 0.5
19 -+ 0.5
19 -+ 0.2
min.3.5
13 -+ 0.3
O4.8 -+ 0.06
0
4-0.1
14 -+ 0.5
O6-0.06
Abu Dhabi, Austria,
CEE7 VII
Belgium, Bulgaria,
Botswana, Egypt,
Finland, France,
Germany, Greece,
Iceland, Indonesia,
South Korea, Lebanon,
Luxembourg, China
(Macao S.A.R.),
Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Saudi Arabia,
Spain, Sudan, Sweden,
Turkey, Yugoslavia
Israel
218
SII-32–1971
Planning and Configuration Guide
0
3-0.2
45
Table 54. Standard power plugs for control unit, printer utility module, and Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit (continued)
Country or Region
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy
Standard
Power Plug Diagram
CEI 23–16
INSULATING
COLLAR
Bangladesh, Burma,
Pakistan, South Africa,
Sri-Lanka
SABS 164, BS 546
INSULATING COLLAR
Switzerland
SEV SN 416534
NEUTRAL PIN
EARTH PIN
Bahrain, Bermuda,
BS 1363
Brunei, Channel
Islands, Cyprus,
Ghana, China (Hong
Kong S.A.R.), India,
Iraq, Ireland, Jordan,
Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi,
Malaysia, Nigeria,
Oman, People’s
Republic of China,
Singapore, Tanzania,
Uganda, United Arab
Emirates, United
Kingdom, Zambia
FUSE UNDER COVER
INSULATING
COLLAR
Appendix C. Standard Power Plug Listings
219
220
Planning and Configuration Guide
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
Printing documents in full color or with very high-quality black and white (grayscale) images is more
complex than printing black and white or spot-color documents. Understanding some of the principles of
color and grayscale printing and how various InfoPrint products can fit into color and grayscale solutions
can help you integrate color and grayscale printing with your current operations or expand to implement
new color workflows.
InfoPrint AFP color and grayscale solutions
You can assemble printing products from InfoPrint Solutions Company and other companies in different
configurations to support Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) color and grayscale printing, including
configurations that use the AFP Color Management Object Content Architecture™ (CMOCA™) to provide
optimal performance and color accuracy in high-speed color printing.
Color printing without explicit color management
You can include color images or specify colors for AFP objects in your print jobs and send them to an AFP
color printer. The color images and objects print in color, based on the default settings in your print server
and printer.
If you like the colors that the default color management settings provide, or if it is not essential that you
print in exactly the right colors, you probably do not need to implement a full color management solution.
However, if you want better control over the consistency and accuracy of your colors across devices, you
might consider color management at some point in the future.
To understand some of the basic concepts about color printing, see:
v “Color printing concepts” on page 222
v “Grayscale printing concepts” on page 226
Resources that document composition software includes inline
Most often, print bureaus use document composition software to generate highly customized and
personalized color output. AFP color management is largely built into the document composition tools that
support their processes. The software puts all the resources that the printer needs into the print job and
sends it to an InfoPrint print server. The print server sends the print job to the printer, and the printer uses
the resources as appropriate.
Using this method, you know that the required resources, including the resources required for color
management, are available for any print job that is sent to the printer. However, including all the resources
can make the print job very large, and moving large print jobs through your system might slow down
system performance. Also, you might not be able to save resources that are downloaded with a print job
on the printer so they can be reused without being downloaded later.
For more information about color printing, see:
v General information about color printing and color management:
– “Color printing concepts” on page 222
– “Color management” on page 227
v “Tips for images” on page 240
v Scenario describing a possible implementation:
“Eliminating physical inserts” on page 251
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
221
For a list of the companies that participate in the AFP Consortium and support AFP color management in
their products, see:
http://www.afpcolor.org
Resources stored and managed centrally
To take full advantage of the AFP CMOCA, you can store your color and image resources in a central
resource library, and let your print system manage those resources. This option optimizes system
performance by:
v Creating some of the color management resources for you automatically
v Reducing the number of color conversion resources that the system creates at print time by generating
link color conversion color management resources in advance
v Reducing the size of some images by removing embedded profiles when you store them, yet still
retaining the association between the image and the profile
v Letting you mark resources as capturable, so they can be saved on the printer and used in other print
jobs without being downloaded again
For an introduction to the full AFP CMOCA and how you might implement it, see:
v General information about color and grayscale printing and color management:
– “Color printing concepts”
– “Grayscale printing concepts” on page 226
– “Color management” on page 227
v “AFP color management” on page 229
v “InfoPrint AFP color and grayscale products” on page 241
v “AFP color solution scenarios” on page 246
v “Related publications” on page 253
v Scenario describing a possible implementation:
“Replacing pre-printed forms” on page 248
Color printing concepts
Color printing is significantly more complicated than black and white printing. If you understand some of
the complexities, you can make the transition from black and white printing to grayscale or color printing
more smoothly.
Color spaces and ICC profiles
Presentation devices, such as computer monitors and printers, create colors differently. Because of these
differences, colors must be described differently for each device. The different methods of describing
colors are called color spaces. In addition, each device might have one or more International Color
Consortium (ICC) profiles associated with it. ICC profiles are used when an image or another object is
converted to the color space of a different device.
Each device has its own individual color space and range of colors that it can display or print. The color
space specifies how color information is represented in an image when it is displayed on a particular
device. As the image is passed from one device to the next, the color information about the image is
converted from the color space of the source device to the color space of the destination device. Because
color spaces do not exactly match between devices, some of the color information can be lost or modified
in the conversion process.
A color space is a representation of the individual colors that can be combined to create other colors.
Some color spaces that are relevant to printing are:
222
Planning and Configuration Guide
v RGB
In an RGB color space, red, green, and blue light are combined in different amounts and intensities to
create different colors. RGB colors are often specified as single-byte integers numbered from 0 through
255. You can specify 256 levels of intensity for each of the three colors. For example:
– R=0, G=0, B=0 yields black
– R=255, G=255, B=255 yields white
– R=251 , G=254 , B=141 yields a pale yellow
– R=210, G=154, B=241 yields a light purple
Devices such as monitors, digital cameras, and scanners generally use RGB color spaces to describe
colors. Two standard implementations of RGB color spaces are sRGB, which is most often used for
Web graphics, and Adobe® RGB (1998), which we recommend for graphics that are printed.
v CMYK
In a CMYK color space, cyan (bright blue), magenta (bright red-pink), yellow, and black pigments are
combined to create different colors. CMYK values are often represented as a percentage. The
percentage represents the portion of a particular area of paper that is covered by ink or toner. For
example:
– C=0%, M=0%, Y=0%, K=100% yields black
– C=0%, M=0%, Y=0%, K=0% yields a blank area on the page
– C=1.6%, M=0%, Y=44.7%, K=.4% yields a pale yellow
– C=17.6%, M=39.6%, Y=5.5%, K=5.5% yields a light purple
Color printers use the CMYK color space; they are loaded with ink or toner in each color. When the
printer places dots of the correct sizes next to and on top of each other on a page, your eye interprets
them as the intended color.
Implementations of the CMYK color space vary from printer to printer and from paper to paper. Because
the original color space of most images is an RGB color space, it is best to leave images in an RGB
color space so they retain their original characteristics. That way, your print server or printer has as
much of the original color information as possible when it converts the images to the most appropriate
CMYK color space for the printer and paper combination.
If you save an image using the CMYK color space, make sure that you either save an ICC profile for
that color space or use a standard non-device specific CMYK color space like SWOP or Coated
FOGRA27 and associate the appropriate ICC profile with the image.
Note: Both RGB and CMYK values can be expressed in different ways. For example, in the PostScript®
data stream, the values range from 0.0 to 1.0, while in some graphic arts programs they can be
expressed in hexadecimal numbers or as percentages.
An ICC profile contains information for converting an image between a device-specific color space and a
device-independent color space. A device-independent color space is a color space that does not depend
on or relate to the characteristics of any particular device, but rather contains all colors across all gamuts.
The ICC identified a specific Profile Connection Space (PCS) as the target device-independent color space
for all ICC profiles.
You can use an input ICC profile to translate color data created on one device (such as a digital camera)
into the PCS. Then you can use an output ICC profile to convert from the PCS into the native color space
of a different device (such as a printer). Converting images from one color space to another is
process-intensive and can affect performance in your print system, although it is the best way to maintain
consistent color across the devices in your system.
Related concepts
“ICC profiles” on page 227
The International Color Consortium (ICC) is an organization that has established open standards for
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
223
color management. These standards help products work together by identifying a device-independent
color space and defining the elements of an ICC profile.
Gamut and rendering intent
Every device has a gamut, a range of colors or shades of colors that it can display or print. Some devices
have larger gamuts than others; some devices have gamuts that are similar sizes, but that contain slightly
different colors. When an image or a print job is created on a device with a gamut that is different from the
printer, you can use a rendering intent to tell the printer how to adjust the colors that are outside the gamut
of the printer.
The gamut of a printer is almost always significantly smaller than the gamut of a monitor, digital camera, or
scanner. Images or graphics nearly always have to be adjusted to print appropriately because some of the
colors that they require might be outside the gamut of the printer.
A rendering intent tells the printer how to adjust the image when it encounters colors that it cannot
reproduce. Each rendering intent has different benefits and trade-offs, so you can choose one based on
how the print output should look.
Related concepts
“Rendering intents” on page 228
Rendering intents indicate what you want a printer to do with colors that are outside its gamut.
Color mixing and calibration
Four standard colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) are blended to create all the colors in the gamut
of a printer. A printer mixes colors by printing four layers of a page or an image, one in each color. If the
printer registration is not set correctly, the images do not line up properly and the colors appear wrong. In
addition, the printer must be calibrated to ensure that all its systems are functioning correctly and that it is
in a known good state.
Using the color information described in its color space, each device determines the amount of cyan,
magenta, yellow, or black to use. Dots of each color are printed in overlapping patterns that, when
interpreted by your eyes, blend the colors appropriately. To ensure the colors are created accurately, the
color planes must be perfectly aligned. If they are not, you might see moire patterns, unintended patterns
in the printed images, or poorly blended colors, which are especially noticeable on the edges of your
images.
Color printers must be calibrated regularly, in some cases daily, to ensure that the colors they produce are
consistent. In addition, follow the recommended printhead maintenance procedures and schedule to
ensure that the printer operates optimally. Even when a printer is calibrated correctly, its gamut is much
smaller than that of any monitor, so images do not look the same when they are printed as they do when
they are displayed on a monitor.
Related concepts
“Paper characteristics” on page 229
The paper that you use has a significant impact on the colors that you see. Even if you use the same
ICC profile and the same printer, printing on a different paper can result in a very different color
appearance.
Halftones and tone transfer curves
Halftones are used to convert images (such as photographs, drawings, logos, or charts) from the
continuous tones that you see on a monitor into a pattern of dots that a printer can put on paper. Tone
transfer curves are used to modify the values of a particular color component and thus adjust the look and
feel of some of the colors. For example, you can apply a tone transfer curve to emphasize the brightest
parts of an image.
224
Planning and Configuration Guide
Halftones and tone transfer curves are used with both color and grayscale print jobs.
There are several different kinds of halftones, including clustered-dot, stochastic, and error diffusion. For
simplicity, this discussion only covers clustered-dot halftones.
Clustered-dot halftones are generally characterized by:
v Line screen frequency
Line screen frequency is a measure of the resolution of a halftone, expressed in lines per inch (lpi). A
low line screen frequency, such as 80 lpi, creates coarser images because they use larger halftone
dots. A high line screen frequency, such as 150 lpi, can produce higher quality images by using smaller
halftone dots.
v Halftone pattern
Halftone dots are printed in various shapes and patterns. For example, dots can generally be round,
elliptical, or square, and they can be arranged in slightly different orientations. The halftone pattern also
describes how the size of the dot is increased to cover a larger percentage of the total area and yield
darker colors. Different patterns might produce better results for some print jobs.
v Rotation
Lines of halftone dots do not run parallel with the top or side of the paper because that could cause
unintended patterns to emerge, resulting in lower quality output.
In addition, the dots for each of the four colors in a CMYK printer cannot all be printed at the same
angle because they would overlap incorrectly and the colors would not appear as intended. Instead, the
lines of dots are printed on the page at specific angles so your eye blends them appropriately.
For example, the black layer of an image might be printed so the lines of dots run across the page at a
45 degree angle to the top of the paper, while the cyan layer is printed so that its lines of dots are at a
105 degree angle to the top of the paper.
Tone transfer curves are most often used to offset the effects of dot gain. Dot gain is the tendency for
printed dots to be larger than intended, often because of the way ink reacts with paper. If the ink soaks
into the paper and spreads out, the resulting dot is much larger (and possibly much lighter in color) than
the printer intended it to be. Tone transfer curves can increase or reduce the amount of ink used in
proportion to the dot gain.
Related concepts
“Halftone CMRs” on page 232
Halftone CMRs carry the information that a printer uses to convert print jobs into a pattern of dots that
it can put on paper. Halftone CMRs can be used with both color and grayscale print jobs.
“Tone transfer curve CMRs” on page 233
Tone transfer curve CMRs are used to carry tone transfer curve information for an AFP print job, so
you can modify the values of a particular color component and adjust the appearance of some of the
colors by increasing or decreasing the amount of ink used to emphasize or reduce the effects of dot
gain on the final output.
File size
Color print jobs can have a file size that is much larger than black and white print jobs. The larger file size
can lead to longer processing times and increased traffic on your network.
Because color images must contain data about each layer of color, the file might contain three to four
times more information than a grayscale file and over 24 times more information than a black and white
file. In addition, ICC profiles are embedded in some file types (such as TIFF images). While ICC profiles
by themselves might not be very large, they do increase the size of an image. If you only have one image
repeated throughout a print job, and if you construct your job so the image is downloaded only once, the
embedded profile is of little concern.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
225
However, if you use a variety of different images, each with an embedded profile, or if you construct your
print job so that each image is downloaded every time it appears, the embedded profiles can add
unnecessary volume to the print job. If you plan to use a wide variety of color images, create or save them
with the same color space so they all use the same ICC profile. You can also install color images in a
resource library so they can be reused.
Related concepts
“Tips and best practices” on page 240
These general guidelines about creating and managing images and other color resources can improve
the performance of your AFP color printing system.
“Data objects” on page 237
Presentation data objects contain a single type of data (such as TIFF, GIF, and JPEG images) and can
be used in your print jobs. These data objects can be placed directly in a page or overlay or can be
defined as resources and included in pages or overlays. Using a data object as a resource is more
efficient when that object appears more than once in a print job; resources are downloaded to the
printer just once and referenced as needed.
Grayscale printing concepts
Grayscale printing lets you reproduce color images as high-quality black and white images, using many
shades of gray to represent subtle variations in color and light. Printing solutions that produce high-quality
grayscale output use color printing concepts with a black and white printer that supports them to achieve
that effect.
Moving to grayscale printing might be a first step in a migration to full color printing. You can start to create
color print jobs and print them on an existing printer until you are ready to invest in color printers. In
addition, you can use a grayscale printer as a backup system for a full color printer.
Some color concepts are much less important in grayscale printing than they are in color printing:
v The gamut of a black and white printer is much smaller than that of a color printer; essentially all the
colors in an image must be adjusted.
v The rendering intent you choose has little effect on the appearance of the image because the colors are
already being changed significantly.
v Page registration is less important. Because the printer only uses one color, you do not have to line up
the color planes to create the correct color.
v Paper characteristics have minimal effect on grayscale output; one output profile is usually adequate for
all types of paper.
Other color concepts are more essential to grayscale printing.
Color spaces and ICC profiles
The color space of a black and white printer is much smaller than that of a color printer. Even so, printers
that can print grayscale images have output ICC profiles, just like color printers. The ICC profiles for black
and white printers map colors from the Profile Connection Space (PCS) to shades of gray. Otherwise, the
color conversion process is the same.
The print job should specify the appropriate input profile; if there is no input ICC profile, the printer uses a
reasonable default. The printer has its own default ICC profile installed and available; it should be
adequate for nearly all print jobs.
Halftones
Grayscale printers apply halftones to print jobs to print them; halftones let the printer produce many
shades of gray and high-quality images. Generally, the most important characteristic to consider for
226
Planning and Configuration Guide
halftones in grayscale printing is line screen frequency, expressed in lines per inch (lpi). Each printer
supports a set of line screen frequencies natively; when you specify the desired line screen frequency in a
print job, the printer chooses the available line screen frequency that best matches it.
Tone transfer curves
Tone transfer curves are used in grayscale printing to adjust the amount of toner that is used at different
levels of gray, thus adjusting the appearance of images. You can use the appearance value of a tone
transfer curve in grayscale printing to indicate how much the tone transfer curve should adjust the color
values. Some sample appearance values could be:
v Dark
v Highlight Midtone
v Standard
Related concepts
“InfoPrint 4100” on page 243
The InfoPrint 4100 family of printers uses a laser, electrophotographic print technology and Advanced
Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs to create high-quality text and graphics output.
InfoPrint 4100 printers with the InfoPrint POWER architecture and microcode release 15.4 or later
support the AFP color management architecture and can be used to print very high-quality grayscale
images.
Color management
Images, graphics, and photographs often appear different depending on the monitor or the printer you use.
The colors printed by one printer might not match the colors printed on another printer, even if they came
from the same source. If it is important that colors stay consistent from camera, scanner, or monitor to
printer, you must use color management practices.
It is virtually impossible to accurately reproduce the colors that you see on your monitor on a printed page.
Because printers typically have smaller color gamuts than other devices, some of the colors must always
be adjusted when images are transformed for printing. With color management, you can control the
adjustments so they are less noticeable than they might be if you use the default settings of your image
creation software, print server, and printer.
Several factors play significant roles in color management, including ICC profiles, rendering intents, and
paper characteristics.
ICC profiles
The International Color Consortium (ICC) is an organization that has established open standards for color
management. These standards help products work together by identifying a device-independent color
space and defining the elements of an ICC profile.
The device-independent color space that the ICC defined is called the profile connection space (PCS). The
PCS is a color space large enough to include all the color gamuts of different input, display, and output
devices. An ICC profile contains methods that map the colors that a device can create or display to the
values of the corresponding colors in the PCS. The ICC profile can be used to convert an image from a
device-specific color space to the PCS, or from the PCS to a device-specific color space.
Product manufacturers create ICC profiles that you can use with their devices. For example, if you take a
photograph with a digital camera, you can associate the photograph with the ICC profile for your camera.
Then, when you want to print that photograph, the color management system converts the color data from
the camera into the PCS. The printer then uses its ICC profile to convert the photograph data from the
PCS into its color space, and prints the photograph as accurately as it can.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
227
For more information about the ICC, ICC profiles, and the PCS, see the ICC Web site:
http://www.color.org
Related concepts
“Color spaces and ICC profiles” on page 222
Presentation devices, such as computer monitors and printers, create colors differently. Because of
these differences, colors must be described differently for each device. The different methods of
describing colors are called color spaces. In addition, each device might have one or more
International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles associated with it. ICC profiles are used when an image
or another object is converted to the color space of a different device.
Rendering intents
Rendering intents indicate what you want a printer to do with colors that are outside its gamut.
ICC profiles support these rendering intents:
v Perceptual
If an image includes any colors that are out-of-gamut for the printer, the printer adjusts all the colors in
the image, even those that are already in the gamut of the printer, so they are all in-gamut and maintain
their color relationships to each other. The result is an image that is visually pleasing, but is not
colorimetrically accurate. The perceptual rendering intent is useful for general reproduction of images,
particularly photographs.
v Saturation
If a print job includes colors that are out-of-gamut for the printer, the printer replaces the out-of-gamut
color with the nearest color in the gamut. It also adjusts the in-gamut colors so that they are more vivid.
Saturation is the least used rendering intent, but it is useful for business graphics, such as images that
contain charts or diagrams.
v Media-relative colorimetric
If a print job includes colors that are out-of-gamut for the printer, the printer substitutes the nearest
in-gamut color; in-gamut colors are not adjusted. Colors printed on papers with different media white
points might not match visually. The media white point is the color of the paper that the print job is
printed on. For example, if you print an image on white paper, on off-white paper, and on blue paper
using the media-relative colorimetric rendering intent, the printer uses the same amount of ink or toner
for each one and the resulting color is technically the same. However, the images might seem different
because your eyes adjust to the color of the background and interpret the color differently. This
rendering intent is typically used for vector graphics.
v Absolute colorimetric
All colors are mapped using the same method as the media-relative colorimetric rendering intent,
however, all colors are adjusted for the media white point. For example, if you print an image on white
paper, on off-white paper, and on blue paper using the media-relative colorimetric rendering intent, the
printer adjusts the ink or toner used for each one. The resulting color is technically not same, but the
images might look the same because of the way your eyes interpret them in relationship to the color of
the paper. The absolute colorimetric rendering intent is typically used for logos.
Related concepts
“Gamut and rendering intent” on page 224
Every device has a gamut, a range of colors or shades of colors that it can display or print. Some
devices have larger gamuts than others; some devices have gamuts that are similar sizes, but that
contain slightly different colors. When an image or a print job is created on a device with a gamut that
is different from the printer, you can use a rendering intent to tell the printer how to adjust the colors
that are outside the gamut of the printer.
228
Planning and Configuration Guide
Paper characteristics
The paper that you use has a significant impact on the colors that you see. Even if you use the same ICC
profile and the same printer, printing on a different paper can result in a very different color appearance.
Colors can change from paper to paper, particularly if you change from coated to uncoated paper or from
sheet-fed to continuous forms paper. The changes can be so noticeable that printer manufacturers
generally test and certify papers with certain characteristics for use with their printers. They also create
different ICC profiles for their printers based on paper characteristics. Some ICC profiles can be used for
groups of papers that have similar characteristics.
When you load paper, you set certain paper characteristics on the printer. When the printer chooses the
correct device-specific output profile to use, it takes the characteristics into consideration. The paper
characteristics are:
v Media brightness
The percentage of light that the paper reflects
v Media color
The color of the paper
v Media finish
The characteristics of the surface of the paper, such as: glossy, satin, matte
v Media weight
The basic weight of the paper
Related concepts
“Color mixing and calibration” on page 224
Four standard colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) are blended to create all the colors in the
gamut of a printer. A printer mixes colors by printing four layers of a page or an image, one in each
color. If the printer registration is not set correctly, the images do not line up properly and the colors
appear wrong. In addition, the printer must be calibrated to ensure that all its systems are functioning
correctly and that it is in a known good state.
AFP color management
You can use various ways to print color data with Advanced Function Presentation (AFP). However, to
implement an AFP color printing solution with full color management, you must use color management
resources (CMRs). We also recommend that you install all of your color images as data objects and
associate CMRs with them.
Color management resources
Color management resources (CMRs) are the foundation of color management in AFP print systems. They
are AFP resources that provide all the color management information, such as ICC profiles and halftones,
that an AFP system needs to process a print job and maintain consistent color from one device to another.
CMRs share some characteristics with other AFP resources, but are different in some important ways.
CMRs are similar to other AFP resources in these ways:
v CMRs can be associated with elements of a print job at various levels of the hierarchy.
Normal hierarchy rules apply, so CMRs specified at lower levels override those at the higher level. For
example, a CMR set on a data object overrides a default CMR set on a print file.
v CMRs can be included in a print job in an inline resource group and referenced in a form definition,
page environment, object environment, or an include Object (IOB) structured field.
Note: CMRs can vary in size from several hundred bytes to several megabytes. If your print job uses
relatively few CMRs, including them in the print file might not have an impact on the performance
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
229
of your system. However, if your print job uses more than 10 CMRs, the size of the print job can
increase so much that file transfer rates and network traffic are affected.
v CMRs can be stored centrally in a resource library, so you do not need to include them in every print
job.
You can configure all your print servers so they can access the CMRs.
v For the print server to find CMRs, the resource library must be listed in the AFP resource search path
on the print server.
CMRs are different from other AFP resources in these ways:
v You cannot copy CMRs into a resource library as you can other AFP resources.
To store CMRs in a central resource library, you must install them using an application such as AFP
Resource Installer.
v CMRs and data objects must be stored in resource libraries that have resource access tables (RATs).
AFP Resource Installer creates the RAT when CMRs and data objects are installed. We recommend
that CMRs and data objects be installed in separate resource libraries and that you store resources that
do not require RATs (such as form definitions, page definitions, and overlays) in other resource libraries.
v CMRs installed in a resource library can have names longer than 8 characters, and you can use the
names in the print data stream.
These names are created when you install the CMR using AFP Resource Installer and are UTF-16BE
encoded.
Related concepts
“Resource library management” on page 239
If you store CMRs and data objects in central resource libraries, you must understand some of the
characteristics of resource libraries to make sure that your resources are available when and where
you need them.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
Types of CMRs
Different situations call for different types of CMRs. Some CMRs are created by product manufacturers so
you can download and use them, while others are created by your printer or other color management
software. If you have the appropriate information, you can also create CMRs yourself.
Some CMRs are used to interpret input files (similar to the function performed by ICC input profiles), while
others are used to prepare the final print job output for a specific printer (similar to the function performed
by ICC output profiles).
Related concepts
“CMR processing modes” on page 234
CMR processing modes tell the print system how to apply a CMR to the print data it is associated with.
You specify a CMR processing mode whenever you specify a CMR, although not all modes are valid
for all CMR types.
Color conversion CMRs:
Color conversion CMRs are used to convert colors to and from the ICC Profile Connection Space (PCS), a
device-independent color space. You can use them to prepare images for color or grayscale printing.
Color conversion CMRs are an essential element of any AFP color management system because they are
ICC profiles encapsulated in AFP structures. The AFP structures add information that your color
management system can use, but it leaves the ICC profile unaltered.
230
Planning and Configuration Guide
You can use color conversion CMRs to produce consistent colors on different devices. In a color system,
they help ensure that the colors on your monitor are as close as possible to those that are printed. If you
move the print job to a different printer, the colors are adjusted again to match the new printer.
In a grayscale system, color conversion CMRs map colors to appropriate shades of gray to produce
high-quality black and white images.
Related concepts
“ICC profiles” on page 227
The International Color Consortium (ICC) is an organization that has established open standards for
color management. These standards help products work together by identifying a device-independent
color space and defining the elements of an ICC profile.
Link color conversion CMRs
Link color conversion CMRs combine the processing information required to convert an image from the
color space of an input device to the PCS, and then from the PCS to the color space of the output
device. Essentially, link color conversion CMRs replace a pair of color conversion CMRs.
Link color conversion CMRs:
Link color conversion CMRs combine the processing information required to convert an image from the
color space of an input device to the PCS, and then from the PCS to the color space of the output device.
Essentially, link color conversion CMRs replace a pair of color conversion CMRs.
Converting color images to and from the PCS takes a significant amount of processing resources, in part
because the process includes two conversions. Link color conversion CMRs combine the two conversions
and make them more efficient. The printer can use the link color conversion CMR to convert colors directly
from the color space of the input device to the color space of the output device with the same color fidelity
they would have if the printer did both of the conversions. As a result, link color conversion CMRs can
improve system performance.
Link color conversion CMRs are unique. You cannot create a link color conversion CMR yourself and you
do not include references to link color conversion CMRs in your print jobs. The print system creates and
uses link color conversion CMRs automatically.
If you use AFP Resource Installer, link color conversion CMRs are generated automatically when you
create or install a color conversion CMR. As a result, your resource library always contains link color
conversion CMRs for every combination of color conversion CMRs in audit (input) and instruction (output)
processing modes. When link color conversion CMRs are created, AFP Resource Installer marks them as
capturable, so the printer can save them to be used in other print jobs.
If you do not use AFP Resource Installer, your printer might create link color conversion CMRs when it
processes print jobs. For example, if you send a print job to an InfoPrint 5000, the printer controller looks
at the audit color conversion CMRs that are specified. Then, the print controller looks at the link color
conversion CMRs that it has available to find one that combines the audit color conversion CMR with the
appropriate instruction color conversion CMR. If it does not find one, the print controller creates the link
color conversion CMR and uses it. The print controller might save the link color conversion CMRs that it
creates, but they can be removed during normal operation; for example, if the printer runs out of storage
or is shut down. If the link is removed, the printer must create a new link color conversion the next time it
is needed.
When a link color conversion CMR is created, the print system evaluates the conversion algorithms to and
from the PCS. The system then combines the algorithms, so a data object can be converted directly from
one color space to the other without actually being converted to the PCS.
Related concepts
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
231
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
“Color conversion CMRs” on page 230
Color conversion CMRs are used to convert colors to and from the ICC Profile Connection Space
(PCS), a device-independent color space. You can use them to prepare images for color or grayscale
printing.
“InfoPrint 5000” on page 242
The InfoPrint 5000 is a full-color, high-speed, continuous forms Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)
printer that supports AFP color management.
Halftone CMRs:
Halftone CMRs carry the information that a printer uses to convert print jobs into a pattern of dots that it
can put on paper. Halftone CMRs can be used with both color and grayscale print jobs.
Halftone CMRs generally specify the line screen frequency, halftone pattern, and rotation of the halftone
that they carry. Device-specific halftone CMRs might also include the printer resolution.
A printer that uses AFP color management to print color or grayscale print jobs must use a halftone CMR
to convert the print job into a format that the printer can reproduce in ink or toner. If a halftone CMR is not
specified in the print job, the printer applies a default halftone CMR.
Note: If you send your color print jobs to an InfoPrint 5000 printer, halftones are applied by the print
engine. As a result, the printer ignores halftone CMR requests.
You can associate device-specific halftone CMRs or generic halftone CMRs with print jobs:
v If you know which printer is printing the job, you can associate a device-specific halftone CMR with the
print job (or with AFP resources inside the print job). The printer uses the halftone CMR that you
specify.
v If you do not know which printer is printing the job, but you want to ensure that it uses a halftone CMR
that has certain characteristics, such as a specific line screen frequency, you can associate a generic
halftone CMR with the print job.
Because it is difficult to know which halftone CMRs should be used for the current conditions on the
current printer, we recommend that you specify halftone CMRs generically and let the printer choose the
most appropriate CMR that it has available.
Generic halftone CMRs
You can use generic halftone CMRs when you want to choose one or more characteristics of the halftone
CMR for a print job, but you do not know exactly which halftone CMRs are available.
When a print job specifies a generic halftone CMR, the print server looks in the resource library for
halftone CMRs that match the printer device type and model. If the print server finds an appropriate CMR,
it sends the device-specific halftone CMR to the printer with the print job. If the print server does not find
an appropriate halftone CMR, it sends the generic halftone CMR to the printer.
If a print job arrives at the printer requesting a generic halftone CMR, the printer compares the requested
characteristics with the available device-specific halftone CMRs. If there is a match, the printer uses the
selected device-specific halftone CMR when it processes the print job. If there is no match, the printer
uses the halftone CMR whose line screen frequency value is closest to the one requested.
The Color Management Object Content Architecture (CMOCA) has defined a variety of generic halftone
CMRs, which cover the most common line screen frequencies and halftone types. A print server that
supports CMOCA can interpret generic halftone CMRs if it has device-specific halftone CMRs available to
232
Planning and Configuration Guide
it in a resource library. If you use AFP Resource Installer, the generic halftone CMRs are installed in every
resource library that you create and populate using AFP Resource Installer.
Printers that support CMOCA should be able to interpret those generic CMRs and associate them with
device-specific halftone CMRs.
Related concepts
“Halftones and tone transfer curves” on page 224
Halftones are used to convert images (such as photographs, drawings, logos, or charts) from the
continuous tones that you see on a monitor into a pattern of dots that a printer can put on paper. Tone
transfer curves are used to modify the values of a particular color component and thus adjust the look
and feel of some of the colors. For example, you can apply a tone transfer curve to emphasize the
brightest parts of an image.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
Tone transfer curve CMRs:
Tone transfer curve CMRs are used to carry tone transfer curve information for an AFP print job, so you
can modify the values of a particular color component and adjust the appearance of some of the colors by
increasing or decreasing the amount of ink used to emphasize or reduce the effects of dot gain on the
final output.
Like halftone CMRs, tone transfer curve CMRs are associated with print jobs specifically or generically. If
they are specified generically, the print server looks in the resource library for tone transfer curve CMRs
that match the printer device type and model. If the print server finds an appropriate CMR, it sends the
device-specific tone transfer curve CMR to the printer with the print job. If the print server does not find an
appropriate tone transfer curve CMR, it sends the generic tone transfer curve CMR to the printer.
If a print job arrives at the printer requesting a generic tone transfer curve CMR, the printer compares the
requested characteristics with the device-specific tone transfer curve CMRs that it has available. If there is
a match, the print server or printer uses the selected device-specific tone transfer curve CMR when it
processes the print job. If the printer cannot find a good match for the generic tone transfer curve CMR, it
ignores the request and uses its default tone transfer curve CMR.
The Color Management Object Content Architecture (CMOCA) defines several generic tone transfer curve
CMRs with different appearance values. The appearance values let you specify how to print your job with
regard to the reported dot gain of the printer.
Generic tone transfer curves can be used to select these appearance values:
v Dark
The output is adjusted to show a dot gain of 33% for a 50% dot.
v Accutone
The output is adjusted to show a dot gain of 22% for a 50% dot.
v Highlight Midtone
The output is adjusted to show a dot gain of 14% for a 50% dot. This appearance might be used to
emphasize the brightest part of an image.
v Standard
The output is adjusted just enough to account for the effects of dot gain, effectively counteracting the
dot gain.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
233
If you use AFP Resource Installer, it installs the generic tone transfer curve CMRs on your system
automatically.
Related concepts
“Halftones and tone transfer curves” on page 224
Halftones are used to convert images (such as photographs, drawings, logos, or charts) from the
continuous tones that you see on a monitor into a pattern of dots that a printer can put on paper. Tone
transfer curves are used to modify the values of a particular color component and thus adjust the look
and feel of some of the colors. For example, you can apply a tone transfer curve to emphasize the
brightest parts of an image.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
CMR processing modes
CMR processing modes tell the print system how to apply a CMR to the print data it is associated with.
You specify a CMR processing mode whenever you specify a CMR, although not all modes are valid for
all CMR types.
Related concepts
“Types of CMRs” on page 230
Different situations call for different types of CMRs. Some CMRs are created by product manufacturers
so you can download and use them, while others are created by your printer or other color
management software. If you have the appropriate information, you can also create CMRs yourself.
Audit processing mode:
CMRs with the audit processing mode refer to processing that has already been applied to a resource. In
most cases, audit CMRs describe input data and are similar to ICC input profiles.
The audit processing mode is used primarily with color conversion CMRs. In audit processing mode, those
CMRs indicate which ICC profile must be applied to convert the data into the Profile Connection Space
(PCS).
For example, to take a photograph with a digital camera and then include the photograph in an AFP print
job, you can use AFP Resource Installer to:
1. Create a color conversion CMR using the ICC profile of your camera.
2. Install your photograph in a resource library.
3. Associate the color conversion CMR with the data object, indicating the audit processing mode.
Then, you create a print job that includes the data object. When processing the print job, the system uses
the color conversion CMR to convert the colors in the image into the PCS. The colors can then be
converted into the color space of the printer that is printing it.
Related concepts
“Data objects” on page 237
Presentation data objects contain a single type of data (such as TIFF, GIF, and JPEG images) and can
be used in your print jobs. These data objects can be placed directly in a page or overlay or can be
defined as resources and included in pages or overlays. Using a data object as a resource is more
efficient when that object appears more than once in a print job; resources are downloaded to the
printer just once and referenced as needed.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
234
Planning and Configuration Guide
“Color conversion CMRs” on page 230
Color conversion CMRs are used to convert colors to and from the ICC Profile Connection Space
(PCS), a device-independent color space. You can use them to prepare images for color or grayscale
printing.
Instruction processing mode:
CMRs with the instruction processing mode refer to processing that is done to prepare the resource for a
specific printer using a certain paper or another device. Generally, instruction CMRs refer to output data
and are similar to ICC output profiles.
The instruction processing mode is used with color conversion, tone transfer curve, and halftone CMRs. In
instruction processing mode, these CMRs indicate how the system must convert a resource so it prints
correctly on the target printer. The manufacturer of your printer should provide ICC profiles or a variety of
CMRs that you can use. Those ICC profiles and CMRs might be installed in the printer controller, included
with the printer on a CD, or available for download from the manufacturer’s Web site.
If you send a color AFP print job to a printer that supports AFP Color Management, color conversion and
tone transfer curve CMRs in instruction processing mode can be associated with the job. When the printer
processes the print job, it applies the CMRs in this order:
1. Color conversion CMRs in audit processing mode, to convert the resources into the ICC Profile
Connection Space (PCS)
2. Color conversion and tone transfer curve CMRs in instruction processing mode, to convert the
resources into the color space of the printer
3. Halftone CMR in instruction processing mode, to convert the job pages from their digital format into the
pattern of dots that the printer can produce
In some cases, CMRs that are usually used as instruction CMRs can be used as audit CMRs. For
example, if you send a very large print job to a high-speed printer, the images in the print job are
converted into the color space of that printer using a color conversion CMR with the instruction processing
mode. However, if you have to reprint part of the job on a different printer, the system must convert the
print job into the color space of the second printer. In that case, the color conversion CMR of the first
printer is used in the audit processing mode to move the images back into the PCS. Then, the system
uses a color conversion CMR of the second printer in instruction mode to convert the images into its color
space.
Related concepts
“Color conversion CMRs” on page 230
Color conversion CMRs are used to convert colors to and from the ICC Profile Connection Space
(PCS), a device-independent color space. You can use them to prepare images for color or grayscale
printing.
“ICC profiles” on page 227
The International Color Consortium (ICC) is an organization that has established open standards for
color management. These standards help products work together by identifying a device-independent
color space and defining the elements of an ICC profile.
“Halftone CMRs” on page 232
Halftone CMRs carry the information that a printer uses to convert print jobs into a pattern of dots that
it can put on paper. Halftone CMRs can be used with both color and grayscale print jobs.
Link processing mode:
CMRs with the link processing mode are used to replace a selected pair of color conversion CMRs. Only
link color conversion CMRs can use the link processsing mode.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
235
You can install both audit and instruction color conversion CMRs in your resource library using AFP
Resource Installer or a similar software product. AFP Resource Installer then creates link color conversion
CMRs for every combination of audit and instruction color conversion CMR.
When a print job calls for a given combination, the print server checks the resource library for a link color
conversion CMR for that combination. If the print server finds an appropriate link color conversion CMR, it
sends the CMR to the printer with the print job. Your printer can use the link CMRs whenever a print job
indicates that it uses a particular combination of audit and instruction CMRs.
If you do not use AFP Resource Installer or a similar program to install your resources, your color printer
must either create link CMRs while it processes your print jobs or convert the colors in your jobs twice,
first from the original color space to the PCS and then from the PCS to the color space of the printer.
An InfoPrint 5000 printer creates link color conversion CMRs so it only has to do one conversion, and
saves them so they can be used with other print jobs. The InfoPrint 5000 might save the link color
conversion CMRs, but they can be removed during normal operation; for example, if the printer runs out of
storage or is shut down.
Related concepts
“Link color conversion CMRs” on page 231
Link color conversion CMRs combine the processing information required to convert an image from the
color space of an input device to the PCS, and then from the PCS to the color space of the output
device. Essentially, link color conversion CMRs replace a pair of color conversion CMRs.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
“InfoPrint 5000” on page 242
The InfoPrint 5000 is a full-color, high-speed, continuous forms Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)
printer that supports AFP color management.
CMR creation and installation
Device manufacturers and groups that support AFP color standards create CMRs that you can use in your
color printing systems. You can also create CMRs yourself, based on your needs.
The AFP Consortium, the group that defined the AFP Color Management Object Content Architecture
(CMOCA), identified a set of color conversion CMRs that are most often used in audit processing mode.
The set includes color conversion CMRs for common color spaces, such as:
v Adobe RGB (1998)
v sRGB
v SMPTE-C RGB
v SWOP CMYK
The standard CMRs are included with AFP Resource Installer, although they are not installed by default.
You can install the standard CMRs that you plan to use. In addition, AFP Resource Installer automatically
installs all the generic halftone and tone transfer curve CMRs in any resource library you create.
You can download device-specific CMRs for InfoPrint printers such as the InfoPrint 5000 from the InfoPrint
Solutions Company Web site:
http://www.infoprint.com
If you need more CMRs, you can create them using wizards provided in AFP Resource Installer. See the
online help for details about the wizard.
236
Planning and Configuration Guide
If you use AFP Resource Installer to create a CMR, the software automatically installs the CMR in a
resource library. You can also use AFP Resource Installer to install CMRs that you get from your printer
manufacturer.
Related concepts
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
Data objects
Presentation data objects contain a single type of data (such as TIFF, GIF, and JPEG images) and can be
used in your print jobs. These data objects can be placed directly in a page or overlay or can be defined
as resources and included in pages or overlays. Using a data object as a resource is more efficient when
that object appears more than once in a print job; resources are downloaded to the printer just once and
referenced as needed.
Data objects can either be included inline with a print job or installed in a resource library using software
such as AFP Resource Installer. If you install your data objects in a resource library, you can associate
color conversion CMRs with them.
Related concepts
“Resource library management” on page 239
If you store CMRs and data objects in central resource libraries, you must understand some of the
characteristics of resource libraries to make sure that your resources are available when and where
you need them.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
Types of data objects
Image data objects can be stored in a number of different formats, including EPS, GIF, IOCA, JFIF
(JPEG), PDF, and TIFF. These image types are device-independent so they can be used by different
systems and still be interpreted consistently.
v Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
EPS is a PostScript graphics file format that follows conventions that Adobe Systems defined. EPS files
support embedded ICC profiles.
v Graphics Interchange Format (GIF)
GIF files are bitmap image files that are limited to a palette of 256 RGB colors. Because of the limited
color range that it can contain, GIF is not a good format for reproducing photographs, but it is generally
adequate for logos or charts. GIF images are widely used on the Internet because they are usually
smaller than other image formats. GIF files use the file extension .gif.
v Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA)
IOCA is an architecture that provides a consistent way to represent images, including conventions and
directions for processing and exchanging image information. The architecture defines image information
independently of all data objects and environments in which it might exist and uses self-identifying
terms; each field contains a description of itself along with its contents.
v JPEG File Interchange Format (JFIF)
JFIF files are bitmap image files that are compressed using Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG)
compression. As a result, JFIF files are most commonly referred to as JPEG files. JPEG files most
commonly use the file extension .jpg, but can also use .jpeg, .jpe, .jfif, and .jif.
JPEG compression deletes information that it considers unnecessary from images when it converts
them. JPEG files vary from having small amounts of compression to having large amounts of
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
237
compression. The more an image is compressed, the more information is lost. If the image is
compressed only once, there usually is no noticeable effect on the image. However, if the image is
compressed and decompressed repeatedly, the effects of deleting information become more noticeable.
JPEG compression is commonly used for photographs, especially photographs that are transmitted or
displayed on Web pages. The compression makes the files small enough to transmit across a network
efficiently, but leaves enough information that the image is still visually appealing.
v Portable Document Format (PDF)
PDF is a standard file format that Adobe Systems developed.
PDF files can be used and stored on various operating systems and contain all the required image and
font data. Design attributes in a PDF are kept in a single compressed package.
Note: PDF files can contain multiple pages. However, only single-page PDF files can be used as data
objects in AFP print jobs.
v Tagged Image File Format (TIFF)
TIFF files are bitmap image files that include headers to provide more information about the image.
TIFF files use the file extensions .tif or .tiff.
TIFF files support embedded ICC profiles. If an ICC profile is embedded in a file, the characteristics of
the input color space are known whenever the file is used; however, the profiles increase the file size.
When you save a file in the TIFF format, you can use various compression algorithms.
Not all printers support all types of data objects.
The embedded ICC profiles in EPS, JPEG, and TIFF files contain the information that a printer uses to
convert colors in the image from an input color space into the Profile Connection Space (PCS). The input
color space might be an industry-standard space or it can describe the color reproduction capabilities of a
device, such as a scanner, digital camera, monitor, or printer.
Related concepts
“ICC profiles” on page 227
The International Color Consortium (ICC) is an organization that has established open standards for
color management. These standards help products work together by identifying a device-independent
color space and defining the elements of an ICC profile.
Data object creation and installation
You can use a wide variety of software applications to create or manipulate images to include in print jobs.
If you want to store them in central resource repositories, you can use AFP Resource Installer to install
them.
Data object creation
Most types of data objects are images of some kind. They might be photographs taken using a digital
camera, charts or diagrams generated by a software tool, or digital drawings created using graphics
software. Regardless of how images are created, you generally need to manipulate them to include them
in print jobs.
The changes include:
v Convert the image into a file type that is appropriate for printing. For example, the file types that many
graphics applications (such as Adobe Illustrator, CorelDRAW, and Corel Paint Shop Pro) use to store
images while you work on them are not appropriate for printing. To use images that you create using
any of those programs, you can save or export those files as a different file type, such as EPS, JPEG,
or TIFF.
v Make sure that your image files are associated with an appropriate color space or input profile. Follow
the instructions provided with your graphics software to set up color management, including installing
238
Planning and Configuration Guide
and using ICC profiles for digital cameras and monitors, and customizing color management settings.
The instructions should also explain how to change the color profile that an image uses and how to
save an image with an embedded profile.
v Follow the tips and best practices provided in the other sections below for creating images and
managing them as data object resources.
Data object installation
You can use AFP Resource Installer to install your images in a resource library. AFP Resource Installer
includes wizards that can guide you through the process of installing an image as a data object. When you
install an EPS, JPEG, or TIFF image with an embedded ICC profile using AFP Resource Installer, you can
choose how you want to handle the profile:
v Leave the profile in the file without creating a CMR.
v Leave the profile in the file, but also copy the profile and create a CMR from the copy. Associate the
new CMR with the data object.
v Remove the profile from the file (to reduce the file size) and make the profile into a CMR. Associate the
new CMR with the data object.
Related concepts
“Tips and best practices” on page 240
These general guidelines about creating and managing images and other color resources can improve
the performance of your AFP color printing system.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
Resource library management
If you store CMRs and data objects in central resource libraries, you must understand some of the
characteristics of resource libraries to make sure that your resources are available when and where you
need them.
Resource libraries that AFP Resource Installer creates use a resource access table (RAT) as the index of
the resource library. The index is stored as a file in the library that it refers to. You must store CMRs in
resource libraries that use a RAT. We recommend that you store data objects in resource libraries that use
a RAT as well.
When you use AFP Resource Installer to create a resource library, it creates a RAT and stores it in the
library. When you install a CMR or data object, AFP Resource Installer updates the RAT with information
about the resource. When a print server looks in a resource library for a resource, it first looks in the RAT
to see if the resource is listed.
The print server relies on the RAT; if it is incorrect, the print server cannot find resources in the resource
library. As a result, you must always use AFP Resource Installer to manage your resource libraries,
including to:
v Add CMRs and data objects to a resource library.
Do not copy CMRs or data objects directly into the resource libraries that AFP Resource Installer uses.
If you copy CMRs or data objects into these resource libraries, the RAT is not updated so the print
server cannot use it to find the CMRs or data objects.
v Modify properties of data objects and CMRs listed in the RAT.
Do not directly edit the RAT or any of the files in a resource library. Do not replace an existing version
of a CMR or data object with a new version by copying the new version directly into the resource
library; use AFP Resource Installer to update the resource.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
239
v Install CMRs or data objects in a different resource library or replicate a resource library in a different
location.
Do not copy CMRs or data objects from a resource library and store them in another location.
For more information about completing these tasks, see the AFP Resource Installer online help.
Related concepts
“Color management resources” on page 229
Color management resources (CMRs) are the foundation of color management in AFP print systems.
They are AFP resources that provide all the color management information, such as ICC profiles and
halftones, that an AFP system needs to process a print job and maintain consistent color from one
device to another.
“Data objects” on page 237
Presentation data objects contain a single type of data (such as TIFF, GIF, and JPEG images) and can
be used in your print jobs. These data objects can be placed directly in a page or overlay or can be
defined as resources and included in pages or overlays. Using a data object as a resource is more
efficient when that object appears more than once in a print job; resources are downloaded to the
printer just once and referenced as needed.
“InfoPrint Manager” on page 245
InfoPrint Manager is a flexible and scalable print management solution for AIX or Windows that
provides many choices in expanding and managing your print environment. InfoPrint Manager can
process print jobs that contain references to color management resources and interact with centralized
resource libraries.
“InfoPrint ProcessDirector” on page 246
InfoPrint ProcessDirector is a database-driven print workflow system that lets you manage all aspects
of your printing process. The server runs on an AIX or Linux® system and is accessed using a Web
browser-based interface. InfoPrint ProcessDirector can receive and process AFP print jobs that include
AFP color management objects.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
Tips and best practices
These general guidelines about creating and managing images and other color resources can improve the
performance of your AFP color printing system.
Related concepts
“Data object creation and installation” on page 238
You can use a wide variety of software applications to create or manipulate images to include in print
jobs. If you want to store them in central resource repositories, you can use AFP Resource Installer to
install them.
Tips for images
To optimize the performance of your AFP color printing system, we recommend that you follow some
guidelines for creating and including images in print jobs.
When you want to use color images in your print jobs:
v Get the original electronic versions of images instead of scanning existing documents.
Almost unnoticeable specks of color in the background of images that have been scanned can greatly
increase the size of the image. If you must scan an image, use an image editing tool to clean up the
background as much as possible.
v Save all images in the same standard color space so you only need one input profile for all of them.
Adobe RGB (1998) is the recommended color space for images that are to be printed.
240
Planning and Configuration Guide
v Flatten multi-layer images (such as the ones you can create in graphics tools like Adobe Illustrator and
Corel Paint Shop Pro) before including them in print jobs.
Unflattened images are extremely large and more difficult to work with. Save a copy of the original
image for future editing, but flatten the version that you include in your print job.
Tips for resources
To optimize the performance of your AFP color printing system, we recommend that you follow some
guidelines for managing color resources.
You can use AFP Resource Installer to:
v Install all the CMRs for your printer in a resource library.
v Install the data objects that you use frequently in a resource library.
v Mark the CMRs and data objects that are reused regularly as non-private, capturable resources so they
can be saved on the printer and used for other print jobs without being downloaded every time.
Note: This option is not advisable for secure resources, such as signature files.
v Install CMRs and data objects in resource libraries that the print server can access, so they only need
to be stored in one place and can be used by all print servers.
v Associate audit color conversion CMRs with data objects that require color management, so the
embedded profiles can be removed from the image files.
InfoPrint AFP color and grayscale products
InfoPrint Solutions Company provides a variety of products that support AFP color and grayscale printing.
They can be used in various combinations to create color workflow solutions.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
241
Figure 41. The InfoPrint products that support AFP color management
Printers
Some InfoPrint Solutions Company printers support color or grayscale printing with full AFP color
management, while others support AFP color printing without color management.
InfoPrint 5000
The InfoPrint 5000 is a full-color, high-speed, continuous forms Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)
printer that supports AFP color management.
The InfoPrint 5000 uses piezo-electric drop-on-demand inkjet technology with water-based pigment inks
that are designed to resist fading and smearing.
The InfoPrint 5000 receives AFP print jobs from InfoPrint print servers. When used as part of a full AFP
color management system, the InfoPrint 5000 can receive color conversion, link, and tone transfer curve
CMRs and apply them to print jobs. Because the printer engine applies its own halftones, it does not
support halftone CMRs.
242
Planning and Configuration Guide
The InfoPrint 5000 can capture resources and store them in a repository in its controller so they can be
reused in other print jobs. The printer only captures resources that are marked non-private and capturable
using an application such as AFP Resource Installer.
You can also submit PostScript and Portable Document Format (PDF) jobs to hot folders on the InfoPrint
5000, but those print jobs are not processed using AFP color management.
Related concepts
“Color management resources” on page 229
Color management resources (CMRs) are the foundation of color management in AFP print systems.
They are AFP resources that provide all the color management information, such as ICC profiles and
halftones, that an AFP system needs to process a print job and maintain consistent color from one
device to another.
“Data objects” on page 237
Presentation data objects contain a single type of data (such as TIFF, GIF, and JPEG images) and can
be used in your print jobs. These data objects can be placed directly in a page or overlay or can be
defined as resources and included in pages or overlays. Using a data object as a resource is more
efficient when that object appears more than once in a print job; resources are downloaded to the
printer just once and referenced as needed.
InfoPrint 4100
The InfoPrint 4100 family of printers uses a laser, electrophotographic print technology and Advanced
Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs to create high-quality text and graphics output. InfoPrint
4100 printers with the InfoPrint POWER architecture and microcode release 15.4 or later support the AFP
color management architecture and can be used to print very high-quality grayscale images.
The base level of AFP color management support in InfoPrint 4100 printers with the InfoPrint POWER
architecture and microcode release 15.4 or later lets you apply color management to grayscale text,
graphics (GOCA), bi-level images (IOCA FS10), and bar codes. To use color management functions with
other types of objects, the AFP Color Emulation feature is required.
The AFP Color Emulation feature lets you print color objects in grayscale. When the feature is installed,
AFP Color Management lets you natively print GIF, IOCA FS11, IOCA FS45, JPEG, and TIFF images in
high-quality grayscale.
Note: Single-page PDF and EPS data objects are not supported on the InfoPrint 4100.
InfoPrint 4100 printers support these types of CMRs:
v Color conversion
v Link color conversion
v Tone transfer curve
v Halftone
For even better images on InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, MD1, and MD2, you can also install the Image
Enhancement feature. Benefits of this feature include:
v Enhanced fusing technology to minimize toner distortion
v Optimized developer unit for high coverage and high-density applications
v Improved halftones tailored to new hardware and toner technology
Related concepts
“Color management resources” on page 229
Color management resources (CMRs) are the foundation of color management in AFP print systems.
They are AFP resources that provide all the color management information, such as ICC profiles and
halftones, that an AFP system needs to process a print job and maintain consistent color from one
device to another.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
243
“Data objects” on page 237
Presentation data objects contain a single type of data (such as TIFF, GIF, and JPEG images) and can
be used in your print jobs. These data objects can be placed directly in a page or overlay or can be
defined as resources and included in pages or overlays. Using a data object as a resource is more
efficient when that object appears more than once in a print job; resources are downloaded to the
printer just once and referenced as needed.
“Grayscale printing concepts” on page 226
Grayscale printing lets you reproduce color images as high-quality black and white images, using many
shades of gray to represent subtle variations in color and light. Printing solutions that produce
high-quality grayscale output use color printing concepts with a black and white printer that supports
them to achieve that effect.
InfoPrint 1xxx series
The InfoPrint 1xxx series of workgroup printers and multifunction devices includes a wide range of
cut-sheet color and monochrome devices, although they do not support AFP Color Management.
For general office purposes, the InfoPrint 1000 series lets you manage color output efficiently and
cost-effectively through advanced technologies such as access controls, confidential print, and data stream
encryption. Through the 1000 family of printers, InfoPrint Solutions Company offers output strategies and
InfoPrint color printers that address diverse requirements for high quality, security, and cost.
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when resources
are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color management resources
(CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
AFP Resource Installer is a Java™ application that you install on a Windows workstation. You can use it to
install and work with fonts in addition to CMRs and data objects.
You can use AFP Resource Installer to:
v Create CMRs from existing data, including ICC profiles.
You can use a wizard to guide you through the process.
v Install CMRs, fonts, and data objects in resource libraries on the local system or on any system that you
can access using FTP.
v Associate CMRs with data objects, so data objects can be reproduced accurately on different printers.
In some cases, you can reduce the file size of your images by removing the embedded color profile
from the file and using an associated CMR.
v Mark resources as capturable.
Capturable resources can be captured and saved in the printer for use with other print jobs, which can
help improve system performance. The print server queries the printer before it sends any resources; if
the printer already has the resource, the print server does not have to send it.
v Mark resources as private.
Private resources cannot be captured in the printer and must be downloaded with every print job that
uses them. For example, you can mark signature files used for company checks as private for security
reasons.
When you use AFP Resource Installer to install a color conversion CMR, the software automatically
creates link color conversion CMRs between the new color conversion CMR and the existing color
conversion CMRs. When a print file references the new CMR, the print server automatically downloads the
link CMRs that match the target device type and model and sends them to the printer with the print job. If
one of those link CMRs is appropriate, the printer can use it instead of having to spend extra time creating
a link CMR.
244
Planning and Configuration Guide
To let a print server use resources installed by AFP Resource Installer, you must add the path to the
resource libraries to the AFP resource path in the server.
Related concepts
“Color management resources” on page 229
Color management resources (CMRs) are the foundation of color management in AFP print systems.
They are AFP resources that provide all the color management information, such as ICC profiles and
halftones, that an AFP system needs to process a print job and maintain consistent color from one
device to another.
“Resource library management” on page 239
If you store CMRs and data objects in central resource libraries, you must understand some of the
characteristics of resource libraries to make sure that your resources are available when and where
you need them.
“Data objects” on page 237
Presentation data objects contain a single type of data (such as TIFF, GIF, and JPEG images) and can
be used in your print jobs. These data objects can be placed directly in a page or overlay or can be
defined as resources and included in pages or overlays. Using a data object as a resource is more
efficient when that object appears more than once in a print job; resources are downloaded to the
printer just once and referenced as needed.
Print servers
InfoPrint print servers receive print jobs from various sources and prepare them to be sent to a printer.
After print jobs have been prepared, the print server interacts with the printer to make sure that all the
required resources are available, then sends the print job data to be printed.
Several different print servers are available. Although they provide much of the same function, they are
appropriate for different environments.
InfoPrint Manager
InfoPrint Manager is a flexible and scalable print management solution for AIX or Windows that provides
many choices in expanding and managing your print environment. InfoPrint Manager can process print
jobs that contain references to color management resources and interact with centralized resource
libraries.
When InfoPrint Manager receives AFP or line data print jobs, it processes CMRs and data objects similar
to the way it processes other AFP resources. You can add the resource libraries that you create using AFP
Resource Installer to the Location of presentation object containers property (also called the
resource-context-presentation-object-container attribute) of your actual destinations. Then, InfoPrint
Manager can search those resource libraries to find data objects and CMRs when print jobs request them.
Related concepts
“Resource library management” on page 239
If you store CMRs and data objects in central resource libraries, you must understand some of the
characteristics of resource libraries to make sure that your resources are available when and where
you need them.
Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA):
PPFA is a feature of InfoPrint Manager that lets you create form definitions and page definitions for use
with your AFP print jobs. You can use PPFA to associate CMRs with form definitions and page definitions
for your color print jobs.
The form definitions and page definitions that you create using PPFA can be used in print jobs that are
sent to InfoPrint Manager and InfoPrint ProcessDirector.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
245
InfoPrint ProcessDirector
InfoPrint ProcessDirector is a database-driven print workflow system that lets you manage all aspects of
your printing process. The server runs on an AIX or Linux system and is accessed using a Web
browser-based interface. InfoPrint ProcessDirector can receive and process AFP print jobs that include
AFP color management objects.
InfoPrint ProcessDirector can also receive line data print jobs that refer to CMRs and data objects and
convert them into AFP using a step based on the ConvertLineDataJobIntoAFP step template.
InfoPrint ProcessDirector processes CMRs and data objects similar to the way it processes other AFP
resources. You can add the resource libraries that you create using AFP Resource Installer to the AFP
resource path property on a print job or in the job defaults for your job types. Then, InfoPrint
ProcessDirector can search those resource libraries to find data objects and CMRs when print jobs
request them.
Related concepts
“Resource library management” on page 239
If you store CMRs and data objects in central resource libraries, you must understand some of the
characteristics of resource libraries to make sure that your resources are available when and where
you need them.
AFP color solution scenarios
AFP color solutions from the InfoPrint Solutions Company can be assembled in a variety of configurations
based on your environment and needs.
Printing high-quality grayscale output on an InfoPrint 4100 printer
An insurance company wants to migrate to AFP color printing slowly, so they start the process by using
AFP color management to print high-quality grayscale output on their InfoPrint 4100 printers.
The insurance company runs an in-house print shop that has four duplex InfoPrint 4100 lines. They use a
document composition tool to create AFP print jobs and submit the jobs to InfoPrint Manager for Windows,
which they use to balance the printing loads and keep all the printers running as much as possible.
They have decided that they want to add images to some of their output. To start, they want to add
photographs of their insurance agents to the letterhead on letters to their clients. They are not ready to
move into full color printing, so they want to print black and white images using their existing printers.
Unfortunately, they have not been satisfied with the appearance of the images; they are too black and
one-dimensional, so they look unprofessional.
The solution
The InfoPrint Solutions Company team suggests these changes to improve image quality:
v Upgrade the printer to use a controller with the InfoPrint POWER architecture with microcode release
15.4 or later.
This update adds support for the AFP color management, which includes high-quality grayscale printing
using halftones and tone transfer curves.
v Purchase and install the AFP Color Emulation feature for the printer.
v Use AFP Resource Installer to manage the images, including associating them with the correct
halftones and tone transfer curves to create the best quality output.
246
Planning and Configuration Guide
Figure 42. Solution diagram for adding AFP Resource Installer and a resource library, and updating one InfoPrint 4100
printer line to use microcode release 15.4 and the AFP Color Emulation Feature.
Implementation
To implement the solution, the print shop works with their InfoPrint Solutions Company representatives to
upgrade one of their print lines to try the new function. They:
v Upgrade the print controller to the microcode release 15.4 or later.
v Install the AFP Color Emulation feature on the printer controller.
v Install AFP Resource Installer.
v Use AFP Resource Installer to:
– Create and install the color conversion CMRs for the InfoPrint 4100 printer and for the digital camera
used to take the photographs.
– Choose the generic halftone and tone transfer curve CMRs to use with the InfoPrint 4100 based on
the line screen frequency and appearance values that you want to use.
– Install the photographs of the insurance agents in a resource library, then associate them with the
appropriate CMRs.
v Update the InfoPrint Manager destinations so they send the print jobs that contain photographs to the
printer line that has the AFP Color Emulation feature installed.
v Create print jobs that call the images using the names that they were given when they were installed.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
247
Related concepts
“InfoPrint 4100” on page 243
The InfoPrint 4100 family of printers uses a laser, electrophotographic print technology and Advanced
Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs to create high-quality text and graphics output.
InfoPrint 4100 printers with the InfoPrint POWER architecture and microcode release 15.4 or later
support the AFP color management architecture and can be used to print very high-quality grayscale
images.
“Grayscale printing concepts” on page 226
Grayscale printing lets you reproduce color images as high-quality black and white images, using many
shades of gray to represent subtle variations in color and light. Printing solutions that produce
high-quality grayscale output use color printing concepts with a black and white printer that supports
them to achieve that effect.
“InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer” on page 244
InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer is a key element of an AFP color management system when
resources are stored in central libraries. You can use it to create, install, and manage color
management resources (CMRs) and data objects for use in your system.
“InfoPrint Manager” on page 245
InfoPrint Manager is a flexible and scalable print management solution for AIX or Windows that
provides many choices in expanding and managing your print environment. InfoPrint Manager can
process print jobs that contain references to color management resources and interact with centralized
resource libraries.
“Color management resources” on page 229
Color management resources (CMRs) are the foundation of color management in AFP print systems.
They are AFP resources that provide all the color management information, such as ICC profiles and
halftones, that an AFP system needs to process a print job and maintain consistent color from one
device to another.
Replacing pre-printed forms
A bank wants to reduce the amount of paper that it stores. If the bank eliminates some of the pre-printed
forms that they use by printing some statements on a color printer, they can use the same type of plain
paper for various applications.
Over the last five years, the bank has purchased ten smaller banks and is in negotiations for several
others. The parent bank uses an AFP system to print statements in-house on pre-printed forms. All the
pre-printed forms contain color logos. Some of them also contain background images or blocks of color
that divide the page into regions. The existing system consists of:
v InfoPrint Manager for AIX, including the Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA) feature
v Three duplex InfoPrint 4000 lines
v Two duplex InfoPrint 4100 lines
Print jobs are submitted as line data and InfoPrint Manager transforms them into AFP. AFP resources are
stored in a central location. There are no color production printers in use.
The banks that were acquired handled printing in different ways. Some of them had their own print shops;
some of them outsourced print to other companies. The print staff at the parent bank has spent a
significant amount of time moving the printing operations of the acquired banks to their in-house print
operation, starting with the ones that outsourced their print. Five of them have been converted. The print
shop administrators are starting to face some interesting issues:
v The increased workload for the in-house operation means that they need to increase their print capacity.
v Each of the banks that the parent has purchased has maintained its own logo and branding. Each time
one of the banks has been integrated with print operations, it has brought with it at least five different
pre-printed forms that need to be ordered and stored.
v Even though each kind of pre-printed form comes from the same vendor, the colors vary noticeably.
248
Planning and Configuration Guide
v The acquired banks will eventually replace their old logos and forms with the logo and forms of the
parent bank, but the dates are not yet planned.
With the increase in the number of forms that must be stored, space is becoming a problem. The team
knows that they have to expand printing capacity, but they do not have space for a new duplex line. If they
could eliminate some of the paper that they have to store, they could use that space for the new line.
The solution
The InfoPrint Solutions Company team proposes an AFP color solution to:
v Transform their pre-printed forms to simple color statements and eliminate the need for pre-printed
forms, thus reducing the paper that needs to be stored.
v Streamline the process of moving the acquired banks to the parent bank’s logo and forms.
v Optimize resource management to maximize throughput.
v Make the colors more uniform from job to job.
The solution adds a duplex InfoPrint 5000 line and AFP Resource Installer to the existing system and
updates the other components to add AFP color support. The bank can choose which applications to move
to the color workflow, taking into consideration the fact that the throughput of the InfoPrint 5000 line is less
than that of an InfoPrint 4100 line. In addition, those print jobs cannot be run on the existing InfoPrint 4100
or InfoPrint 4000 printers, since those printers cannot print the required color elements.
As the printing staff becomes proficient in using the system, they can start to prepare more applications for
an eventual move to color by migrating them to use the high-quality grayscale function available on their
InfoPrint 4100 printers. Then, when they are ready to add another color line (either by eliminating more
paper storage or by replacing one of the InfoPrint 4000 lines), they can move those print jobs to the color
printers.
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
249
Figure 43. Solution diagram for adding InfoPrint AFP Resource Installer and an InfoPrint 5000 printer
250
Planning and Configuration Guide
Implementation
To implement the color solution, the bank printing staff works with the InfoPrint Solutions Company team
through several phases:
v Planning the color solution
– Determine where the resource library should be located so that it is accessible to all the applications
that need to use it.
– Determine which types of resources can or should be saved on the printer for reuse. For example,
signature files should probably not be saved on the printer; company logos and background images
probably should be saved.
v Installing and configuring the system
– Install the InfoPrint 5000 printers.
– Apply service updates to InfoPrint Manager for AIX and PPFA to add color support.
– Install AFP Resource Installer.
v Configuring resource management for optimal performance
– Use AFP Resource Installer to install the CMRs for the InfoPrint 5000 printers.
– Get the PDF file of the pre-printed form or use graphic art software to create a full page image to
use as the background image.
– Use AFP Resource Installer to install the PDF or image as a data object resource and associate a
color conversion CMR with it.
– Configure InfoPrint Manager for AIX to recognize the resource libraries that AFP Resource Installer
uses and to send print jobs to the new printer.
– Use PPFA to create a form definition and page definition that calls the new data object resource.
Refer to the object using the ID that you specified when you installed it.
– Copy any new form definitions or page definitions that you created into an existing resource library.
v Testing system operations
– Create a print job that calls the form definition and page definition, and that points to the new
resource libraries.
– Submit the print job.
– Check the color output.
Related concepts
“InfoPrint 5000” on page 242
The InfoPrint 5000 is a full-color, high-speed, continuous forms Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)
printer that supports AFP color management.
“InfoPrint Manager” on page 245
InfoPrint Manager is a flexible and scalable print management solution for AIX or Windows that
provides many choices in expanding and managing your print environment. InfoPrint Manager can
process print jobs that contain references to color management resources and interact with centralized
resource libraries.
“Types of data objects” on page 237
Image data objects can be stored in a number of different formats, including EPS, GIF, IOCA, JFIF
(JPEG), PDF, and TIFF. These image types are device-independent so they can be used by different
systems and still be interpreted consistently.
Eliminating physical inserts
A print service bureau wants to reduce the number of physical inserts that they have to add to envelopes
by printing full color electronic inserts in blank areas on credit card statements.
The print service bureau prints statements and one-to-one advertising brochures for a variety of
customers. The customers send their resources and print job data to the service bureau. The pre-press
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
251
staff uses a document composition tool to create AFP jobs. The AFP print jobs are submitted to InfoPrint
ProcessDirector for Linux, which sends them to ten duplex InfoPrint 4100 systems. After the jobs are
printed, they go to post-processing to be folded, inserted, and mailed.
The service bureau asks all their customers to submit required resources with every print job; they do not
store resources indefinitely. Many of their customers (such as credit card companies) include inserts in the
envelope with their statements. Some problems with this arrangement are:
v Inserters often ruin mailpieces, so they frequently have to reprint individual statements. Reprinting adds
time and cost to the process.
v Customers tend to ignore the inserts, separating them from the statement immediately after opening the
envelope and discarding them.
The service bureau would like expand its offerings to include full-color variable-data printed using an AFP
color solution. They also think that they can save time, money, and paper by reducing the complexity of
the tasks that their inserters do. If the inserter only has to fold each statement and put it in an envelope
(instead of adding two more sheets of paper, folding, and inserting), it has fewer opportunities for ruining
mailpieces.
The solution
The service bureau works with the InfoPrint Solutions Company team to create a solution based on its
existing process and environment that will help their customers move away from using physical inserts for
advertising and toward electronic inserts. They hope to eliminate one of their inserters by printing full color
ads directly in blank areas or on sides of customer statements.
If a credit card company can identify data and rules that determine the characteristics of each customer,
the electronic inserts can be targeted for each statement. For example, the bill could show an ad for a
minivan, a sports car, or a motorcycle depending on the demographics of the customer.
Implementation
To take advantage of this new color capability, the service bureau makes a few changes to their workflow:
v They add a duplex InfoPrint 5000 system and configure InfoPrint ProcessDirector to submit print jobs to
it.
v They give guidelines to their customers so that it includes guidelines for using color images and logos in
addition to fonts and graphics.
v They train the pre-press department is trained to use a graphics application for color profile
management and image normalization.
v They add a step to their process to make sure that their customers have followed the guidelines. If they
have not, the pre-press staff adjusts the resolution and input color profiles to conform to the guidelines
before they submit the print job.
Related concepts
“InfoPrint 5000” on page 242
The InfoPrint 5000 is a full-color, high-speed, continuous forms Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)
printer that supports AFP color management.
“InfoPrint ProcessDirector” on page 246
InfoPrint ProcessDirector is a database-driven print workflow system that lets you manage all aspects
of your printing process. The server runs on an AIX or Linux system and is accessed using a Web
browser-based interface. InfoPrint ProcessDirector can receive and process AFP print jobs that include
AFP color management objects.
“Tips and best practices” on page 240
These general guidelines about creating and managing images and other color resources can improve
the performance of your AFP color printing system.
252
Planning and Configuration Guide
“InfoPrint 4100” on page 243
The InfoPrint 4100 family of printers uses a laser, electrophotographic print technology and Advanced
Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs to create high-quality text and graphics output.
InfoPrint 4100 printers with the InfoPrint POWER architecture and microcode release 15.4 or later
support the AFP color management architecture and can be used to print very high-quality grayscale
images.
Related publications
You can find more information about AFP color printing on the Web sites of InfoPrint Solutions Company
and the AFP Color Consortium™.
For more information about the AFP color management and the Color Management Object Content
Architecture, see:
v AFP Color Management Architecture™, G550-0526
v Color Management Object Content Architecture Reference, S550-0511
These AFP Architecture reference books contain information about color management resources:
v Mixed Object Document Content Architecture™ Reference, SC31-6802
v Advanced Function Presention: Programming Guide and Line Data Reference, S544-3884
v IPDS Reference, S544-3417
You can download or order these publications from:
http://www.infoprint.com
For more information about the activities and publications of the AFP Color Consortium, see the
Consortium Web site:
http://www.afpcolor.org
For more information about the ICC, ICC profiles, and the PCS, see the ICC Web site: http://www.color.org
Appendix D. Color and grayscale printing using AFP
253
254
Planning and Configuration Guide
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
InfoPrint Solutions Company may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document
in other countries. Consult your local InfoPrint Solutions Company representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an InfoPrint Solutions Company
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that InfoPrint Solutions Company
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that
does not infringe any InfoPrint Solutions Company intellectual property rights may be used instead.
However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-InfoPrint Solutions
Company product, program, or service.
InfoPrint Solutions Company may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these
patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
InfoPrint Solutions Company, LLC
6300 Diagonal Hwy 002J
Boulder, CO 80301-9270
U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INFOPRINT SOLUTIONS COMPANY PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION ″AS IS″ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer
of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
InfoPrint Solutions Company may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-InfoPrint Solutions Company Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials
at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this InfoPrint Solutions Company product and use of
those Web sites is at your own risk.
InfoPrint Solutions Company may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the results
obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been
made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same
on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurement may have been estimated through
extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their
specific environment.
Information concerning non-InfoPrint Solutions Company products was obtained from the suppliers of
those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. InfoPrint Solutions
Company has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or
any other claims related to non-InfoPrint Solutions Company products. Questions on the capabilities of
non-InfoPrint Solutions Company products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
255
All statements regarding InfoPrint Solutions Company’s future direction or intent are subject to change or
withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.
References in this document to InfoPrint Solutions Company products, product features, programs or
services do not imply that InfoPrint Solutions Company intends to make such products, product features,
programs or services available in all countries in which InfoPrint Solutions Company operates or does
business.
All models of the printer meet the requirements of IEC 950 and all amendments. The laser used in the
printer complies with IEC 825 and EN 60825.
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations. InfoPrint
Solutions Company encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle
their equipment when it is no longer needed. InfoPrint Solutions Company offers a variety of product return
programs and services in several countries to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products.
Information on InfoPrint Solutions Company product recycling offerings can be found on InfoPrint Solutions
Company’s Internet site at:
http://www.infoprint.com
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU), Norway, and Switzerland.
Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC concerning waste electrical and
electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used
appliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products to
indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.
In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) is to be
collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE
marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling
256
Planning and Configuration Guide
and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the
environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper
collection and treatment, contact your local InfoPrint Solutions Company representative.
Trademarks
These terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of InfoPrint Solutions Company in the United States,
other countries, or both:
InfoPrint
Infoprint
These terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel, Intel Inside (logos), MMX, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
IBM and the IBM logo are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.
Ricoh is a registered trademark of Ricoh Co., Ltd., and its affiliated companies.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Product recycling and disposal
This unit may have lead-containing materials – such as circuit boards and connectors – that require
special handling. Before this unit is disposed of, these materials must be removed and recycled or
discarded according to applicable regulations. This book contains specific information on batteries and
refrigerant where applicable.
This product may contain a sealed, lead-acid battery; lithium battery; nickel-metal-hydride battery; or
nickel-cadmium battery. Batteries of these types must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling
facilities may not be available in your area.
In the United States, InfoPrint Solutions Company has established a collection process for reuse,
recycling, or proper disposal of used batteries and battery packs from InfoPrint Solutions Company
equipment. For information on proper disposal of the batteries in this product, please contact InfoPrint
Solutions Company.
For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States, contact your local waste disposal facility.
Notices
257
Communication statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission
limits. InfoPrint Solutions Company is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
European Union (EU) Conformity Statement:
Hereby, InfoPrint Solutions Company declares that this product is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
InfoPrint Solutions Company cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection
requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of
non-InfoPrint Solutions Company option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology
Equipment according to European standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for
commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication devices.
Important
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for
causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment.
InfoPrint Solutions Company cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors.
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
258
Planning and Configuration Guide
Statement for CISPR 22 Edition 2 Compliance: Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
Japanese VCCI Class A:
JEITA Statement:
German Conformity Statement
Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht : EMVG Klasse A
Text für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte:
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von
Geräten (EMVG) vom 18. September 1998 (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336):
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die: InfoPrint
Solutions Company Deutschland GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4
Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden: ″Warnung: dies ist eine
Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem
Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür
aufzukommen.″
Anmerkung:
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den InfoPrint Solutions Company
Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
Notices
259
China:
Declaration:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may need to perform practical actions.
A ，
，
，
。
,!" # $ % &
,!"#
'()*+-./
。
'( )* + -./。
Taiwanese:
Important:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user will be required to take adequate measures.
260
Planning and Configuration Guide
Korea:
DANGER
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the user’s safety. Use
this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid
electrical shock.
Notices
261
262
Planning and Configuration Guide
Glossary
The following terms are defined as they are used
in InfoPrint 4100 documentation.
The elements are arranged in a predetermined pattern
following unambiguous rules define by the symbology.
The following cross-references are used in this
glossary:
v Contrast with. This refers to a term that has an
opposed or substantively different meaning.
bar code symbol. A combination of characters
including start and stop characters, quiet zones, data
characters, and check characters required by a
particular symbology, that form a complete scannable
entity.
v Synonym for. This indicates that the term has
the same meaning as another term, which is
defined.
v Synonymous with. This identifies terms that are
synonyms for the term that is defined.
bar code symbology. A bar code language. Bar code
symbologies are defined and controlled by various
industry groups and standards organizations. Bar code
symbologies are described in public domain bar code
specification documents.
v See. This refers to multiple-word terms that
have the same last word.
v See also. This refers to related terms that have
a similar, but not synonymous, meaning.
A
Adapter. See Network adapter.
Advanced Function Common Control Unit
(AFCCU). An IBM RISC-based control unit with code
common to all printers that use the AFCCU.
basis weight. The weight in pounds of a ream (500
sheets) of paper cut to a given standard size for that
grade; for example, 25 x 38 inches for book papers,
17 x 22 inches for bond papers, and other sizes for
other grades. The basis weight of continuous forms for
computer output is based on the size for bond papers.
binder holes. A series of holes or slots punched at set
intervals that allows the form to be inserted in a
loose-leaf or ring binder.
bond (paper). Paper formulated with at least 80%
wood pulp. Bond-paper forms work best in the InfoPrint
4100.
Advanced Function Image and Graphics Facility. A
capability of the InfoPrint 4100 to directly process IO1
image and DR2 vector graphics data streams.
C
all-points addressability. The capability to address,
reference, and position text, overlays, and images at
any defined point on the printable area of a page.
calender. A process to make paper smooth or glossy
by passing it through a series of metal rollers during the
last steps of a paper-making machine.
application. The use to which an information
processing system is put; for example, a payroll
application, an airline reservation application, a network
application.
calender cut. Slits, glazed lines, or discolored lines
across the paper caused when wrinkles pass through
the calender rollers.
application program. A program written for or by a
user that applies to the user’s work, such as a program
that does inventory control or payroll.
application programmer. A person who develops
application programs. Contrast with system
programmer.
caliper. The thickness of forms. This is usually
expressed in thousandths of an inch.
chad. (1) The material separated from a data medium
when punching a hole. (2) The residue separated from
the carrier holes in continuous forms.
B
change. As used in InfoPrint 4100 action messages,
instructs the printer operator to remove and discard a
used component and then install a new one. For
example, the CHANGE TONER COLLECTOR message
indicates that the operator should take out the
toner-collector bottle, throw it away, and put in a new
one.
bar code. An array of elements, such as bars, spaces,
and two-dimensional modules that together represent
data elements or characters in a particular symbology.
channel command. An instruction directing a data
channel, control unit, or device to perform an operation
or set of operations.
auto load. In the InfoPrint 4100, the automatic forms
threading facility.
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
263
character. A letter, number, punctuation mark, or
special graphic used for the production of text.
corner cut. In a form, a cut or opening of any size
containing one or more right angles.
character set. (1) A finite set of different characters
that is complete for a given purpose; for example, the
character set in ISO Standard 646, “7-bit Coded
Character Set of Information Processing Interchange.”
(2) A group of characters used for a specific reason; for
example, the set of characters a printer can print.
corona. A small diameter wire (or wires, depending on
the function) to which a high voltage is applied, causing
ionization of the air. The ionization creates an electrical
charge to perform various functions during the printing
process.
check. As used in InfoPrint 4100 action messages,
instructs the printer operator to inspect a component.
For example, the CHECK TONER COLLECTOR message
indicates that the operator should look at the
toner-collector bottle and ensure that it is physically
present, in the proper place, and correctly installed.
clear. As used in InfoPrint 4100 action messages,
instructs the printer operator to remove crumpled forms,
paper scraps, and other debris from the printer. For
example, the CLEAR UPPER TRACTOR message indicates
that forms are wedged in the transfer station area, and
the operator must remove them before the printer can
operate.
coated paper. Paper that has had a surface coating
applied to produce smoothness.
configuration. (1) The arrangement of a computer
system or network as defined by the nature, the
number, and the chief characteristics of its functional
units. More specifically, the term configuration may refer
to a hardware configuration or a software configuration.
(2) The devices and programs that make up a system,
subsystem, or network.
configure. The procedure used to customize the
InfoPrint 4100 to a specific operating and
communication environment.
connector. A means of establishing electrical flow.
constant data. Data that does not change; for
example, the company letterhead and standard text in
form letters, or the headings and boxes on a preprinted
form. Contrast with variable data.
continuous forms. A series of connected forms that
feed continuously through a printing device. The
connection between the forms is perforated to allow the
user to tear them apart.
controlled-access area. An area where access is
limited to authorized personnel.
controlling computer. The processing unit to which
the InfoPrint 4100 are attached through a channel
interface.
controlling computer system. The data-processing
system to which a network is connected and with which
the system can communicate.
264
Planning and Configuration Guide
cure. The process of drying ink sufficiently for
minimum transfer of the ink to any parts of the printer it
contacts.
cut. The severed part of a perforation. Cuts are
separated by ties. See also perforation.
cutout. A part of the form that has been eliminated or
perforated for subsequent removal; for example, corner
cuts and binder holes.
D
data streaming. A noninterlocked method of data
transfer used by the printer channel to decrease data
transfer time during write operations.
developed image. The image that has been exposed
onto the photoconductor and covered with toner by the
developer.
developer mix. A combination of carrier beads and
toner in which the beads electrically charge the toner.
diagnostic. Pertaining to the detection and isolation of
errors in programs and faults in equipment.
diagnostic mode. The operational mode in which the
printer can check itself in case of a malfunction. When
the InfoPrint 4100 is in diagnostic mode, it is not
accepting information from the attached controlling
computer system. In the InfoPrint 4100, only service
representatives can use diagnostic mode. Contrast with
print mode and test mode.
direct attach. The environment in which an application
program directly allocates the InfoPrint 4100 printing
subsystem.
dishing. The curve a stack of forms takes when folded
or refolded at the fold perforation.
diskette. A thin, flexible, magnetic disk enclosed in a
protective jacket.
Document Composition Facility (DCF). A licensed
program that provides text formatting for the InfoPrint
4100.
dots per inch (dpi). A measure of the resolution of a
screen image or printed page.
down fold. Fanfold forms are alternately folded. When
fanfold forms are unfolded and held horizontally, a fold
is a down fold if it points down from the horizontal
surface.
drag. The resistance to forms feeding freely into the
printer; for example, the form rubbing against the
carton.
duplex printing. A mode of printing on both sides of a
form. Contrast with simplex printing.
E
electronic overlay. A collection of constant data
electronically composed in the controlling computer. Can
be merged with variable data on a page during printing.
An electronic overlay defines its own environment. It
can be in coded form or raster pattern form. See also
preprinted form.
electrophotographic process. The creation of an
image on forms by uniformly charging the
photoconductor, creating an electrostatic image on the
photoconductor, attracting negatively charged toner to
the discharged areas of the photoconductor, and
transferring and fusing the toner to forms.
emboss. To press and raise the surface of paper into
a design. Embossed paper appears thicker than
nonembossed paper, can increase printer wear, and can
degrade print quality.
end-of-forms sensor. A sensor that detects when the
last sheet of a form enters the printer.
error log. (1) A data set or file in a product or system
where error information is stored for later access. (2) A
record of machine checks, device errors, and volume
statistical data.
ESCON channel. A channel having an Enterprise
Systems Connection channel-to-control unit I/O interface
that uses optical cable as a transmission medium.
Ethernet. A local area network that allows protocols to
transmit on the network without prior coordination.
F
fanfold. Continuous forms that are alternately folded at
regular intervals, usually on a perforation.
Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI). An ANSI
standard for a 100 Mbps LAN using optical fiber cables.
fold memory. The ability of a form to refold at the fold
perforation after exposure to heat during the fusing
process.
fold perforation. The perforation on which a form is
folded during manufacture and refolded after printing.
See also page perforation.
Font Library Service Facility (FLSF). A licensed
program that provides a way to make changes to a font
while retaining its correct format, as defined by the
architecture and as required by Print Services Facility.
format. (1) The arrangement or layout of data on a
data medium. (2) The size, style, type of page, margins,
printing requirements, and so on, of a printed page.
forms. The material on which output data is printed,
such as paper. The area between perforations on
continuous printer forms. See electronic overlay and
preprinted form.
forms path. The entire route that forms travel during
processing. The forms path usually begins where the
forms are loaded and ends at the forms exit area.
Synonym for paper path.
form definition (FORMDEF). A statement that
specifies the attributes of a physical page, such as the
number of copies and one-sided or two-sided printing.
fuse. To use heat and pressure to blend toner onto
forms to make a permanent bond.
G
graphic. A symbol produced by a process such as
handwriting, drawing, or printing. See also vector
graphics.
Graphical Data Display Manager (GDDM). A licensed
program that allows pictures to be defined and
displayed through function routines.
I
IBM World Trade Corporation. A subsidiary of IBM
that manufactures and markets IBM products outside of
the United States of America.
impact printer. A printer in which printing is the result
of mechanical impacts. Contrast with nonimpact printer.
InfoPrint POWER Controller. The latest production
printer controller based on proven AFCCU technology
and enhanced for future flexibiliby.
installation. (1) In system development, preparing and
placing a functional unit in position for use. (2) A
particular computing system, including the work it does
and the people who manage it, operate it, apply it to
problems, service it, and use the results it produces.
Glossary
265
Installation planning representative. An InfoPrint
Solutions Company representative who assists
customers in planning and meeting the requirements for
installing hardware.
installation verification procedure. A procedure
distributed with InfoPrint licensed programs that tests
the newly installed InfoPrint programs to verify that the
basic facilities of the programs are functioning correctly.
Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS). Information
the system sends to printers that contains
decision-making capability. Generally, this information
contains basic formatting, error recovery, and character
data.
laser (light amplification by stimulated emission of
radiation). A device that emits a beam of coherent
light.
latent image. In a printer, the invisible image that
exists in the sensitized material after exposure but
before development.
layout plan. A list of requirements, such as electrical
and space, that must be considered before installing the
InfoPrint 4100.
IPM. Impressions Per Minute
library. A collection of related files. For example, one
line of an invoice may form an item, a complete invoice
may form a file, and the collection of inventory control
files may form a library. The libraries used by an
organization are known as the data bank.
ISO sizes. Pertaining to a set of paper sizes selected
from those standardized by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for use in data
processing.
licensed program. A separately priced program that is
offered to customers under the terms and conditions of
the Agreement for InfoPrint Solutions Company
Licensed Programs.
J
line printer. A printer that prints a line of characters as
a unit. Contrast with page printer.
jam. In a printer, a condition where forms have
become blocked or wedged in the forms path so the
printer cannot operate.
logical page. The area allocated for print on the page,
such as composed text, graphics, and fonts within
defined margins. Contrast with physical page.
JES2. An MVS subsystem that receives jobs into the
system, converts them to internal format, selects them
for running, processes their output, and purges them
from the system. In an installation with more than one
processor, each JES2 processor independently controls
its job input, scheduling, and output processing. See
also JES3.
logo. An identifying emblem, statement, or motto of a
company.
JES3. An MVS subsystem that receives jobs into the
system, converts them to internal format, selects them
for running, processes their output, and purges them
from the system. In complexes that have several loosely
coupled processing units, the JES3 program manages
processors so that the global processor exercises
centralized control over the local processors and
distributes jobs to them via a common job queue. See
also JES2.
L
LAN Adapter and Protocol Support. A subsystem
that includes the software that manages and controls
the network adapter cards, including the device drivers
for those cards as well as the protocols that are used to
communicate with other adapters on the network.
landscape orientation. Text and images that are
printed parallel to the longer side of the forms. Contrast
with portrait orientation.
M
marketing representative. An InfoPrint Solutions
Company representative who takes your order.
MICR printing. The ability of a printer either to print
with magnetic toner or to allow magnetic character ink
recognition through a postprocessing device.
microcode. In the InfoPrint 4100, refers to the
microprogramming stored on the microcode (or EC)
diskette. Microcode is used by the control unit to
manage the printer and its functions.
microperforation. Extremely small perforations. After
forms are separated, those with microperforations
typically have smoother edges than those with regular
perforations.
Multiple Virtual Storage/System Product (MVS/SP).
Consisting of MVS/System Product Version 1 and the
MVS/370 Data Facility Product operating on a
System/370 processor.
N
Network adapter. A mechanism for connecting two
unlike parts or machines, or for electrically or physically
connecting a device to a computer or to another device.
266
Planning and Configuration Guide
Network protocol. See LAN Adapter and Protocol
Support.
nonimpact printer. A printer in which printing is not
the result of mechanical impacts. Contrast with impact
printer.
nonprocess runout (NPRO). An operation that moves
forms through the forms path without printing.
O
offset paper. A grade of paper to which sizing is
added to resist moisture and surface during printing by
ink presses.
operating environment. The physical environment; for
example, temperature, humidity, layout, or power
requirements.
operating requirements. A list of requirements, such
as environmental, electrical, and space, that must be
satisfied before the InfoPrint 4100 can be installed.
Operating System/Virtual Storage (OS/VS).
A compatible extension of the IBM System/360
Operating System that supports hardware and the
extended control facilities of System/370
optical character recognition (OCR). Character
recognition that uses optical means to identify graphic
characters.
orientation. The number of degrees an object is
rotated relative to a reference; for example, the
orientation of an overlay relative to the page point of
origin. See also text orientation.
overlay. See electronic overlay.
Overlay Generation Language/370 (OGL/370). The
licensed program that is used to create electronic
overlays.
Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA). A licensed
program that creates form definitions (FORMDEFs) and
page definitions (PAGEDEFs).
page segment. An AFP resource object containing
text, image, graphics, or bar code data that can be
positioned on any addressable point on a page or an
electronic overlay.
pallet. A portable platform for handling, storing, or
moving materials.
paper break. A separation, either at a perforation or
from a tear, of the continuous-forms paper.
paper path. The entire route that forms travel while
they are being processed. The paper path usually
begins where the forms are loaded and ends at the
forms exit area. Because not all forms are paper, the
term forms path is preferred.
parallel channel. A channel having a System/360 or
System/370 channel-to-control unit interface that uses
bus-and-tag cables as a transmission medium. Contrast
with ESCON channel.
parameter. A variable that is given a constant value
for a specified application and that may denote the
application.
PC drum. A hollow cylinder that is covered with
photoconductive material.
pel (picture element). (1) An element of a raster
pattern; a point where a toned area on the
photoconductor may appear. (2) On an
all-points-addressable output medium, each pel is an
addressable unit. On a row-column addressable output
medium, the only pel addressable is the beginning of a
character cell.
P
perforation. A linear series of unconnected cuts in the
continuous-forms paper. The interval between cuts is
referred to as a tie. The perforation defines either a fold
or page boundary. See also cut, fold perforation,
microperforation, and page perforation.
page. A printed form. See also logical page and
physical page.
photoconductor. The material that is wrapped about
the drum. The medium for transferring images to paper.
page definition (PAGEDEF). A statement that
specifies attributes of a logical page, such as the width
of its margins and the orientation of text.
physical page. The form on which the printer is
printing, such as an 8¹/₂ x 11-inch sheet of paper.
Contrast with logical page.
page perforation. The perforation that defines the
page of a form. It may or may not be at a fold in the
form. A form may have several pages between each
fold. See also fold perforation.
physical planner. The person in an organization who
plans the environmental, electrical, and space
requirements for your facility.
page printer. A device that prints one page as a unit.
Contrast with line printer.
planning coordinator. The person in your
organization who is responsible for coordinating all the
planning and installation activities for the InfoPrint 4100.
plant. A manufacturing location.
Glossary
267
point of origin. The location of the first print position
on a logical page. The point of origin is usually stated in
terms of X and Y coordinates. The point of origin used
by a printer can be affected by factors such as printable
area and forms orientation.
portrait orientation. Pertaining to a display or hard
copy with greater height than width. Contrast with
landscape orientation.
preprinted form. A sheet of forms containing a
preprinted design of constant data with which variable
data can be combined. See also electronic overlay.
Print Management Facility (PMF). An interactive
menu-driven program that can be used to create and
modify fonts and to define output formatting for data
printed on the InfoPrint 4100.
print mode. The operational mode in which
information is received from the attached controlling
computer system and printed output is produced.
Contrast with test mode and diagnostic mode.
print position. The physical positions of the
characters constituting a print line relative to the form.
print quality. The quality of printed output relative to
existing standards and in comparison with jobs printed
earlier.
Print Quality Enhancement (PQE). A printer facility
that provides edge smoothing along diagonal lines, fine
fidelity protection, and independent boldness control.
Print Services Access Facility (PSAF). A
menu-driven, print-parameter selection program for
page printers controlled by PSF.
print surface. The side of a form that receives the
printed image.
printer utility module (PUM). A section of Printer 1 in
a duplex configuration. It includes:
v Operator alert assembly
v Power control panel
v System interconnection electronics
v Pre-processing/post-processing device interfaces
raster pattern. A series of picture elements (pels)
arranged in scan lines to form an image.
registration. In printing, refers to the relative print
positions of images that are printed at different times.
For example, when you process preprinted forms, the
registration is good if the new image printed by the
InfoPrint 4100 aligns correctly with the preprinted image.
Print that extends beyond box edges and text that
overlaps other text are examples of poor registration.
resource. (1) People, equipment, or material used to
perform a task or a project. (2) Any facility of a
computing system or operating system required by a job
or task, including main storage, input/output devices,
processing units, data sets, and controller processing
programs; for example, page printers use resources
such as form definitions, page definitions, and fonts.
reverse heading. A heading where each character is
highlighted by reversing the color of the character with
its background; for example, changing a black character
on a white background to a white character on a black
background.
S
scanner. A device that examines OCR, graphics,
MICR, or bar-code patterns and generates electrical
signals corresponding to the pattern. It sends the
signals to a computing device for processing.
screen or screening. In document printing, a sheet of
material, usually film, carrying a regular pattern of small
dots. When printing, ink adheres only to the dots, and
many dots close together appear solid. This method
prints large areas of ink on paper but uses much less
ink than printing the same area with solid ink.
security paper. Specially formulated paper used for
negotiable documents, such as checks, which improves
the anti-fraud characteristics of the document.
service representative. A service representative who
services InfoPrint Solutions Company products in the
field.
shift. A scheduled work period. For example, a
24-hour day is often divided into three 8-hour shifts.
Protocol. See LAN Adapter and Protocol Support.
simplex printing. Pertaining to printing on only one
side of a form. Contrast with duplex printing.
R
raster. (1) In computer graphics, a predetermined
pattern of lines that provides uniform coverage of a
display space. (2) The coordinate grid that divides the
display area of a display device. (3) In the InfoPrint
4100 Printer Subsystem, an on/off pattern of
electrostatic images produced by the laser print head
under control of the character generator.
268
Planning and Configuration Guide
sizing. A process where paper is treated to give it
resistance against penetration of liquids.
special-purpose materials. Printable items other than
blank forms; for example, preprinted forms.
stack lean. A measurable slope from the vertical of a
stack of forms. Excessive stack lean can cause failures
when feeding and refolding forms.
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). For
managing synchronous, code-transparent, serial-by-bit,
information transfer over a link connection.
tractor. The mechanism that controls movement of
continuous forms by way of holes (see tractor holes).
system reference code. A code that contains
information, such as a failing field-replaceable unit, for a
service representative (SSR).
tractor holes. The holes in the side margins on
continuous forms. When placed on the tractor pins, the
holes maintain printer alignment and registration, and
control the movement of the paper.
system programmer. A programmer who plans,
generates, maintains, extends, and controls the use of
an operating system, with the aim of improving overall
productivity of an installation. Contrast with application
programmer.
Two-Channel Switch. A hardware facility that allows
an input or output device to be attached to two
channels. In a 3900 Advanced Function Printing
System, this facility is automatically supplied when two
System/370 Parallel channels are installed.
System/370. An upward-compatible extension of the
IBM System/360. A large collection of computing system
devices that can be combined to produce a wide range
of computing systems that share many characteristics,
including a common machine language.
U
T
task. A basic unit of work to be accomplished by a
device or an operator.
up fold. Fanfold forms are alternately folded. When
fanfold forms are unfolded and held horizontally, a fold
is an up fold if it points up from the horizontal surface.
V
variable data. The data that can vary; for example,
the names and addresses in form letters.
TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol. A set of communication protocols that support
peer-to-peer connectivity functions for both local and
wide area networks.
vector graphics. Computer graphics in which display
images are generated from display commands and
coordinate data. Contrast with raster pattern.
tensile strength. A measure of the force that the
paper forms can withstand without tearing.
Virtual Storage Extended (VSE). An operating
system that is an extension of Disk Operating
System/Virtual Storage.
test mode. The operational mode in which the printer
can produce print samples, accept configuration
changes, and control traces. When the InfoPrint 4100
are in test mode, they is not accepting information from
the attached controlling computer system. Contrast with
print mode and diagnostic mode.
Virtual Storage Extended/Advanced Functions
(VSE/AF). The minimum operating system support for
a VSE-controlled installation.
void. (1) A missing part of the printed character. (2) A
missing piece of a continuous form.
text orientation. The position of text as a combination
of print direction and baseline direction.
tie. The interval between cuts of a perforation. See
also perforation.
Token. In a local area network, a particular message
or bit pattern passed successively from one attaching
device to another to indicate which protocol has
permission to transmit.
Token ring. A network with a ring topology that passes
tokens from one attaching device to another.
toner. The material that forms the image on the paper.
trace. (1) A record of the running of a computer
program. It exhibits the sequences in which the
instructions were executed. (2) To record a series of
events as they occur. (3) In the InfoPrint 4100, a service
representative (SSR) and customer analysis procedure.
Glossary
269
270
Planning and Configuration Guide
Index
Special characters
‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2,
HD3/4, and HD5/6 (both printers facing the same
direction) 86
Numerics
2-up printing 22
240 dpi IPDS resolution mode 37
300 dpi IPDS resolution mode 37
3130 bar code compatibility, configuration
480 dpi font smoothing mode 38
480/600 switchable resolution 36
600 dpi font smoothing mode 38
600 dpi IPDS resolution acceptance 37
600 dpi IPDS resolution mode 37
112
A
absolute colorimetric 228
access levels, changing 98
access, defining remote 132
acoustics 71
adapter cards, configuration 114, 115
adapter performance considerations 63
adapters
configuring 130
adding
forms definitions 137
pre/postprocessing device interfaces 136
Additional Customer Changeable Developers 31
administrator
password protection 98
Advanced Function Image and Graphics 22
Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) software
bar code 65
BCOCA support 65
functions 65
installing and verifying 68
licensed program numbers 65
optical character recognition 65
Page Printer Formatting Aid 68
purpose 18
resource resolution 38
AFP color printing 253
AFP resource 239
Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit power 73
all-points addressability 18
allow to configure printer, configuration 124
application materials
preprinted forms 94
application programmer
layout preparation 69
responsibilities 50
schedule 51
applications
bar code 65
© Copyright InfoPrint Solutions Company 2007
applications (continued)
bar codes 39
combining text and images 18
converting to Advanced Function Printers 68
environment 42
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) 65
preprinted forms 24
testing forms 94
ASHRAE 69
attachments
channel 53
channel, performance consideration 63
defining 130, 131
ESCON channel 43, 56
FICON channel 43, 55
Gigabit Ethernet 42
Gigabit Ethernet TCP/IP channel 54
local area networks 53
physical 90
audit CMR 234
auto load 39
auto NPRO at end of forms, configuration 106
automatic IPDS resolution mode 38
auxiliary power source recommendations 77
B
backup idler roll installed, configuration 108
bar code 65
Bar Code Object Content Architecture (BCOCA) 65
BCOCA support 65, 68
bar codes 39
BCOCA support 65, 68
basis weight 33, 93
beam adjustments 103
beam number, configuration 103
beam offset adjustment, configuration 103
belt, oiler 151
BIR dwell time, configuration 108
boldness, configuration 101
BTS enabled, configuration 127
Buffer/Flipper Unit for duplex printing system 10
buffer/flipper units, dimensions and weight 90
C
cable connectors 62
cable converters 59
cable lengths
print engine power cable
cable summary 72
cables
connector 77
locations 80
power 72
receptacle 77
calibration 224
72
271
CE toolkit 52, 79
changing
adapter definitions 130
forms definitions 137
pre/postprocessing device definitions 136
printer configuration 100
protocols definitions 131
touch panel language 97, 106
changing access levels 98
changing passwords 98
changing values in Snapshots 143
channel
adapters 53
adapters, performance considerations 63
cable locations 80
ESCON adapter 43, 56
FICON adapter 55
Gigabit Ethernet TCP/IP adapters 54
Multiple Host Environment 57
SNMP remote access 63
transfer modes 53
characteristics of AFP printers
4100 models 2
detail 33, 47
printer 1, 2
summary 1
system 1, 2
checklists and work sheets
attachments 161
forms 214
implementation plan 51
installation planning 158
physical planning 160
printer 161
supplies 150
system configuration 161
clearances, service 80
CMOCA 236
CMR 229
audit 234
Color conversion 230
creating 236
halftone 232
installing 236, 244
instruction 235
link 231, 236
processing mode 234
tone transfer curve 233
CMRtype 230
CMYK 222
collector, toner 151
color management resource 229
color printing 221
color space 222
combining text with images 18
communication problems 134
concepts, page-printing 18
configuration items, description
3130 bar code compatibility 112
adapter cards 114, 115
allow to configure printer 124
272
Planning and Configuration Guide
configuration items, description (continued)
auto NPRO at end of forms 106
backup idler roll installed 108
beam adjustments 103
beam number 103
beam offset adjustment 103
BIR dwell time 108
boldness 101
BTS enabled 127
contrast 101
current vector 103
cut sheet emulation 111
data timeout 123
date 107
date/time 107
default gateway address 118, 120, 122
device address 114, 115
DHCP addressing 117, 119, 120, 122
DHCP plug-and-play 117, 119, 121, 122
DHCP time out 117, 119, 121, 122
domain name of local host 118, 120, 122
double-byte font smoothing 112
E-mail 124
e-mail enabled 124
eject to front facing 106
ESCON 115
Ethernet copper integrated #1 117
Ethernet copper integrated #2 122
Ethernet copper NIC 118
Ethernet fiber NIC 120
FICON 114
fix orientation 112
font usage 110
front sheet sequence 105
FTP 123
horizontal high 103
horizontal low 104
input buffer size 110
internal stacker, Models HS2 and HD3/4 127
internet name of local host 118, 119, 121, 122
IP address 117, 119, 121, 122
IP address of primary and secondary DNS
server 122
IP address of primary DNS server 118, 120, 121
IPDS 111
IPDS printhead resolution 111
IPDS resolution 112
IPDS TCP/IP 123
jam recovery type 112
keyboard language 106
logical page increment 112
machine serial 108
maximum block length 114, 116
media speed 118, 120, 121, 122
media speed FICON link A 115
media speed FICON link B 115
multi-host environment flag 114, 116
new device name 127
offset on mark forms 127
offsetter enabled 127
oil belt 101
configuration items, description (continued)
oil rate 101
Online Access (Web Pages) 124, 126
Online Access (Web Pages) enabled 124
Online Access (Web Pages) log 124
output buffer size 110
overlay usage 110
page segment usage 110
postprocessing options 127
PQE adjustments 103
pre/postprocessing 127
preheat offset 102
preheat temperature 101
Primary 117, 118, 120, 122
print count 108
print jobs 126
print quality 101
print quality advanced 102
printer basic 105
printer configuration 100
printer counter 108
printer mode 105
printer problems e-mail address 124
Printer Reported Service and Configuration
Data 125
printer service e-mail address 124
printer speed 105
printer supplies e-mail address 124
priority 115, 116
process factory adjustment 108
Productivity Tracking Feature 126
protocols 131
PRSCD 125
PRSCD e-mail address 125
remote access 132
resource utilization 110
restricted access 126
same side printing 105
scale GOCA lines 113
scan factory adjust 108
service 108
side 1 verify factory adjust 109
side 2 verify 105
side 2 verify factory adjust 109
simulate color with gray 112
single-byte font smoothing 112
SNMP 124, 126
SNMP agent enabled 124
SNMP community name 124
SNMP trap host 124
subnet mask 118, 119, 121, 122
suppress off page errors 112
tcp port 123
time 107
time server name 107
time server type 107
time source 107
time zone 107
toner type 108
trace e-mail enabled 124
UP3I device name 128
configuration items, description (continued)
UP3I devices 127
use backup idler roll 102
vector boldness 103
vertical high 104
vertical low 104
configuring
adapters 130
e-mail trace 132
protocols 131
PRSCD 133
remote access 132
configuring the system
adapters 130
changing the language of messages 97, 106
defining adapters 130
defining forms 137
defining pre/postprocessing devices 136
defining protocols 131
defining the printer 100
forms definitions 137
pre/post processing devices 136
printer 100
protocols 131
touch panel language 97, 106
work sheets 161
connectivity problems 134
connectors, electrical 78
continuous forms 93
contrast, configuration 101
control
power 40
converter cable selection chart 60
converting applications to the Advanced Function
Printers 51, 68
coordinator, planning 49
current vector, configuration 103
Customer Changeable Developer 30
customer engineer password protection 98
Cut Sheet Emulation 23
cut sheet emulation, configuration 111
D
data object 229, 237, 238
installing 244
data security 47
data timeout, configuration 123
date, configuration 107
date/time 107
default gateway address, configuration 118, 120, 122
default trace e-mail enabled, configuration 124
defining forms 137
defining operator identities 98
defining remote access 132
deleting
forms definitions 137
pre/postprocessing device interface 136
Developer Cart 31
developer mix 151
device address, configuration 114, 115
Index
273
DHCP addressing, configuration 117, 119, 120, 122
DHCP plug-and-play, configuration 117, 119, 121, 122
DHCP time out, configuration 117, 119, 121, 122
dimensions, buffer/flipper units 90
dimensions, printer and control unit 89
dimensions, uncrated 90
Document Composition Facility (DCF) 68
domain name of local host, configuration 118, 120,
122
dot gain 225, 233
double-byte font smoothing, configuration 112
duplex models
changing the language of messages 97, 106
configuration 157
adapters 130
configuration work sheets 161
defining forms 137
language of messages 97, 106
pre/postprocessing devices 136
protocols 131
configuration work sheets 161
defining adapters 130
defining forms 137
defining pre/postprocessing devices 136
defining protocols 131
defining the printer 100
heat, output 70
host adapter choices 42
physical layout 89
power control 40
space requirements 80
system components 9
duplex systems
configurations 80
E
e-mail 132
E-mail 124
e-mail enabled, configuration 124
e-mail trace, configuring 132
editing multiple Snapshots 143
eject to front facing enabled, configuration 106
electric
power requirements 72
receptacles 78, 79
electrical requirements 77
electronic overlays 24
EN 61000-3-11 compliance statement 77
Enhanced N-Up (Power Positioning) 41
Enhanced N-Up Printing 23
enhanced toner loading 24
environment, application 42
environmental requirements 69
EPS 237, 238
error log 47
ESCON 115
ESCON channel adapter 43, 56
Ethernet copper integrated #1 117
Ethernet copper integrated #2 122
Ethernet copper NIC 118
274
Planning and Configuration Guide
Ethernet fiber NIC
120
F
factors affecting performance 63
feature codes for common cables 60
feature codes for jumper cables 58
features
adapter cable features 58
Additional Customer Changeable Developers
common cables 60
Customer Changeable Developer 30
Developer Cart 31
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR)
CCD 24
FICON 114
FICON channel adapter 43, 55
filter, fine 151
fine filter 151
fire safety 72
fixed orientation, configuration 112
flat panel touchscreen
changing language 97, 106
flat-panel touch screen 40
folding requirements 93
font smoothing mode 38
font usage, configuration 110
fonts
MICR 27
resident 48
TrueType/OpenType 24
fonts, MICR 27
form bar code, settings 139
form name, settings 138
format requirements for MICR 27, 28
format verification for MICR 30
forms
adding or changing 137
basis weight 33, 93
defining 137
definition xiv
definition (FORMDEF) 24
deleting 137
form bar code 139
form name 138
handling 39
host setup ID 139
length 138
marks 139
oversize paper 140
paper weight 140
preprinted 94
requirements 93
selecting 93
settings work sheet 214
sizes and types used 34
special-purpose materials 93
stacking 93
storage recommendations 94
testing 93
tractorless 139
31
forms (continued)
units 138
width 138
front sheet sequence, configuration
FTP 123
fuser oil 151
105
G
gamut 224
GIF 237
Gigabit Ethernet channel adapters
grayscale 226, 243
grayscale printing 221
grounding
recommendations 76
54
H
halftone 225, 226, 232
halftone CMR
generic 232
halftone pattern 225
handling forms 39
hardware requirements 42
heat
dissipation 70
output 70
height, stack 93
horizontal high, configuration 103
horizontal low, configuration 104
host adapter 42
host setup ID, settings 139
humidity 69
I
IBM supplies
customer-replaceable items 155
developer mix 151
fine filter 151
fuser oil 151
maintenance items 155
oiler belt 151
ordering 155
storing 155
suggested quantities 149
toner 151
toner collector 151
warranty return 155
work sheet 150
ICC 227
ICC profile 222, 226, 227, 229
identities, defining and managing 98
image 240
images 18
combining with text 18
orienting 19
implementation plan checklist 51
InfoPrint 4100 243
InfoPrint 4100 Models 88
InfoPrint 5000 242
InfoPrint Manager 41, 245
InfoPrint ProcessDirector 246
ink, suggestions for selection 94
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models
HD3/4 82
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models
HD5/6 83
Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models
MD1/2 81
input buffer size, configuration 110
installation
planning work sheet 158
requirements 91
verification procedures 53
installing licensed programs 68
instruction CMR 235
intelligent printer data stream (IPDS) 42, 53
resolution acceptance
240 dpi mode 37
300 dpi mode 37
600 dpi mode 37
600 dpi only 37
automatic mode 38
interface point requirements for low frequency
phenomena 77
interface, preprocessor and postprocessor 43
internal stacker, configuration 127
International Color Consortium 227
internet name of local host, configuration 118, 119,
121, 122
IOCA 237
IP address of primary and secondary DNS server,
configuration 122
IP address of primary DNS server, configuration 118,
120, 121
IP address, configuration 117, 119, 121, 122
IPDS 111
IPDS mode 41
IPDS printhead resolution, configuration 111
IPDS resolution, configuration 112
IPDS TCP/IP 123
J
jam recovery type, configuration 112
JFIF 237, 238
JPEG 237
jumper cables, feature codes 58
K
keyboard language, configuration
106
L
LAN communication problems 134
LAN connectivity problems 134
landscape orientation 20
language, changing for touch panel 97, 106
languages, operator console 46
Index
275
layout considerations 89
Lef-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models
MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 84
Length, settings 138
levels, noise emission 71
libraries, resource 23
line screen frequency 225
line-printer data conversion 68
link CMR 236
loading Snapshots from diskette 147
loading Snapshots from flash memory device 146
Local Area Network (LAN)
adapters 53
Gigabit Ethernet TCP/IP channel adapter 54
Local/Remote power control 40
logical page 24
logical page increment, configuration 112
low frequency phenomena 77
M
machine serial, configuration 108
Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) CCD 25
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) CCD 24
managing users 98
margins, page 39
marks, settings 139
materials, special-purpose
preprinted forms 94
storage 94
maximum block length, configuration 114, 116
measurements, clearance 80
media speed FICON link A, configuration 115
media speed FICON link B, configuration 115
media speed, configuration 118, 120, 121, 122
media-relative colorimetric 228
MICR 25
MICR fonts 27
MICR format requirements 27
MICR quality and format verification 30
MICR quality control 29
MICR with InfoPrint 4100 25
mix, developer 151
multi-host environment flag, configuration 114, 116
Multiple Host Environment 57
N
N-Up Positioning 41
new device name, configuration 127
noise emission levels 71
Normal and Tumble Duplex Printing 21
O
obtaining supplies 149, 217
OCR (Optical Character Recognition)
applications 65
print area 39
offset on mark forms, configuration 127
offsetter enabled, configuration 127
276
Planning and Configuration Guide
oil belt, configuration 101
oil pan 151
oil rate, configuration 101
oil, fuser 151
oiler belt 151
Online Access (Web Pages) 124, 132
Online Access (Web Pages) enabled,
configuration 124
Online Access (Web Pages) log, clear 124
Online Access (Web Pages) log, show 124
Online Access (Web Pages), configuration 126
operating requirements
electrical 72
environmental 69
operator 50
console, languages 46
password protection 98
Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
applications 65
print area 39
optional Advanced Function Image and Graphics
ordering supplies 155
orient text and images 19
outlet, vacuum cleaner 79
output buffer size, configuration 110
output, heat 70
overlay usage, configuration 110
oversize paper, settings 140
P
page
definition (PAGEDEF) 24
margins 39
orientation 19
physical and logical 24
segments 24
page segment usage, configuration 110
page-printing concepts 18
PAGEDEFs 24
pallets, shipping 89
paper 229
paper weight, settings 140
passwords, changing 98
PCS 227
PDF 237
perceptual 228
performance, printer 33, 69
physical
attachment requirements 90
layout 89
page 24
planner
layout preparation 69
responsibilities 50
schedule 51
planning work sheet 160
requirements 72
physical installation
power and grounding recommendations
planner, physical 50
74
22
planning coordinator 49
planning team
application programmer 50
layout preparation 69
responsibilities 50
schedule 51
organizing 49
physical planner 50
layout preparation 69
responsibilities 50
schedule 51
planning coordinator 49
printer operator 50
system programmer 50
layout preparation 69
responsibilities 50
schedule 51
plug and connector requirements 78
portrait orientation 20
postprocessing options 127
postprocessor interface 43
power
Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit 73
Auxiliary power source recommendations 77
print engine 72
printer control unit 73
recommendations 74
power cable and receptacle 77
power control 40
power outlet summary 72
Power Positioning (Enhanced N-Up) 23, 41
PPFA 245
PPFA support for UP3I 46
PQE adjustments 103
PQE boldness, configuration 101
pre-installation tasks 91
pre/postprocessing 127
pre/postprocessing devices
defining 136
preheat offset, configuration 102
preheat temperature, configuration 101
preparing the physical environment 69
preprinted forms 94
preprocessor interface 43
Primary, configuration 117, 118, 120, 122
print
area 39
material 33
quality 34
quality enhancement 34
samples 47
print count, configuration 108
print engine power 72
print engine power cable lengths 72
print jobs, configuration 126
Print On Demand 41
Print On Demand (POD) 41
print quality 101
print quality advanced 102
print quality, saving to a Snapshot 143
Print Services Facility (PSF) 41
printer 242
configuration 157
dimensions and weight 89
operator 50
resolution 36
240/300 IPDS mode 37
480/600 switchable 36
600 dpi IPDS mode 37
automatic IPDS mode 38
font smoothing mode 38
IPDS acceptance (600 dpi only) 37
splicing station 39
printer basic 105
printer characteristics 1, 2
printer configuration 100
printer control unit power 73
printer counter, configuration 108
printer mode, configuration 105
printer problems e-mail address, configuration 124
printer registration 224
Printer Reported Service and Configuration Data 125
Printer Reported Service and Configuration Data
(PRSCD) 132
printer servcie e-mail address, configuration 124
printer speed, configuration 105
printer supplies e-mail address, configuration 124
printers
480/600 switchable 36
printing
basic N-up 22
basic page 18
cut sheet emulation 23
enhanced N-up 23
multiple-up 22
options 23
normal duplex 21
speed 33
tumbling duplex 21
printing MICR documents 25
priority, configuration 115, 116
procedures, installation verification 53
process factory adjustment, configuration 108
processing mode 234
link 236
production print mode 41
Productivity Tracking Feature, configuration 126
Profile Connection Space 227, 230
programmers, planning for AFP programs 50
protocols 131
configuring 131
PRSCD 125
PRSCD (Printer Reported Service and Configuration
Data) 132
PRSCD e-mail address, configuration 125
PRSCD, configuring 133
Q
quality verification for MICR
quality, MICR 29
30
Index
277
R
RAT 239
receptacle, electrical 78
relative humidity, permitted values 69
reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) 46
error log 47
message display 46
print samples 47
traces 47
remote access 132
remote access, configuring 132
remote access, defining 132
rendering intent 224, 228
requirements
Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) Licensed
Programs 64
channel adapter 53
electrical 72
environmental 69
forms 93
forms folding 93
hardware 42
humidity 69
installation 91
physical attachment 90
power 72
software 41
sound levels 71
special-purpose materials 33
temperature 69
ventilation 69
resident fonts 48
resource 241
installing 244
resource access table 239
resource libraries 23
resource library 238, 239
resource resolution, AFP 38
resource utilization 110
resources
electronic overlays 24
form definition (FORMDEF) 24
page definition (PAGEDEF) 24
page segments 24
restricted access 126
RGB 222
Russellstoll plugs 77
S
safety 72
same side printing, configuration 105
saturation 228
scale GOCA lines, configuration 113
scan factory adjust, configuration 108
security, data 47
Select Medium Modification (SMM) 41, 43
selecting a cable feature 58
selecting forms 93
service 108
278
Planning and Configuration Guide
service (continued)
access 80
cable locations 80
clearances 80
service current capacity requirements 77
service representative password protection 98
serviceability 46
Setting up the printer for printing with MICR toner 27
shipping pallets 89
short circuit ratio requirements 77
side 1 verify factory adjust, configuration 109
side 2 verify factory adjust, configuration 109
side 2 verify, configuration 105
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 132
simplex models
heat, output 70
host adapter choices 42
power control 40
printer components 7
simulate color with gray, configuration 112
single-byte font smoothing, configuration 112
SMM (Select Medium Modification) 41, 43
Snapshots
creating new Snapshots 142
editing 143
loading from diskette 147
loading from USB flash memory device 146
saving print quality settings 143
SNMP 124
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 132
SNMP agent enabled, configuration 124
SNMP community name, configuration 124
SNMP trap host, configuration 124
SNMP, configuration 126
software requirements 41
IPDS mode (production print mode) 41
Print On Demand 41
sound levels 71
special-purpose materials
preprinted forms 94
requirements 33
splicing station 39
stack height 93
stacking forms 93
storage
forms 94
supplies 155
stored information, using 23
storing resources in libraries 23
structures, FORMDEF and PAGEDEF 24
subnet mask, configuration 118, 119, 121, 122
supplies, IBM
customer-replaceable items 155
developer mix 151
fine filter 151
fuser oil 151
maintenance items 155
oiler belt 151
ordering 155
storing 155
suggested quantities 149
supplies, IBM (continued)
toner 151
toner collector 151
warranty returns 155
work sheet 150
suppress off page errors, configuration 112
system characteristics 1, 2
system configurations and usage
’H’ configuration for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and
HD5/6 16
dual simplex 9, 10
duplex printing 9
inline duplex 12, 13, 14
left-angle dual simplex 17
left-angle duplex for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, and
HD5/6 15
printer components 7
simplex models 8
simplex printing 7, 10
system components 9
system libraries 23
system programmer
layout preparation 69
responsibilities 50
schedule 51
system requirements for UP3I 45
T
TCP port, configuration 123
TCP/IP 123
Gigabit Ethernet channel adapters 54
teflon mat 151
temperature 69
testing forms 93, 94
text
combining with images 18
orienting 19
threading, automatic 39
TIFF 237, 238
time source, configuration 107
time zone, configuration 107
time, configuration 107
tone transfer curve 225, 226
tone transfer curve CMR
generic 233
toner 151
toner collector 151
toner loading, enhanced 24
toner type, configuration 108
toolkit, CE 52, 79
traces 47
tractorless, settings 139
trademarks 257
transfer modes 53
transferring Snapshots between printers 146, 147
troubleshooting LAN communication problems 134
troubleshooting LAN connectivity problems 134
TrueType/OpenType Fonts 24
U
Unicode print data 24
units, settings 138
universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface
(UP3I) 44
UP3I 44, 46
UP3I conduits 46
UP3I devices 44
UP3I system requirements 45
UP3I device name, configuration 128
UP3I devices 127
use backup idler roll, configuration 102
using stored information 23
V
vacuum cleaner 79, 149
vector boldness, configuration 103
ventilation 69
verification procedures, installation 53
verifying licensed programs 68
vertical high, configuration 104
vertical low, configuration 104
voltage requirements 72
W
wear strip 151
Web Pages (Online Access) 124
weight and dimensions, buffer/flipper units
weight and dimensions, crated 90
width, settings 138
wiring information 72
work sheets and checklists
implementation plan 51
installation planning 158
physical planning 160
supplies 150
system configuration 161
90
Index
279
280
Planning and Configuration Guide
File Number: S370/4300/9370-16
Printed in USA
G550-0990-00